<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Michael+Woehry</id>
	<title>VACC Austria DokuWiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Michael+Woehry"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php/Special:Contributions/Michael_Woehry"/>
	<updated>2026-05-09T06:02:21Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.35.9</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Vienna&amp;diff=4044</id>
		<title>Vienna</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Vienna&amp;diff=4044"/>
		<updated>2019-01-21T15:08:30Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Arrival */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox airport&lt;br /&gt;
| name         = Vienna International Airport&lt;br /&gt;
| nativename   = Flughafen Wien-Schwechat&lt;br /&gt;
| image        = Flughafenschwechat.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width  = 200&lt;br /&gt;
| image2       = &lt;br /&gt;
| image2-width = &lt;br /&gt;
| IATA         = VIE&lt;br /&gt;
| ICAO         = LOWW&lt;br /&gt;
| type         = Private&lt;br /&gt;
| owner        =&lt;br /&gt;
| operator     = Flughafen Wien AG&lt;br /&gt;
| city-served  = Vienna, Austria&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Bratislava, Slovakia&lt;br /&gt;
| location     = Schwechat, Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| hub          = Austrian Airlines&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Niki&lt;br /&gt;
| elevation-f  = 600&lt;br /&gt;
| elevation-m  = 183&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates  = &lt;br /&gt;
| latd =  48 | latm = 06 | lats = 37 | latNS = N&lt;br /&gt;
| longd= 016 | longm= 34 | longs= 11 | longEW= E&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_type       =&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_region     = AT&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_notitle    = yes&lt;br /&gt;
| website      = [http://www.viennaairport.com/ www.viennaairport.com]&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map            = Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_label_position =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_label          = LOWW&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map_alt        =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_mapsize        =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_image          = Austria relief location map.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map_caption    = Location within Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| metric-elev  = Y&lt;br /&gt;
| metric-rwy   = y&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-number    = 11/29&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-length-f  = 11,483&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-length-m  = 3,500&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-surface   = Asphalt&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-number    = 16/34&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-length-f  = 11,811&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-length-m  = 3,600&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-surface   = Asphalt&lt;br /&gt;
| footnotes    = &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;amp;nbsp; Vienna International Airport ([http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Air_Transport_Association_airport_code IATA]:&amp;amp;nbsp;VIE, [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Civil_Aviation_Organization_airport_code ICAO]: LOWW)  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The airport of the Austrian capital Vienna, is located south-east of the city and is connected by a train (called [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/City_Airport_Train CAT – City Airport Train]) as well as a motorway to the Viennese City Center. The airport is famous as an east-west junction with over 15.9 Million passengers a year. The profitable Eastern Europe routes are provided by the homecarrier [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Austrian_Airlines Austrian]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the year 2005 the “[http://www.viennaairport.com/ Flughafen Wien AG]” started to build the so called [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vienna_International_Airport#Terminals SKYLINK], an additional terminal in the eastern part of the airport which offers space for 91 check-in counters as well as 51 additional gates (5 of them are A380-approved). In the year 2006 the new air traffic control tower was opened. With it’s height of 109 meters, it’s the tallest control tower in Europe. It can be seen from far away, so it got a landmark for the airport. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Terminal 1 offers space for the carriers of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Star_Alliance Star Alliance], [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aeroflot Aeroflot] and [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Emirates_%28airline%29 Emirates]. Terminal 1A is located right opposite of Terminal 1 and is a temporarily building to bridge the capacity constraint until the new SKYLINK Terminal will be finished soon. In this Terminal there are mainly located low-cost carriers, such as [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Niki_%28airline%29 NIKI], [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Air_Berlin Air Berlin], [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Germanwings Germanwings] etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The airport offers 2 asphalt [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Runway runways] with orientations 11/29 (3.500 meters) and 16/34 (3.600 meters). All of them are equipped with a [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Instrument_landing_system ILS system], 2 of them offer [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CAT_III#ILS_categories CAT III B]. Just recently (April 2012), a decision has been made to build a third runway parallel to 11-29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= LOWW for Pilots =&lt;br /&gt;
== A quick look around ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna Airport is a medium range international airport, which - like many of them - has grown organically. Like all airports of this kind, they have peculiarities - most of them making life complicated for controllers.&lt;br /&gt;
=== On the ground ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Aprons and parking positions ====&lt;br /&gt;
''(See the LOWW charts &amp;quot;overview&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;parking positions&amp;quot;, available [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW here]].)'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''General Aviation West''' is at the far west behind the exits Q1 and P1. This area is for really small aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Technical base''' (if you blew up a tyre on landing) is next, opposite Exit 14 and 15. Many GAC pilots start from there (for whichever reason).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''General Aviation East''' is not really in the East, but rather &amp;quot;east of the GAC West&amp;quot;: It is on L between technical base and the main terminal. Most GAC pilots start from here. In real life, this area is for the business class aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Apron B''' is next to the East come two rows of stands for smaller aircraft. Regional planes like Dash, Beech 1900 or RJ87 go there often, and it is also the company apron of Austrian regional connector flights. Beware of the one-way street: '''B71-B75''' enter and leave (pushback) via taxilane 31. '''B81-B85''' enter via taxilane 32 and leave (no pushback) via taxilane 31. '''B91-B96''' enter via taxilane 33 and leave (no pushback) via taxilane 32.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Pier West''' covers the '''C gates'''. It is the &amp;quot;Schengen&amp;quot; pier with no passport control. Log in for your departure, if you fly within the Schengen area. The two gates at the corner (C36 and C39) are suitable for Heavies. Expect some broken glass in the terminal, if you log into C31 with an Airbus A330 :-). Most Non-Star-Alliance-aircraft depart from here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Pier East''' covers the '''D gates'''. This is the &amp;quot;Non-Schengen&amp;quot; pier, mostly for Non-Star-Alliance-aircraft. Again, the corner goates (D23, D27) are Heavy gates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Further East along taxiway L are the '''E stands'''. In this area the low cost carriers park, as gates are more expensive than stands. Aircraft park nose-south: They enter via taxilane 36 and leave onto L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* East of the main terminal is the new Skylink, now named '''[[http://www.viennaairport.com/jart/prj3/va/main.jart?rel=en&amp;amp;content-id=1249344074277 Check-in 3]]''' Access for aircraft is divided: For the south (F01-F37, odd), aircraft use taxilane 35/26, for the north (F04-F36, even), it's taxilane 40. Check-in 3 is Schengen-and-non-Schengen and is the home pier for the Star Alliance fleet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Taxilanes 35/36/37''' are one-way streets, but the direction changes according to runway configuration. Expect ground controller to issue a &amp;quot;pushback facing east/west&amp;quot; clearance. If you don't get any facing instruction, face east, as you are most likely to get out this way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Taxilane 38''' is exit-only: Aircraft parking on F41-F59, as well as F41-F50 use it to leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''The H apron''' is north of taxilane 40. H41-H48 are pushback stands, H49-H50 leave via taxilane 42.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''The K apron''' is for cargo and at the very northeast, accessible via E and taxilane 43.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Where to log in with which aircraft ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to fly as-real-as-it-gets, then you can use the following guidelines for login:&lt;br /&gt;
* Star Alliance birds of the size of an A320 or more usually park at the skylink.&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Star Alliance aircraft park on the pier West (Schengen) and East (Non-Schengen)&lt;br /&gt;
* Low Cost Carrier usually start from the E apron and F41-F59, as well as the H apron.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cargo leaves from K&lt;br /&gt;
* Larger GAC aircraft (like a Challenger) leave from B or GAC East&lt;br /&gt;
* Small GAC aircraft (like sports aircraft) leave from GAC West.&lt;br /&gt;
* Super-large birds have  F44, F48, H49 and H50. Sorry, no gates for the A380 in Vienna.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On high traffic situations (Like the Weekly Wed) it might be good to look around before loggin in - you might sit on top of another aircraft. You can use [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/gatelist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW the gatelist]] from the VACC Austria homepage or use the more remote places to log in, like the corners of the Pier (C31, C42, D21, D29) or the mostly vacant Check-in 3. There is no hassle on B, E and H stands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxiing ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is, where the &amp;quot;evolutionary&amp;quot; design of Vienna airport hits reality - Vienna is not quite spacious to taxi around. Make sure to be slow enough and to follow ground controller instructions - you find yourself in the grass, in a building, head on to or even crashing into a fellow aircraft if you don't. Be aware: There is '''no follow-me car''' in Vienna, even if MSFS shows you one. Be so kind and follow the instructions of the ground controller or face a disconnect. On busy days (like the weekly wednesday) you can seriously screw up traffic by not following instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, unlike other major airports (like EGLL), there are no unique and published taxiing directions - taxiways are used in either way following runway configuration. There is not even a uniform standard, how controllers handle traffic for specific runway configurations - it's where controllers do it their ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you fly into Vienna with ATC control, then you get taxi instructions - follow them, full stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't, then you can use the following rough guidelines: You have some roughly parallel taxiways with W-L into one way and M-E into the opposite direction. Easiest is to follow these taxiways right-around. ATC will guide you differently (as right-around-only is inefficient), but if you have not, it is most likely that you don't end up nose-to-nose:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 11''': Taxi down to L (coming from the north: via W), changing to M on exit 12, if you are more than a light aircraft (wingspan - you might smash some Cessnas standing around on GAC East) for departure from A11 or A12. Taxilane 36 is eastwards for W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 16''': Taxi down to M and via Ex1 and Ex24 up E to Ex31. Taxilane 36 is eastwards to W where (strictly followed) you should drive right-around (W, Ex2, Ex1, Ex24, E) or you might look out and cut the corner to the left and Ex23 to E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 29''': Taxi down to M (from north: via W)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 34''': Taxi down to M and E - from north: only via E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 11''': Leave on M, take next exit to L to the terminal, or take A2, Ex1 Ex24 and E for the northern stands. Right-around would also mean that taxilane 36 is eastwards via Ex7 and taxilane 35.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 16''': Vacate to E and taxi up to the northern aprons, or turn left for L for the terminal and for taxilanes 35+36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 29''': Leave to M and taxi to the terminal, or take Ex1, Ex24 and E for the northern apron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 34''': Take W and taxilane 40 for the northern aprons or L for and taxilane 35-36 for GAC, terminals and southern stands. If you brake hard, you can cut the corner and vacate B4 and L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Departure ==&lt;br /&gt;
... from Vienna is like any other larger airport. You have delivery, Ground and Tower and follow the procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clearance procedures ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== ATIS ====&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS in Vienna is at 122.95. Please tune it in before asking for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voice? Newbie? ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Controllers love voice partners, and if this is not possible, voice receivers. If you are text-only, then expect delays - voice is first when times get busy. &lt;br /&gt;
* Don't worry if you are a newbie - everyone was one. Please write it into the comment field of your flight plan and take your time. Controllers get along with pilots asking &amp;quot;say again&amp;quot;, taxiing slowly, but doing the right thing. They are unhappy with those who hurry and mess up traffic (and they dislike impolite people). If you want guidance for your first flights (via teamspeak for example), you might want to make you a login at the [[http://forum.vacc-austria.org VACC Austria Forum]] and put a request into [[http://forum.vacc-austria.org/viewforum.php?f=58 this section]], and some people will be glad to help you along.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Clearance Altitudes ====&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has one clearance altitude for all departures: 5000ft (local QNH). Transition altitude is 10.000ft. For you it means, that you have to change your Altimeter when passing 10.000ft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SID's ====&lt;br /&gt;
ATC will give you a SID. &lt;br /&gt;
* If you are unable for RNAV departures (i.e.: if you don't have a FMC), then please state it in your flight plan and file a non-RNAV flight plan. There are two non-RNAV departures per runway (to WGM VOR and SNU VOR), from which you will get one. From there, you will fly direct to your next waypoint.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are unable to fly any SID, then you can ask for vectored departure. You will receive initial instructions from Delivery (like &amp;quot;stay on runway heading&amp;quot;) and further instructions from ATC. Bear in mind, that ATC can deny vectored departures, if the air is boiling.&lt;br /&gt;
* For noise abatement reasons, some SID's are closed after 21:00 local time. See the charts to find out, which. Some controllers use noise abatement, some don't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Push and Start ===&lt;br /&gt;
Some folks ask for push and fall asleep. Some folks ask for push, push and then fall asleep. Both mess up ground movements considerably. If you are slow with your plane, then please start up on the gate and ask for push when ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== After takeoff ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Vienna has defined SIDs, so you should fly them. Most of them are RNAV. There are vectored departures on request or on ATC's discretion. &lt;br /&gt;
* Expect to be transferred to the appropriate approach controller right after takeoff - tune the frequency into standby already on ground. If Tower forgets, you might remind him with a polite &amp;quot;&amp;lt;callsign&amp;gt;, airborne&amp;quot; once you pass 2000ft or so :-)&lt;br /&gt;
* On all normal days, there is only one approach controller at 134,675. &lt;br /&gt;
* On very-high-traffic events like &amp;quot;Finally Austria&amp;quot;, Approach is divided north-south, with either 134.675 or 118,775 - look for the active stations while still on ground. &amp;quot;Your&amp;quot; station varies according to the SID you fly - it's in the SID chart.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no Approach controller is online, LOVV_CTR with 134,350 is your station, and if this station is offline, contact UNICOM at 122,8.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Arrival ==&lt;br /&gt;
You will enter the approach procedures when reaching the initial STAR waypoints. Before you reach them, listen to LOWW_ATIS at 122.95, and when transferred to Approach, you call in with callsign, position, altitude and ATIS on board:&lt;br /&gt;
 LHA123: Wien Radar, Leipzig 123, inbound VENEN, FL250 descending FL170, ATIS B on board.&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_APP: Leipzig 123, Wien radar, identified, information B correct, descend FL140.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like every major European airport, LOWW has STAR, transitions and approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
=== STAR's ===&lt;br /&gt;
ATC will most likely clear you a STAR and an altitude to descend. At the end of each STAR is a holding which you might be ordered to enter. Altitudes on the chart are minimum altitudes - ATC will tell you the altitude to fly. In the case of Vienna, STARs are also unique: From each entry point, there is only one STAR to take. As a pilot, you could as well key in the STAR into your FMC straight away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transitions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Transitions are runway-specific - you know your transition once you know the runway, and you know the runway once you listened to ATIS. Therefore, you can key in your STAR while on cruise, and your transition while approaching or flying the STAR. Don't forget: ATC will clear you the transition or vector you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is vital that you have your transition on FMC, as (see below) ATC might order you to cut corners and then continue to fly the transition. It is also vital, that you look up the approach chart once you know the runway and key in the necessary frequencies for ILS approach and for go-around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Director ===&lt;br /&gt;
On busy days, the last phase before landing has a Director: He/she is responsible for the nitty-gritty spacing in the &amp;quot;string of pearls&amp;quot; where traffic is dense for two reasons: 1) aircraft merge from all directions, and 2) aircraft slow down. Expect ATC transfer you, if Director is online. Usually, you call Director &amp;quot;callsign only&amp;quot; - no position, no altitude, only &amp;quot;Wien Director, Leipzig 123&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once established on the ILS (or on visual final), Director will transfer you to Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to handle directions on approach ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Usually, you are cleared a STAR and transition - As soon as you know ATIS, you are able to key in the transition into your FMC.&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to fly direct to a waypoint on the STAR or transition, you fly direct to the waypoint and then follow the transition to final.&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC never orders an altitude, you fly the altitudes on the charts (but ATC never does that).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC vectors you, than you leave STAR and transition altogether (expect to be vectored or direct-ed until final).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to level UNTIL a certain waypoint, descend at your descretion, as long as you match the altitude at that point (you can level off before).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to level AT a certain waypoint, then calculate well and descend to meet the altitude at the point - not before, not after.&lt;br /&gt;
* If in doubt, ask!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Vacating and taxiing ===&lt;br /&gt;
* If you land on rwy11/29 and rwy34, then vacating throws you into the middle of dense traffic - stop on the exit and wait for ground instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you vacate from rwy16, then you can roll on D or E and wait for instructions - frees the exit for the next hungry aircraft behind. You should definitely stop before D4 or E4 - they are ILS critical holding points which you should not cross without clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Communication failure ===&lt;br /&gt;
... is published on the charts - please set your squawk 7600 and follow it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Airports]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Vienna&amp;diff=4043</id>
		<title>Vienna</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Vienna&amp;diff=4043"/>
		<updated>2019-01-21T15:08:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Arrival */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox airport&lt;br /&gt;
| name         = Vienna International Airport&lt;br /&gt;
| nativename   = Flughafen Wien-Schwechat&lt;br /&gt;
| image        = Flughafenschwechat.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width  = 200&lt;br /&gt;
| image2       = &lt;br /&gt;
| image2-width = &lt;br /&gt;
| IATA         = VIE&lt;br /&gt;
| ICAO         = LOWW&lt;br /&gt;
| type         = Private&lt;br /&gt;
| owner        =&lt;br /&gt;
| operator     = Flughafen Wien AG&lt;br /&gt;
| city-served  = Vienna, Austria&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Bratislava, Slovakia&lt;br /&gt;
| location     = Schwechat, Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| hub          = Austrian Airlines&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Niki&lt;br /&gt;
| elevation-f  = 600&lt;br /&gt;
| elevation-m  = 183&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates  = &lt;br /&gt;
| latd =  48 | latm = 06 | lats = 37 | latNS = N&lt;br /&gt;
| longd= 016 | longm= 34 | longs= 11 | longEW= E&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_type       =&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_region     = AT&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_notitle    = yes&lt;br /&gt;
| website      = [http://www.viennaairport.com/ www.viennaairport.com]&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map            = Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_label_position =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_label          = LOWW&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map_alt        =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_mapsize        =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_image          = Austria relief location map.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map_caption    = Location within Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| metric-elev  = Y&lt;br /&gt;
| metric-rwy   = y&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-number    = 11/29&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-length-f  = 11,483&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-length-m  = 3,500&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-surface   = Asphalt&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-number    = 16/34&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-length-f  = 11,811&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-length-m  = 3,600&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-surface   = Asphalt&lt;br /&gt;
| footnotes    = &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;amp;nbsp; Vienna International Airport ([http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Air_Transport_Association_airport_code IATA]:&amp;amp;nbsp;VIE, [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Civil_Aviation_Organization_airport_code ICAO]: LOWW)  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The airport of the Austrian capital Vienna, is located south-east of the city and is connected by a train (called [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/City_Airport_Train CAT – City Airport Train]) as well as a motorway to the Viennese City Center. The airport is famous as an east-west junction with over 15.9 Million passengers a year. The profitable Eastern Europe routes are provided by the homecarrier [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Austrian_Airlines Austrian]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the year 2005 the “[http://www.viennaairport.com/ Flughafen Wien AG]” started to build the so called [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vienna_International_Airport#Terminals SKYLINK], an additional terminal in the eastern part of the airport which offers space for 91 check-in counters as well as 51 additional gates (5 of them are A380-approved). In the year 2006 the new air traffic control tower was opened. With it’s height of 109 meters, it’s the tallest control tower in Europe. It can be seen from far away, so it got a landmark for the airport. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Terminal 1 offers space for the carriers of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Star_Alliance Star Alliance], [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aeroflot Aeroflot] and [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Emirates_%28airline%29 Emirates]. Terminal 1A is located right opposite of Terminal 1 and is a temporarily building to bridge the capacity constraint until the new SKYLINK Terminal will be finished soon. In this Terminal there are mainly located low-cost carriers, such as [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Niki_%28airline%29 NIKI], [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Air_Berlin Air Berlin], [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Germanwings Germanwings] etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The airport offers 2 asphalt [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Runway runways] with orientations 11/29 (3.500 meters) and 16/34 (3.600 meters). All of them are equipped with a [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Instrument_landing_system ILS system], 2 of them offer [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CAT_III#ILS_categories CAT III B]. Just recently (April 2012), a decision has been made to build a third runway parallel to 11-29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= LOWW for Pilots =&lt;br /&gt;
== A quick look around ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna Airport is a medium range international airport, which - like many of them - has grown organically. Like all airports of this kind, they have peculiarities - most of them making life complicated for controllers.&lt;br /&gt;
=== On the ground ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Aprons and parking positions ====&lt;br /&gt;
''(See the LOWW charts &amp;quot;overview&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;parking positions&amp;quot;, available [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW here]].)'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''General Aviation West''' is at the far west behind the exits Q1 and P1. This area is for really small aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Technical base''' (if you blew up a tyre on landing) is next, opposite Exit 14 and 15. Many GAC pilots start from there (for whichever reason).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''General Aviation East''' is not really in the East, but rather &amp;quot;east of the GAC West&amp;quot;: It is on L between technical base and the main terminal. Most GAC pilots start from here. In real life, this area is for the business class aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Apron B''' is next to the East come two rows of stands for smaller aircraft. Regional planes like Dash, Beech 1900 or RJ87 go there often, and it is also the company apron of Austrian regional connector flights. Beware of the one-way street: '''B71-B75''' enter and leave (pushback) via taxilane 31. '''B81-B85''' enter via taxilane 32 and leave (no pushback) via taxilane 31. '''B91-B96''' enter via taxilane 33 and leave (no pushback) via taxilane 32.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Pier West''' covers the '''C gates'''. It is the &amp;quot;Schengen&amp;quot; pier with no passport control. Log in for your departure, if you fly within the Schengen area. The two gates at the corner (C36 and C39) are suitable for Heavies. Expect some broken glass in the terminal, if you log into C31 with an Airbus A330 :-). Most Non-Star-Alliance-aircraft depart from here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Pier East''' covers the '''D gates'''. This is the &amp;quot;Non-Schengen&amp;quot; pier, mostly for Non-Star-Alliance-aircraft. Again, the corner goates (D23, D27) are Heavy gates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Further East along taxiway L are the '''E stands'''. In this area the low cost carriers park, as gates are more expensive than stands. Aircraft park nose-south: They enter via taxilane 36 and leave onto L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* East of the main terminal is the new Skylink, now named '''[[http://www.viennaairport.com/jart/prj3/va/main.jart?rel=en&amp;amp;content-id=1249344074277 Check-in 3]]''' Access for aircraft is divided: For the south (F01-F37, odd), aircraft use taxilane 35/26, for the north (F04-F36, even), it's taxilane 40. Check-in 3 is Schengen-and-non-Schengen and is the home pier for the Star Alliance fleet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Taxilanes 35/36/37''' are one-way streets, but the direction changes according to runway configuration. Expect ground controller to issue a &amp;quot;pushback facing east/west&amp;quot; clearance. If you don't get any facing instruction, face east, as you are most likely to get out this way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Taxilane 38''' is exit-only: Aircraft parking on F41-F59, as well as F41-F50 use it to leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''The H apron''' is north of taxilane 40. H41-H48 are pushback stands, H49-H50 leave via taxilane 42.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''The K apron''' is for cargo and at the very northeast, accessible via E and taxilane 43.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Where to log in with which aircraft ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to fly as-real-as-it-gets, then you can use the following guidelines for login:&lt;br /&gt;
* Star Alliance birds of the size of an A320 or more usually park at the skylink.&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Star Alliance aircraft park on the pier West (Schengen) and East (Non-Schengen)&lt;br /&gt;
* Low Cost Carrier usually start from the E apron and F41-F59, as well as the H apron.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cargo leaves from K&lt;br /&gt;
* Larger GAC aircraft (like a Challenger) leave from B or GAC East&lt;br /&gt;
* Small GAC aircraft (like sports aircraft) leave from GAC West.&lt;br /&gt;
* Super-large birds have  F44, F48, H49 and H50. Sorry, no gates for the A380 in Vienna.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On high traffic situations (Like the Weekly Wed) it might be good to look around before loggin in - you might sit on top of another aircraft. You can use [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/gatelist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW the gatelist]] from the VACC Austria homepage or use the more remote places to log in, like the corners of the Pier (C31, C42, D21, D29) or the mostly vacant Check-in 3. There is no hassle on B, E and H stands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxiing ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is, where the &amp;quot;evolutionary&amp;quot; design of Vienna airport hits reality - Vienna is not quite spacious to taxi around. Make sure to be slow enough and to follow ground controller instructions - you find yourself in the grass, in a building, head on to or even crashing into a fellow aircraft if you don't. Be aware: There is '''no follow-me car''' in Vienna, even if MSFS shows you one. Be so kind and follow the instructions of the ground controller or face a disconnect. On busy days (like the weekly wednesday) you can seriously screw up traffic by not following instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, unlike other major airports (like EGLL), there are no unique and published taxiing directions - taxiways are used in either way following runway configuration. There is not even a uniform standard, how controllers handle traffic for specific runway configurations - it's where controllers do it their ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you fly into Vienna with ATC control, then you get taxi instructions - follow them, full stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't, then you can use the following rough guidelines: You have some roughly parallel taxiways with W-L into one way and M-E into the opposite direction. Easiest is to follow these taxiways right-around. ATC will guide you differently (as right-around-only is inefficient), but if you have not, it is most likely that you don't end up nose-to-nose:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 11''': Taxi down to L (coming from the north: via W), changing to M on exit 12, if you are more than a light aircraft (wingspan - you might smash some Cessnas standing around on GAC East) for departure from A11 or A12. Taxilane 36 is eastwards for W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 16''': Taxi down to M and via Ex1 and Ex24 up E to Ex31. Taxilane 36 is eastwards to W where (strictly followed) you should drive right-around (W, Ex2, Ex1, Ex24, E) or you might look out and cut the corner to the left and Ex23 to E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 29''': Taxi down to M (from north: via W)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 34''': Taxi down to M and E - from north: only via E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 11''': Leave on M, take next exit to L to the terminal, or take A2, Ex1 Ex24 and E for the northern stands. Right-around would also mean that taxilane 36 is eastwards via Ex7 and taxilane 35.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 16''': Vacate to E and taxi up to the northern aprons, or turn left for L for the terminal and for taxilanes 35+36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 29''': Leave to M and taxi to the terminal, or take Ex1, Ex24 and E for the northern apron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 34''': Take W and taxilane 40 for the northern aprons or L for and taxilane 35-36 for GAC, terminals and southern stands. If you brake hard, you can cut the corner and vacate B4 and L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Departure ==&lt;br /&gt;
... from Vienna is like any other larger airport. You have delivery, Ground and Tower and follow the procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clearance procedures ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== ATIS ====&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS in Vienna is at 122.95. Please tune it in before asking for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voice? Newbie? ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Controllers love voice partners, and if this is not possible, voice receivers. If you are text-only, then expect delays - voice is first when times get busy. &lt;br /&gt;
* Don't worry if you are a newbie - everyone was one. Please write it into the comment field of your flight plan and take your time. Controllers get along with pilots asking &amp;quot;say again&amp;quot;, taxiing slowly, but doing the right thing. They are unhappy with those who hurry and mess up traffic (and they dislike impolite people). If you want guidance for your first flights (via teamspeak for example), you might want to make you a login at the [[http://forum.vacc-austria.org VACC Austria Forum]] and put a request into [[http://forum.vacc-austria.org/viewforum.php?f=58 this section]], and some people will be glad to help you along.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Clearance Altitudes ====&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has one clearance altitude for all departures: 5000ft (local QNH). Transition altitude is 10.000ft. For you it means, that you have to change your Altimeter when passing 10.000ft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SID's ====&lt;br /&gt;
ATC will give you a SID. &lt;br /&gt;
* If you are unable for RNAV departures (i.e.: if you don't have a FMC), then please state it in your flight plan and file a non-RNAV flight plan. There are two non-RNAV departures per runway (to WGM VOR and SNU VOR), from which you will get one. From there, you will fly direct to your next waypoint.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are unable to fly any SID, then you can ask for vectored departure. You will receive initial instructions from Delivery (like &amp;quot;stay on runway heading&amp;quot;) and further instructions from ATC. Bear in mind, that ATC can deny vectored departures, if the air is boiling.&lt;br /&gt;
* For noise abatement reasons, some SID's are closed after 21:00 local time. See the charts to find out, which. Some controllers use noise abatement, some don't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Push and Start ===&lt;br /&gt;
Some folks ask for push and fall asleep. Some folks ask for push, push and then fall asleep. Both mess up ground movements considerably. If you are slow with your plane, then please start up on the gate and ask for push when ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== After takeoff ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Vienna has defined SIDs, so you should fly them. Most of them are RNAV. There are vectored departures on request or on ATC's discretion. &lt;br /&gt;
* Expect to be transferred to the appropriate approach controller right after takeoff - tune the frequency into standby already on ground. If Tower forgets, you might remind him with a polite &amp;quot;&amp;lt;callsign&amp;gt;, airborne&amp;quot; once you pass 2000ft or so :-)&lt;br /&gt;
* On all normal days, there is only one approach controller at 134,675. &lt;br /&gt;
* On very-high-traffic events like &amp;quot;Finally Austria&amp;quot;, Approach is divided north-south, with either 134.675 or 118,775 - look for the active stations while still on ground. &amp;quot;Your&amp;quot; station varies according to the SID you fly - it's in the SID chart.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no Approach controller is online, LOVV_CTR with 134,350 is your station, and if this station is offline, contact UNICOM at 122,8.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Arrival ==&lt;br /&gt;
You will enter the approach procedures when reaching the initial STAR waypoints. Before you reach them, listen to LOWW_ATIS at 122.95, and when transferred to Approach, you call in with callsign, position, altitude and ATIS on board:&lt;br /&gt;
 LHA123: Wien Radar, Leipzig123, inbound VENEN, FL250 descending FL170, ATIS B on board.&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_APP: Leipzig 123, Wien radar, identified, information B correct, descend FL140.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like every major European airport, LOWW has STAR, transitions and approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
=== STAR's ===&lt;br /&gt;
ATC will most likely clear you a STAR and an altitude to descend. At the end of each STAR is a holding which you might be ordered to enter. Altitudes on the chart are minimum altitudes - ATC will tell you the altitude to fly. In the case of Vienna, STARs are also unique: From each entry point, there is only one STAR to take. As a pilot, you could as well key in the STAR into your FMC straight away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transitions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Transitions are runway-specific - you know your transition once you know the runway, and you know the runway once you listened to ATIS. Therefore, you can key in your STAR while on cruise, and your transition while approaching or flying the STAR. Don't forget: ATC will clear you the transition or vector you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is vital that you have your transition on FMC, as (see below) ATC might order you to cut corners and then continue to fly the transition. It is also vital, that you look up the approach chart once you know the runway and key in the necessary frequencies for ILS approach and for go-around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Director ===&lt;br /&gt;
On busy days, the last phase before landing has a Director: He/she is responsible for the nitty-gritty spacing in the &amp;quot;string of pearls&amp;quot; where traffic is dense for two reasons: 1) aircraft merge from all directions, and 2) aircraft slow down. Expect ATC transfer you, if Director is online. Usually, you call Director &amp;quot;callsign only&amp;quot; - no position, no altitude, only &amp;quot;Wien Director, Leipzig 123&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once established on the ILS (or on visual final), Director will transfer you to Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to handle directions on approach ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Usually, you are cleared a STAR and transition - As soon as you know ATIS, you are able to key in the transition into your FMC.&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to fly direct to a waypoint on the STAR or transition, you fly direct to the waypoint and then follow the transition to final.&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC never orders an altitude, you fly the altitudes on the charts (but ATC never does that).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC vectors you, than you leave STAR and transition altogether (expect to be vectored or direct-ed until final).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to level UNTIL a certain waypoint, descend at your descretion, as long as you match the altitude at that point (you can level off before).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to level AT a certain waypoint, then calculate well and descend to meet the altitude at the point - not before, not after.&lt;br /&gt;
* If in doubt, ask!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Vacating and taxiing ===&lt;br /&gt;
* If you land on rwy11/29 and rwy34, then vacating throws you into the middle of dense traffic - stop on the exit and wait for ground instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you vacate from rwy16, then you can roll on D or E and wait for instructions - frees the exit for the next hungry aircraft behind. You should definitely stop before D4 or E4 - they are ILS critical holding points which you should not cross without clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Communication failure ===&lt;br /&gt;
... is published on the charts - please set your squawk 7600 and follow it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Airports]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Vienna&amp;diff=4042</id>
		<title>Vienna</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Vienna&amp;diff=4042"/>
		<updated>2019-01-21T15:06:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* After takeoff */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox airport&lt;br /&gt;
| name         = Vienna International Airport&lt;br /&gt;
| nativename   = Flughafen Wien-Schwechat&lt;br /&gt;
| image        = Flughafenschwechat.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width  = 200&lt;br /&gt;
| image2       = &lt;br /&gt;
| image2-width = &lt;br /&gt;
| IATA         = VIE&lt;br /&gt;
| ICAO         = LOWW&lt;br /&gt;
| type         = Private&lt;br /&gt;
| owner        =&lt;br /&gt;
| operator     = Flughafen Wien AG&lt;br /&gt;
| city-served  = Vienna, Austria&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Bratislava, Slovakia&lt;br /&gt;
| location     = Schwechat, Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| hub          = Austrian Airlines&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Niki&lt;br /&gt;
| elevation-f  = 600&lt;br /&gt;
| elevation-m  = 183&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates  = &lt;br /&gt;
| latd =  48 | latm = 06 | lats = 37 | latNS = N&lt;br /&gt;
| longd= 016 | longm= 34 | longs= 11 | longEW= E&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_type       =&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_region     = AT&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_notitle    = yes&lt;br /&gt;
| website      = [http://www.viennaairport.com/ www.viennaairport.com]&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map            = Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_label_position =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_label          = LOWW&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map_alt        =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_mapsize        =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_image          = Austria relief location map.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map_caption    = Location within Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| metric-elev  = Y&lt;br /&gt;
| metric-rwy   = y&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-number    = 11/29&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-length-f  = 11,483&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-length-m  = 3,500&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-surface   = Asphalt&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-number    = 16/34&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-length-f  = 11,811&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-length-m  = 3,600&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-surface   = Asphalt&lt;br /&gt;
| footnotes    = &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;amp;nbsp; Vienna International Airport ([http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Air_Transport_Association_airport_code IATA]:&amp;amp;nbsp;VIE, [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Civil_Aviation_Organization_airport_code ICAO]: LOWW)  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The airport of the Austrian capital Vienna, is located south-east of the city and is connected by a train (called [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/City_Airport_Train CAT – City Airport Train]) as well as a motorway to the Viennese City Center. The airport is famous as an east-west junction with over 15.9 Million passengers a year. The profitable Eastern Europe routes are provided by the homecarrier [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Austrian_Airlines Austrian]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the year 2005 the “[http://www.viennaairport.com/ Flughafen Wien AG]” started to build the so called [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vienna_International_Airport#Terminals SKYLINK], an additional terminal in the eastern part of the airport which offers space for 91 check-in counters as well as 51 additional gates (5 of them are A380-approved). In the year 2006 the new air traffic control tower was opened. With it’s height of 109 meters, it’s the tallest control tower in Europe. It can be seen from far away, so it got a landmark for the airport. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Terminal 1 offers space for the carriers of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Star_Alliance Star Alliance], [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aeroflot Aeroflot] and [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Emirates_%28airline%29 Emirates]. Terminal 1A is located right opposite of Terminal 1 and is a temporarily building to bridge the capacity constraint until the new SKYLINK Terminal will be finished soon. In this Terminal there are mainly located low-cost carriers, such as [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Niki_%28airline%29 NIKI], [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Air_Berlin Air Berlin], [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Germanwings Germanwings] etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The airport offers 2 asphalt [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Runway runways] with orientations 11/29 (3.500 meters) and 16/34 (3.600 meters). All of them are equipped with a [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Instrument_landing_system ILS system], 2 of them offer [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CAT_III#ILS_categories CAT III B]. Just recently (April 2012), a decision has been made to build a third runway parallel to 11-29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= LOWW for Pilots =&lt;br /&gt;
== A quick look around ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna Airport is a medium range international airport, which - like many of them - has grown organically. Like all airports of this kind, they have peculiarities - most of them making life complicated for controllers.&lt;br /&gt;
=== On the ground ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Aprons and parking positions ====&lt;br /&gt;
''(See the LOWW charts &amp;quot;overview&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;parking positions&amp;quot;, available [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW here]].)'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''General Aviation West''' is at the far west behind the exits Q1 and P1. This area is for really small aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Technical base''' (if you blew up a tyre on landing) is next, opposite Exit 14 and 15. Many GAC pilots start from there (for whichever reason).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''General Aviation East''' is not really in the East, but rather &amp;quot;east of the GAC West&amp;quot;: It is on L between technical base and the main terminal. Most GAC pilots start from here. In real life, this area is for the business class aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Apron B''' is next to the East come two rows of stands for smaller aircraft. Regional planes like Dash, Beech 1900 or RJ87 go there often, and it is also the company apron of Austrian regional connector flights. Beware of the one-way street: '''B71-B75''' enter and leave (pushback) via taxilane 31. '''B81-B85''' enter via taxilane 32 and leave (no pushback) via taxilane 31. '''B91-B96''' enter via taxilane 33 and leave (no pushback) via taxilane 32.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Pier West''' covers the '''C gates'''. It is the &amp;quot;Schengen&amp;quot; pier with no passport control. Log in for your departure, if you fly within the Schengen area. The two gates at the corner (C36 and C39) are suitable for Heavies. Expect some broken glass in the terminal, if you log into C31 with an Airbus A330 :-). Most Non-Star-Alliance-aircraft depart from here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Pier East''' covers the '''D gates'''. This is the &amp;quot;Non-Schengen&amp;quot; pier, mostly for Non-Star-Alliance-aircraft. Again, the corner goates (D23, D27) are Heavy gates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Further East along taxiway L are the '''E stands'''. In this area the low cost carriers park, as gates are more expensive than stands. Aircraft park nose-south: They enter via taxilane 36 and leave onto L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* East of the main terminal is the new Skylink, now named '''[[http://www.viennaairport.com/jart/prj3/va/main.jart?rel=en&amp;amp;content-id=1249344074277 Check-in 3]]''' Access for aircraft is divided: For the south (F01-F37, odd), aircraft use taxilane 35/26, for the north (F04-F36, even), it's taxilane 40. Check-in 3 is Schengen-and-non-Schengen and is the home pier for the Star Alliance fleet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Taxilanes 35/36/37''' are one-way streets, but the direction changes according to runway configuration. Expect ground controller to issue a &amp;quot;pushback facing east/west&amp;quot; clearance. If you don't get any facing instruction, face east, as you are most likely to get out this way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Taxilane 38''' is exit-only: Aircraft parking on F41-F59, as well as F41-F50 use it to leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''The H apron''' is north of taxilane 40. H41-H48 are pushback stands, H49-H50 leave via taxilane 42.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''The K apron''' is for cargo and at the very northeast, accessible via E and taxilane 43.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Where to log in with which aircraft ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to fly as-real-as-it-gets, then you can use the following guidelines for login:&lt;br /&gt;
* Star Alliance birds of the size of an A320 or more usually park at the skylink.&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Star Alliance aircraft park on the pier West (Schengen) and East (Non-Schengen)&lt;br /&gt;
* Low Cost Carrier usually start from the E apron and F41-F59, as well as the H apron.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cargo leaves from K&lt;br /&gt;
* Larger GAC aircraft (like a Challenger) leave from B or GAC East&lt;br /&gt;
* Small GAC aircraft (like sports aircraft) leave from GAC West.&lt;br /&gt;
* Super-large birds have  F44, F48, H49 and H50. Sorry, no gates for the A380 in Vienna.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On high traffic situations (Like the Weekly Wed) it might be good to look around before loggin in - you might sit on top of another aircraft. You can use [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/gatelist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW the gatelist]] from the VACC Austria homepage or use the more remote places to log in, like the corners of the Pier (C31, C42, D21, D29) or the mostly vacant Check-in 3. There is no hassle on B, E and H stands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxiing ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is, where the &amp;quot;evolutionary&amp;quot; design of Vienna airport hits reality - Vienna is not quite spacious to taxi around. Make sure to be slow enough and to follow ground controller instructions - you find yourself in the grass, in a building, head on to or even crashing into a fellow aircraft if you don't. Be aware: There is '''no follow-me car''' in Vienna, even if MSFS shows you one. Be so kind and follow the instructions of the ground controller or face a disconnect. On busy days (like the weekly wednesday) you can seriously screw up traffic by not following instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, unlike other major airports (like EGLL), there are no unique and published taxiing directions - taxiways are used in either way following runway configuration. There is not even a uniform standard, how controllers handle traffic for specific runway configurations - it's where controllers do it their ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you fly into Vienna with ATC control, then you get taxi instructions - follow them, full stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't, then you can use the following rough guidelines: You have some roughly parallel taxiways with W-L into one way and M-E into the opposite direction. Easiest is to follow these taxiways right-around. ATC will guide you differently (as right-around-only is inefficient), but if you have not, it is most likely that you don't end up nose-to-nose:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 11''': Taxi down to L (coming from the north: via W), changing to M on exit 12, if you are more than a light aircraft (wingspan - you might smash some Cessnas standing around on GAC East) for departure from A11 or A12. Taxilane 36 is eastwards for W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 16''': Taxi down to M and via Ex1 and Ex24 up E to Ex31. Taxilane 36 is eastwards to W where (strictly followed) you should drive right-around (W, Ex2, Ex1, Ex24, E) or you might look out and cut the corner to the left and Ex23 to E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 29''': Taxi down to M (from north: via W)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 34''': Taxi down to M and E - from north: only via E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 11''': Leave on M, take next exit to L to the terminal, or take A2, Ex1 Ex24 and E for the northern stands. Right-around would also mean that taxilane 36 is eastwards via Ex7 and taxilane 35.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 16''': Vacate to E and taxi up to the northern aprons, or turn left for L for the terminal and for taxilanes 35+36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 29''': Leave to M and taxi to the terminal, or take Ex1, Ex24 and E for the northern apron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 34''': Take W and taxilane 40 for the northern aprons or L for and taxilane 35-36 for GAC, terminals and southern stands. If you brake hard, you can cut the corner and vacate B4 and L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Departure ==&lt;br /&gt;
... from Vienna is like any other larger airport. You have delivery, Ground and Tower and follow the procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clearance procedures ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== ATIS ====&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS in Vienna is at 122.95. Please tune it in before asking for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voice? Newbie? ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Controllers love voice partners, and if this is not possible, voice receivers. If you are text-only, then expect delays - voice is first when times get busy. &lt;br /&gt;
* Don't worry if you are a newbie - everyone was one. Please write it into the comment field of your flight plan and take your time. Controllers get along with pilots asking &amp;quot;say again&amp;quot;, taxiing slowly, but doing the right thing. They are unhappy with those who hurry and mess up traffic (and they dislike impolite people). If you want guidance for your first flights (via teamspeak for example), you might want to make you a login at the [[http://forum.vacc-austria.org VACC Austria Forum]] and put a request into [[http://forum.vacc-austria.org/viewforum.php?f=58 this section]], and some people will be glad to help you along.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Clearance Altitudes ====&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has one clearance altitude for all departures: 5000ft (local QNH). Transition altitude is 10.000ft. For you it means, that you have to change your Altimeter when passing 10.000ft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SID's ====&lt;br /&gt;
ATC will give you a SID. &lt;br /&gt;
* If you are unable for RNAV departures (i.e.: if you don't have a FMC), then please state it in your flight plan and file a non-RNAV flight plan. There are two non-RNAV departures per runway (to WGM VOR and SNU VOR), from which you will get one. From there, you will fly direct to your next waypoint.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are unable to fly any SID, then you can ask for vectored departure. You will receive initial instructions from Delivery (like &amp;quot;stay on runway heading&amp;quot;) and further instructions from ATC. Bear in mind, that ATC can deny vectored departures, if the air is boiling.&lt;br /&gt;
* For noise abatement reasons, some SID's are closed after 21:00 local time. See the charts to find out, which. Some controllers use noise abatement, some don't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Push and Start ===&lt;br /&gt;
Some folks ask for push and fall asleep. Some folks ask for push, push and then fall asleep. Both mess up ground movements considerably. If you are slow with your plane, then please start up on the gate and ask for push when ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== After takeoff ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Vienna has defined SIDs, so you should fly them. Most of them are RNAV. There are vectored departures on request or on ATC's discretion. &lt;br /&gt;
* Expect to be transferred to the appropriate approach controller right after takeoff - tune the frequency into standby already on ground. If Tower forgets, you might remind him with a polite &amp;quot;&amp;lt;callsign&amp;gt;, airborne&amp;quot; once you pass 2000ft or so :-)&lt;br /&gt;
* On all normal days, there is only one approach controller at 134,675. &lt;br /&gt;
* On very-high-traffic events like &amp;quot;Finally Austria&amp;quot;, Approach is divided north-south, with either 134.675 or 118,775 - look for the active stations while still on ground. &amp;quot;Your&amp;quot; station varies according to the SID you fly - it's in the SID chart.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no Approach controller is online, LOVV_CTR with 134,350 is your station, and if this station is offline, contact UNICOM at 122,8.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Arrival ==&lt;br /&gt;
You will enter the approach procedures when reaching the initial STAR waypoints. Before you reach them, listen to LOWW_ATIS at 122.95, and when transferred to Approach, you call in with callsign, position, altitude and ATIS on board:&lt;br /&gt;
 LHA123: Wien Radar, Leipzig123, inbound VENEN, FL270 descending to FL240, ATIS B on board.&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_APP: Leipzig 123, Wien radar, identified, cleared VENEN2W arrival, descend FL100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like every major European airport, LOWW has STAR, transitions and approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
=== STAR's ===&lt;br /&gt;
ATC will most likely clear you a STAR and an altitude to descend. At the end of each STAR is a holding which you might be ordered to enter. Altitudes on the chart are minimum altitudes - ATC will tell you the altitude to fly. In the case of Vienna, STARs are also unique: From each entry point, there is only one STAR to take. As a pilot, you could as well key in the STAR into your FMC straight away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transitions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Transitions are runway-specific - you know your transition once you know the runway, and you know the runway once you listened to ATIS. Therefore, you can key in your STAR while on cruise, and your transition while approaching or flying the STAR. Don't forget: ATC will clear you the transition or vector you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is vital that you have your transition on FMC, as (see below) ATC might order you to cut corners and then continue to fly the transition. It is also vital, that you look up the approach chart once you know the runway and key in the necessary frequencies for ILS approach and for go-around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Director ===&lt;br /&gt;
On busy days, the last phase before landing has a Director: He/she is responsible for the nitty-gritty spacing in the &amp;quot;string of pearls&amp;quot; where traffic is dense for two reasons: 1) aircraft merge from all directions, and 2) aircraft slow down. Expect ATC transfer you, if Director is online. Usually, you call Director &amp;quot;callsign only&amp;quot; - no position, no altitude, only &amp;quot;Wien Director, Leipzig 123&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once established on the ILS (or on visual final), Director will transfer you to Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to handle directions on approach ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Usually, you are cleared a STAR and transition - As soon as you know ATIS, you are able to key in the transition into your FMC.&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to fly direct to a waypoint on the STAR or transition, you fly direct to the waypoint and then follow the transition to final.&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC never orders an altitude, you fly the altitudes on the charts (but ATC never does that).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC vectors you, than you leave STAR and transition altogether (expect to be vectored or direct-ed until final).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to level UNTIL a certain waypoint, descend at your descretion, as long as you match the altitude at that point (you can level off before).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to level AT a certain waypoint, then calculate well and descend to meet the altitude at the point - not before, not after.&lt;br /&gt;
* If in doubt, ask!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Vacating and taxiing ===&lt;br /&gt;
* If you land on rwy11/29 and rwy34, then vacating throws you into the middle of dense traffic - stop on the exit and wait for ground instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you vacate from rwy16, then you can roll on D or E and wait for instructions - frees the exit for the next hungry aircraft behind. You should definitely stop before D4 or E4 - they are ILS critical holding points which you should not cross without clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Communication failure ===&lt;br /&gt;
... is published on the charts - please set your squawk 7600 and follow it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Airports]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Vienna&amp;diff=4041</id>
		<title>Vienna</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Vienna&amp;diff=4041"/>
		<updated>2019-01-21T15:06:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* After takeoff */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Infobox airport&lt;br /&gt;
| name         = Vienna International Airport&lt;br /&gt;
| nativename   = Flughafen Wien-Schwechat&lt;br /&gt;
| image        = Flughafenschwechat.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| image-width  = 200&lt;br /&gt;
| image2       = &lt;br /&gt;
| image2-width = &lt;br /&gt;
| IATA         = VIE&lt;br /&gt;
| ICAO         = LOWW&lt;br /&gt;
| type         = Private&lt;br /&gt;
| owner        =&lt;br /&gt;
| operator     = Flughafen Wien AG&lt;br /&gt;
| city-served  = Vienna, Austria&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Bratislava, Slovakia&lt;br /&gt;
| location     = Schwechat, Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| hub          = Austrian Airlines&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Niki&lt;br /&gt;
| elevation-f  = 600&lt;br /&gt;
| elevation-m  = 183&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates  = &lt;br /&gt;
| latd =  48 | latm = 06 | lats = 37 | latNS = N&lt;br /&gt;
| longd= 016 | longm= 34 | longs= 11 | longEW= E&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_type       =&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_region     = AT&lt;br /&gt;
| coordinates_notitle    = yes&lt;br /&gt;
| website      = [http://www.viennaairport.com/ www.viennaairport.com]&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map            = Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_label_position =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_label          = LOWW&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map_alt        =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_mapsize        =&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_image          = Austria relief location map.jpg&lt;br /&gt;
| pushpin_map_caption    = Location within Austria&lt;br /&gt;
| metric-elev  = Y&lt;br /&gt;
| metric-rwy   = y&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-number    = 11/29&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-length-f  = 11,483&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-length-m  = 3,500&lt;br /&gt;
| r1-surface   = Asphalt&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-number    = 16/34&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-length-f  = 11,811&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-length-m  = 3,600&lt;br /&gt;
| r2-surface   = Asphalt&lt;br /&gt;
| footnotes    = &lt;br /&gt;
}}&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;amp;nbsp; Vienna International Airport ([http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Air_Transport_Association_airport_code IATA]:&amp;amp;nbsp;VIE, [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/International_Civil_Aviation_Organization_airport_code ICAO]: LOWW)  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The airport of the Austrian capital Vienna, is located south-east of the city and is connected by a train (called [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/City_Airport_Train CAT – City Airport Train]) as well as a motorway to the Viennese City Center. The airport is famous as an east-west junction with over 15.9 Million passengers a year. The profitable Eastern Europe routes are provided by the homecarrier [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Austrian_Airlines Austrian]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the year 2005 the “[http://www.viennaairport.com/ Flughafen Wien AG]” started to build the so called [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vienna_International_Airport#Terminals SKYLINK], an additional terminal in the eastern part of the airport which offers space for 91 check-in counters as well as 51 additional gates (5 of them are A380-approved). In the year 2006 the new air traffic control tower was opened. With it’s height of 109 meters, it’s the tallest control tower in Europe. It can be seen from far away, so it got a landmark for the airport. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Terminal 1 offers space for the carriers of [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Star_Alliance Star Alliance], [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aeroflot Aeroflot] and [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Emirates_%28airline%29 Emirates]. Terminal 1A is located right opposite of Terminal 1 and is a temporarily building to bridge the capacity constraint until the new SKYLINK Terminal will be finished soon. In this Terminal there are mainly located low-cost carriers, such as [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Niki_%28airline%29 NIKI], [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Air_Berlin Air Berlin], [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Germanwings Germanwings] etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The airport offers 2 asphalt [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Runway runways] with orientations 11/29 (3.500 meters) and 16/34 (3.600 meters). All of them are equipped with a [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Instrument_landing_system ILS system], 2 of them offer [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/CAT_III#ILS_categories CAT III B]. Just recently (April 2012), a decision has been made to build a third runway parallel to 11-29.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= LOWW for Pilots =&lt;br /&gt;
== A quick look around ==&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna Airport is a medium range international airport, which - like many of them - has grown organically. Like all airports of this kind, they have peculiarities - most of them making life complicated for controllers.&lt;br /&gt;
=== On the ground ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== Aprons and parking positions ====&lt;br /&gt;
''(See the LOWW charts &amp;quot;overview&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;parking positions&amp;quot;, available [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/chartlist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW here]].)'' &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''General Aviation West''' is at the far west behind the exits Q1 and P1. This area is for really small aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Technical base''' (if you blew up a tyre on landing) is next, opposite Exit 14 and 15. Many GAC pilots start from there (for whichever reason).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''General Aviation East''' is not really in the East, but rather &amp;quot;east of the GAC West&amp;quot;: It is on L between technical base and the main terminal. Most GAC pilots start from here. In real life, this area is for the business class aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Apron B''' is next to the East come two rows of stands for smaller aircraft. Regional planes like Dash, Beech 1900 or RJ87 go there often, and it is also the company apron of Austrian regional connector flights. Beware of the one-way street: '''B71-B75''' enter and leave (pushback) via taxilane 31. '''B81-B85''' enter via taxilane 32 and leave (no pushback) via taxilane 31. '''B91-B96''' enter via taxilane 33 and leave (no pushback) via taxilane 32.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Pier West''' covers the '''C gates'''. It is the &amp;quot;Schengen&amp;quot; pier with no passport control. Log in for your departure, if you fly within the Schengen area. The two gates at the corner (C36 and C39) are suitable for Heavies. Expect some broken glass in the terminal, if you log into C31 with an Airbus A330 :-). Most Non-Star-Alliance-aircraft depart from here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Pier East''' covers the '''D gates'''. This is the &amp;quot;Non-Schengen&amp;quot; pier, mostly for Non-Star-Alliance-aircraft. Again, the corner goates (D23, D27) are Heavy gates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Further East along taxiway L are the '''E stands'''. In this area the low cost carriers park, as gates are more expensive than stands. Aircraft park nose-south: They enter via taxilane 36 and leave onto L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* East of the main terminal is the new Skylink, now named '''[[http://www.viennaairport.com/jart/prj3/va/main.jart?rel=en&amp;amp;content-id=1249344074277 Check-in 3]]''' Access for aircraft is divided: For the south (F01-F37, odd), aircraft use taxilane 35/26, for the north (F04-F36, even), it's taxilane 40. Check-in 3 is Schengen-and-non-Schengen and is the home pier for the Star Alliance fleet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Taxilanes 35/36/37''' are one-way streets, but the direction changes according to runway configuration. Expect ground controller to issue a &amp;quot;pushback facing east/west&amp;quot; clearance. If you don't get any facing instruction, face east, as you are most likely to get out this way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Taxilane 38''' is exit-only: Aircraft parking on F41-F59, as well as F41-F50 use it to leave.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''The H apron''' is north of taxilane 40. H41-H48 are pushback stands, H49-H50 leave via taxilane 42.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''The K apron''' is for cargo and at the very northeast, accessible via E and taxilane 43.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Where to log in with which aircraft ====&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to fly as-real-as-it-gets, then you can use the following guidelines for login:&lt;br /&gt;
* Star Alliance birds of the size of an A320 or more usually park at the skylink.&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Star Alliance aircraft park on the pier West (Schengen) and East (Non-Schengen)&lt;br /&gt;
* Low Cost Carrier usually start from the E apron and F41-F59, as well as the H apron.&lt;br /&gt;
* Cargo leaves from K&lt;br /&gt;
* Larger GAC aircraft (like a Challenger) leave from B or GAC East&lt;br /&gt;
* Small GAC aircraft (like sports aircraft) leave from GAC West.&lt;br /&gt;
* Super-large birds have  F44, F48, H49 and H50. Sorry, no gates for the A380 in Vienna.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On high traffic situations (Like the Weekly Wed) it might be good to look around before loggin in - you might sit on top of another aircraft. You can use [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/gatelist&amp;amp;icao=LOWW the gatelist]] from the VACC Austria homepage or use the more remote places to log in, like the corners of the Pier (C31, C42, D21, D29) or the mostly vacant Check-in 3. There is no hassle on B, E and H stands.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Taxiing ====&lt;br /&gt;
This is, where the &amp;quot;evolutionary&amp;quot; design of Vienna airport hits reality - Vienna is not quite spacious to taxi around. Make sure to be slow enough and to follow ground controller instructions - you find yourself in the grass, in a building, head on to or even crashing into a fellow aircraft if you don't. Be aware: There is '''no follow-me car''' in Vienna, even if MSFS shows you one. Be so kind and follow the instructions of the ground controller or face a disconnect. On busy days (like the weekly wednesday) you can seriously screw up traffic by not following instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also, unlike other major airports (like EGLL), there are no unique and published taxiing directions - taxiways are used in either way following runway configuration. There is not even a uniform standard, how controllers handle traffic for specific runway configurations - it's where controllers do it their ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you fly into Vienna with ATC control, then you get taxi instructions - follow them, full stop.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you don't, then you can use the following rough guidelines: You have some roughly parallel taxiways with W-L into one way and M-E into the opposite direction. Easiest is to follow these taxiways right-around. ATC will guide you differently (as right-around-only is inefficient), but if you have not, it is most likely that you don't end up nose-to-nose:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 11''': Taxi down to L (coming from the north: via W), changing to M on exit 12, if you are more than a light aircraft (wingspan - you might smash some Cessnas standing around on GAC East) for departure from A11 or A12. Taxilane 36 is eastwards for W.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 16''': Taxi down to M and via Ex1 and Ex24 up E to Ex31. Taxilane 36 is eastwards to W where (strictly followed) you should drive right-around (W, Ex2, Ex1, Ex24, E) or you might look out and cut the corner to the left and Ex23 to E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 29''': Taxi down to M (from north: via W)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Departure rwy 34''': Taxi down to M and E - from north: only via E.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 11''': Leave on M, take next exit to L to the terminal, or take A2, Ex1 Ex24 and E for the northern stands. Right-around would also mean that taxilane 36 is eastwards via Ex7 and taxilane 35.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 16''': Vacate to E and taxi up to the northern aprons, or turn left for L for the terminal and for taxilanes 35+36.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 29''': Leave to M and taxi to the terminal, or take Ex1, Ex24 and E for the northern apron.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Arrival rwy 34''': Take W and taxilane 40 for the northern aprons or L for and taxilane 35-36 for GAC, terminals and southern stands. If you brake hard, you can cut the corner and vacate B4 and L.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Departure ==&lt;br /&gt;
... from Vienna is like any other larger airport. You have delivery, Ground and Tower and follow the procedures.&lt;br /&gt;
=== Clearance procedures ===&lt;br /&gt;
==== ATIS ====&lt;br /&gt;
ATIS in Vienna is at 122.95. Please tune it in before asking for clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Voice? Newbie? ====&lt;br /&gt;
* Controllers love voice partners, and if this is not possible, voice receivers. If you are text-only, then expect delays - voice is first when times get busy. &lt;br /&gt;
* Don't worry if you are a newbie - everyone was one. Please write it into the comment field of your flight plan and take your time. Controllers get along with pilots asking &amp;quot;say again&amp;quot;, taxiing slowly, but doing the right thing. They are unhappy with those who hurry and mess up traffic (and they dislike impolite people). If you want guidance for your first flights (via teamspeak for example), you might want to make you a login at the [[http://forum.vacc-austria.org VACC Austria Forum]] and put a request into [[http://forum.vacc-austria.org/viewforum.php?f=58 this section]], and some people will be glad to help you along.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Clearance Altitudes ====&lt;br /&gt;
Vienna has one clearance altitude for all departures: 5000ft (local QNH). Transition altitude is 10.000ft. For you it means, that you have to change your Altimeter when passing 10.000ft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== SID's ====&lt;br /&gt;
ATC will give you a SID. &lt;br /&gt;
* If you are unable for RNAV departures (i.e.: if you don't have a FMC), then please state it in your flight plan and file a non-RNAV flight plan. There are two non-RNAV departures per runway (to WGM VOR and SNU VOR), from which you will get one. From there, you will fly direct to your next waypoint.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you are unable to fly any SID, then you can ask for vectored departure. You will receive initial instructions from Delivery (like &amp;quot;stay on runway heading&amp;quot;) and further instructions from ATC. Bear in mind, that ATC can deny vectored departures, if the air is boiling.&lt;br /&gt;
* For noise abatement reasons, some SID's are closed after 21:00 local time. See the charts to find out, which. Some controllers use noise abatement, some don't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Push and Start ===&lt;br /&gt;
Some folks ask for push and fall asleep. Some folks ask for push, push and then fall asleep. Both mess up ground movements considerably. If you are slow with your plane, then please start up on the gate and ask for push when ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== After takeoff ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Vienna has defined SIDs, so you should fly them. Most of them are RNAV. There are vectored departures on request or on ATC's discretion. &lt;br /&gt;
* Expect to be transferred to the appropriate approach controller right after takeoff - tune the frequency into standby already on ground. If Tower forgets, you might remind him with a polite &amp;quot;&amp;lt;callsign&amp;gt;, airborne&amp;quot; once you pass 2000ft or so :-)&lt;br /&gt;
* On all normal days, there is only one approach controller at 134,675. &lt;br /&gt;
* On very-high-traffic events like &amp;quot;Finally Austria&amp;quot;, Approach is divided north-south, with either 134.675 or 118,775 - look for the active stations while still on ground. &amp;quot;Your&amp;quot; station varies according to the SID you fly - it's in the SID chart.&lt;br /&gt;
* If no Approach controller is online, LOVV_CTR with 134,15 is your station, and if this station is offline, contact UNICOM at 122,8.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Arrival ==&lt;br /&gt;
You will enter the approach procedures when reaching the initial STAR waypoints. Before you reach them, listen to LOWW_ATIS at 122.95, and when transferred to Approach, you call in with callsign, position, altitude and ATIS on board:&lt;br /&gt;
 LHA123: Wien Radar, Leipzig123, inbound VENEN, FL270 descending to FL240, ATIS B on board.&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_APP: Leipzig 123, Wien radar, identified, cleared VENEN2W arrival, descend FL100.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like every major European airport, LOWW has STAR, transitions and approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
=== STAR's ===&lt;br /&gt;
ATC will most likely clear you a STAR and an altitude to descend. At the end of each STAR is a holding which you might be ordered to enter. Altitudes on the chart are minimum altitudes - ATC will tell you the altitude to fly. In the case of Vienna, STARs are also unique: From each entry point, there is only one STAR to take. As a pilot, you could as well key in the STAR into your FMC straight away.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Transitions ===&lt;br /&gt;
Transitions are runway-specific - you know your transition once you know the runway, and you know the runway once you listened to ATIS. Therefore, you can key in your STAR while on cruise, and your transition while approaching or flying the STAR. Don't forget: ATC will clear you the transition or vector you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is vital that you have your transition on FMC, as (see below) ATC might order you to cut corners and then continue to fly the transition. It is also vital, that you look up the approach chart once you know the runway and key in the necessary frequencies for ILS approach and for go-around.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Director ===&lt;br /&gt;
On busy days, the last phase before landing has a Director: He/she is responsible for the nitty-gritty spacing in the &amp;quot;string of pearls&amp;quot; where traffic is dense for two reasons: 1) aircraft merge from all directions, and 2) aircraft slow down. Expect ATC transfer you, if Director is online. Usually, you call Director &amp;quot;callsign only&amp;quot; - no position, no altitude, only &amp;quot;Wien Director, Leipzig 123&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once established on the ILS (or on visual final), Director will transfer you to Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How to handle directions on approach ===&lt;br /&gt;
* Usually, you are cleared a STAR and transition - As soon as you know ATIS, you are able to key in the transition into your FMC.&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to fly direct to a waypoint on the STAR or transition, you fly direct to the waypoint and then follow the transition to final.&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC never orders an altitude, you fly the altitudes on the charts (but ATC never does that).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC vectors you, than you leave STAR and transition altogether (expect to be vectored or direct-ed until final).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to level UNTIL a certain waypoint, descend at your descretion, as long as you match the altitude at that point (you can level off before).&lt;br /&gt;
* If ATC orders you to level AT a certain waypoint, then calculate well and descend to meet the altitude at the point - not before, not after.&lt;br /&gt;
* If in doubt, ask!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Vacating and taxiing ===&lt;br /&gt;
* If you land on rwy11/29 and rwy34, then vacating throws you into the middle of dense traffic - stop on the exit and wait for ground instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you vacate from rwy16, then you can roll on D or E and wait for instructions - frees the exit for the next hungry aircraft behind. You should definitely stop before D4 or E4 - they are ILS critical holding points which you should not cross without clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Communication failure ===&lt;br /&gt;
... is published on the charts - please set your squawk 7600 and follow it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Airports]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Airport_Details&amp;diff=2625</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Airport Details</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Airport_Details&amp;diff=2625"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T10:54:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Pisten */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&lt;br /&gt;
== LOWW (Wien Schwechat) ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Possible Runway Configurations ===&lt;br /&gt;
The runway utilization concept for LOWW is based on the fact that the airport layout with it's crossing runways normally does '''not allow simultaneous approaches''' to both runways. So, whenever possible, runways 11/29 and 16/34 will be used independently to allow departures on one runway (normally 16 or 29) while using the other runway for landing aircraft.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Possible runway configurations are:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 11 / DEP RWY 16 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; SE winds, if no simultaneous approach possible&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 34 / DEP RWY 29 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; calm/NW winds&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 16 / DEP RWY 29 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; calm/SW winds&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 11/16sim. / DEP RWY 16 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; calm/SE winds, simultaneous approach possible&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 29 / DEP RWY 29 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; 1900z - 0500z, Noise Abatement&lt;br /&gt;
Simultaneous approaches to runways 11 and 16 are conducted only at tower's discretion during certain weather conditions (visual reduction of separation). Aircrews are advised to show landing lights as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In case of technical uncertainties during final approach - that might be possible lead to a missed approach - aircrews are asked to inform ATC immediately.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====All Weather Operations (AWO)====&lt;br /&gt;
With Low Visibility Procedures in operation, standard approach runway will be runway 16.&lt;br /&gt;
Arrivals will be vectored out of the holdings into the left hand circuit for runway 16. Approximate track distance from the holdings to touchdown shall be calculated with 40 to 70 nautical miles.&lt;br /&gt;
Runway 29 is also equipped with a CAT IIIb ILS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Taxi Instructions===&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way giving taxi instructions to aircraft is to:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxi outgoing aircraft on taxiway MIKE (former OSCAR) ASAP.&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxi incoming aircraft on taxiway LIMA (former INDIA) ASAP.&lt;br /&gt;
In this way, collision of aircraft should be avoided. Incoming aircraft on runway 16/34 vacating via B3 to B10 should use taxiway DELTA and LIMA (former INDIA).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In case of a landing on runway 29 no aircraft is allowed to be in the extended runway centreline of runway 29 while landing aircraft is passing above. In this case aircraft should hold at ROMEO, FOXTROTT, SIERRA and GOLF and wait until the incoming aircraft touched down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Intersection take-off====&lt;br /&gt;
Intersection takeoffs can be granted by GND in coordination with TWR and in accordance or on pilot’s request.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===VFR Traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
VFR traffic can enter/leave the control zone (CTR) via sector SIERRA (to the south), sector ECHO (to the east) and along the Danube river on the route Klosterneuburg – Freudenau. Maximum altitude in these sectors is 1500ft or according to the VFR charts published online at www.vacc-sag.org.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===APP Airspace===&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW is located very close to the Austrian state boundaries with Hungary, Slovakia and the Czech Republik and space within the TMA (Terminal Maneuvering Area) is very limited.&lt;br /&gt;
Arrivals are being transferred to LOWW_APP by '''five independently working ACC sectors''' (LKAA/ACC Praha, LZBB/ACC Bratislava, LHCC/ACC Budapest, ACC Wien South, ACC Wien North). Therefore final decisions on the arrival sequence are normally made at a distance of approximately 40 NM from touchdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_APP itself operates '''up to four different sectors''', depending on the amount of traffic. Two '''Upper Radar''' sectors specify the arrival sequence for the Lower Sectors. Upper Sectors are operated between FL240 and FL110.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Lower Radar''' (FL100 and below) will then make final decisions on the arrival sequence by transferring arriving aircraft to the '''Director''', who issues vectors onto the final approach track and sets up a safe flow of landing traffic. Unless otherwise instructed, initial contact on Director frequency (normally 119.800) shall be made by stating the callsign only in order to reduce frequency load.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the appropriate spacing is assured until touchdown, Director will transfer the arriving aircraft to Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For high traffic procedures refer to [[LOWW - High Traffic Procedures]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Visual Approaches ====&lt;br /&gt;
Approaches using &amp;quot;Own Separation&amp;quot;. Visual Approaches will be issued whenever the traffic situation permits. Due to several noise sensitive areas in the vicinity of Vienna Airport, LOWW_APP has to impose certain restrictions on visual approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
* NO visual or short approaches will be issued in the right-hand circuit for runway 16 and in the left-hand circuit for runway 11 (City of Vienna). &lt;br /&gt;
* Aircraft instructed to &amp;quot;maintain own separation&amp;quot; during final approach are expected to maintain a safe and efficient separation (normally less than 2,5 NM) to the preceding landing aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== LOWL (Blue Danube Airport) ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pisten ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''08/26:''' Beton mit 3 Kilometer Länge und 60 Meter Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''08/26 (Gras):''' Graspiste mit 660 Meter Länge und 45 Meter Breite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Die Graspiste wird in Real nur für An- und Abflüge von Helikoptern verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
Folgende Anflugverfahren beziehen sich nur auf die Piste 08/26. Die parallele Graspiste ist nur per Sicht anzufliegen.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''ILS:''' &lt;br /&gt;
** Richtung 26 bis CAT IIIb (109.30, Finalapproachtrack: 266°)&lt;br /&gt;
** Richtung 08 nur CAT I (110.55, Finalapproachtrack: 086°)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''VOR''' (LNZ, 116.600):&lt;br /&gt;
** Primär Richtung 08 (Radial 086)&lt;br /&gt;
** Mit Platzrundenanflug Richtung 26 (Radial 086, Wegbrechen nach Süden)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB''' (LNZ 327):&lt;br /&gt;
** Primär Richtung 26 (Radial 266)&lt;br /&gt;
** Mit Platzrundenanflug Richtung 08 (Radial 266, Wegbrechen nach Süden)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC-Stationen in Linz ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Linz gibt es folgende drei Stationen:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWL_ATIS (Linz ATIS) auf 128.120&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWL_TWR (Linz Turm) auf 118.800&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWL_APP (Linz Radar) auf 129.620&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Besonderheiten in Linz ===&lt;br /&gt;
* In Linz dürfen Platzrundenanflüge (Visualcirclings) nur in südliche Richtung gemacht werden!&lt;br /&gt;
* Der Bereich südlich der Piste 26-08 ist militärisches Gelände!&lt;br /&gt;
* Für größere Flugzeugtypen stehen in Linz folgende Parkpositionen zur Verfügung:&lt;br /&gt;
** Position 13 bis zur Boeing 747-400&lt;br /&gt;
** Position 11 auch bis Boeing 747-400 (Wenn auf 11 und 13 B744 sind, kein Platz auf 12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWS (Salzburg Maxglan) ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Pisten===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''15/33:''' Beton mit 2.75 Kilometer Länge und 45 Meter Breite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''ILS:''' Richtung 16 bis Special CATIII (109.90 OES, Finalapproachtrack: 154°)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB:''' (SBG 382.0), primär Richtung 16 (Radial 156)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Visual Circling:''', Richtung 16 bis SI 410.0 (Radial 336, wegbrechen nach links)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC Stationen in Salzburg ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Salzburg gibt es folgende Stationen:&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_DEL   (Salzburg Delivery) auf Freq. 121.750&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(an stark frequentierten Samstagen, sonst nur TWR)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_TWR   (Salzburg Tower) auf Freq. 118.100&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_APP   (Salzburg Radar) auf Freq. 123.720&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_F_APP (Salzburg Director) auf Freq. 134.97&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(bei starker Verkehrsfrequenz)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWI (Innsbruck Kranebitten)==&lt;br /&gt;
===Pisten===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''08/26:''' Betonpiste mit 2000 (6562´) Meter Länge und 45 Meter (148´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''LOC/DME EAST''' (111.10 OEV)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''LOC/DME WEST''' (109.70 OEJ)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC Stationen in Innsbruck ===&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWI TWR (Innsbruck Tower) 120.100&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWI_APP (Innsbruck Radar) auf 119.275&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mehr Informationen ===&lt;br /&gt;
* auf [[LOWI_Primer]] gibt es detaillierte Infos und Schulungsmaterial zum Controllen in Innsbruck&lt;br /&gt;
(danke an unseren emsigen Tiroler Herrmann Plunser!)&lt;br /&gt;
Achtung: Work in progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWK (Klagenfurt Alpe Adria Airport)==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pisten ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''10L/28R:''' Beton mit 2720 Meter (8294') Länge und 45 Meter Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''10R/28L''' Graspiste mit 710 Meter (2329') Länge&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Folgende Anflugverfahren stehen für Klagenfurt zur Verfügung für die Piste 10L bzw. 28R:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''ILS'''&lt;br /&gt;
**28R: 110.10 (OEK) 285°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB'''&lt;br /&gt;
**10L: 405 (KW)  105°&lt;br /&gt;
**28R: 374 (KFT) 273°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC-Stationen in Klagenfurt ===&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWK_TWR (Klagenfurt Tower) auf 118.100&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWK_APP (Klagenfurt Radar) auf 126.820&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWK_ATIS: 126.320&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWG (Graz Thalerhof)==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pisten ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''17L/35L:''' Graspiste mit 760 (2493´) Meter Länge und 30 Meter (98´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''17C/35C:''' Betonpiste mit 3000 (9843´) Meter Länge und 45 Meter (148´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''17R/35R:''' Graspiste mit 640 (2100´) Meter Länge und 25 Meter (82´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Folgende Anflugverfahren stehen für Graz zur Verfügung für die Piste 17C/35C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''ILS'''&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: 110.90 / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
**CAT II / III: 110.90 / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''VOR/DME'''&lt;br /&gt;
**17C: 116.20 (GRZ VOR) / 168°&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: 116.20 (GRZ VOR) / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB'''&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: 290 (GRZ NDB) / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''GPS'''&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: OWG01 / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC-Stationen in Graz ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWG_TWR: 118.200&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWG_APP: 119.300&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWG_ATIS: 126.120&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]][[Category:Airports]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Airport_Details&amp;diff=2624</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Airport Details</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Airport_Details&amp;diff=2624"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T10:53:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Pisten */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&lt;br /&gt;
== LOWW (Wien Schwechat) ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Possible Runway Configurations ===&lt;br /&gt;
The runway utilization concept for LOWW is based on the fact that the airport layout with it's crossing runways normally does '''not allow simultaneous approaches''' to both runways. So, whenever possible, runways 11/29 and 16/34 will be used independently to allow departures on one runway (normally 16 or 29) while using the other runway for landing aircraft.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Possible runway configurations are:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 11 / DEP RWY 16 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; SE winds, if no simultaneous approach possible&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 34 / DEP RWY 29 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; calm/NW winds&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 16 / DEP RWY 29 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; calm/SW winds&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 11/16sim. / DEP RWY 16 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; calm/SE winds, simultaneous approach possible&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 29 / DEP RWY 29 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; 1900z - 0500z, Noise Abatement&lt;br /&gt;
Simultaneous approaches to runways 11 and 16 are conducted only at tower's discretion during certain weather conditions (visual reduction of separation). Aircrews are advised to show landing lights as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In case of technical uncertainties during final approach - that might be possible lead to a missed approach - aircrews are asked to inform ATC immediately.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====All Weather Operations (AWO)====&lt;br /&gt;
With Low Visibility Procedures in operation, standard approach runway will be runway 16.&lt;br /&gt;
Arrivals will be vectored out of the holdings into the left hand circuit for runway 16. Approximate track distance from the holdings to touchdown shall be calculated with 40 to 70 nautical miles.&lt;br /&gt;
Runway 29 is also equipped with a CAT IIIb ILS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Taxi Instructions===&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way giving taxi instructions to aircraft is to:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxi outgoing aircraft on taxiway MIKE (former OSCAR) ASAP.&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxi incoming aircraft on taxiway LIMA (former INDIA) ASAP.&lt;br /&gt;
In this way, collision of aircraft should be avoided. Incoming aircraft on runway 16/34 vacating via B3 to B10 should use taxiway DELTA and LIMA (former INDIA).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In case of a landing on runway 29 no aircraft is allowed to be in the extended runway centreline of runway 29 while landing aircraft is passing above. In this case aircraft should hold at ROMEO, FOXTROTT, SIERRA and GOLF and wait until the incoming aircraft touched down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Intersection take-off====&lt;br /&gt;
Intersection takeoffs can be granted by GND in coordination with TWR and in accordance or on pilot’s request.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===VFR Traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
VFR traffic can enter/leave the control zone (CTR) via sector SIERRA (to the south), sector ECHO (to the east) and along the Danube river on the route Klosterneuburg – Freudenau. Maximum altitude in these sectors is 1500ft or according to the VFR charts published online at www.vacc-sag.org.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===APP Airspace===&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW is located very close to the Austrian state boundaries with Hungary, Slovakia and the Czech Republik and space within the TMA (Terminal Maneuvering Area) is very limited.&lt;br /&gt;
Arrivals are being transferred to LOWW_APP by '''five independently working ACC sectors''' (LKAA/ACC Praha, LZBB/ACC Bratislava, LHCC/ACC Budapest, ACC Wien South, ACC Wien North). Therefore final decisions on the arrival sequence are normally made at a distance of approximately 40 NM from touchdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_APP itself operates '''up to four different sectors''', depending on the amount of traffic. Two '''Upper Radar''' sectors specify the arrival sequence for the Lower Sectors. Upper Sectors are operated between FL240 and FL110.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Lower Radar''' (FL100 and below) will then make final decisions on the arrival sequence by transferring arriving aircraft to the '''Director''', who issues vectors onto the final approach track and sets up a safe flow of landing traffic. Unless otherwise instructed, initial contact on Director frequency (normally 119.800) shall be made by stating the callsign only in order to reduce frequency load.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the appropriate spacing is assured until touchdown, Director will transfer the arriving aircraft to Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For high traffic procedures refer to [[LOWW - High Traffic Procedures]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Visual Approaches ====&lt;br /&gt;
Approaches using &amp;quot;Own Separation&amp;quot;. Visual Approaches will be issued whenever the traffic situation permits. Due to several noise sensitive areas in the vicinity of Vienna Airport, LOWW_APP has to impose certain restrictions on visual approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
* NO visual or short approaches will be issued in the right-hand circuit for runway 16 and in the left-hand circuit for runway 11 (City of Vienna). &lt;br /&gt;
* Aircraft instructed to &amp;quot;maintain own separation&amp;quot; during final approach are expected to maintain a safe and efficient separation (normally less than 2,5 NM) to the preceding landing aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== LOWL (Blue Danube Airport) ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pisten ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''08/26:''' Beton mit 3 Kilometer Länge und 60 Meter Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''08/26 (Gras):''' Graspiste mit 660 Meter Länge und 45 Meter Breite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Die Graspiste wird in Real nur für An- und Abflüge von Helikoptern verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
Folgende Anflugverfahren beziehen sich nur auf die Piste 08/26. Die parallele Graspiste ist nur per Sicht anzufliegen.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''ILS:''' &lt;br /&gt;
** Richtung 26 bis CAT IIIb (109.30, Finalapproachtrack: 266°)&lt;br /&gt;
** Richtung 08 nur CAT I (110.55, Finalapproachtrack: 086°)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''VOR''' (LNZ, 116.600):&lt;br /&gt;
** Primär Richtung 08 (Radial 086)&lt;br /&gt;
** Mit Platzrundenanflug Richtung 26 (Radial 086, Wegbrechen nach Süden)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB''' (LNZ 327):&lt;br /&gt;
** Primär Richtung 26 (Radial 266)&lt;br /&gt;
** Mit Platzrundenanflug Richtung 08 (Radial 266, Wegbrechen nach Süden)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC-Stationen in Linz ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Linz gibt es folgende drei Stationen:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWL_ATIS (Linz ATIS) auf 128.120&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWL_TWR (Linz Turm) auf 118.800&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWL_APP (Linz Radar) auf 129.620&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Besonderheiten in Linz ===&lt;br /&gt;
* In Linz dürfen Platzrundenanflüge (Visualcirclings) nur in südliche Richtung gemacht werden!&lt;br /&gt;
* Der Bereich südlich der Piste 26-08 ist militärisches Gelände!&lt;br /&gt;
* Für größere Flugzeugtypen stehen in Linz folgende Parkpositionen zur Verfügung:&lt;br /&gt;
** Position 13 bis zur Boeing 747-400&lt;br /&gt;
** Position 11 auch bis Boeing 747-400 (Wenn auf 11 und 13 B744 sind, kein Platz auf 12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWS (Salzburg Maxglan) ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Pisten===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''15/33:''' Beton mit 2.75 Kilometer Länge und 45 Meter Breite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''ILS:''' Richtung 16 bis Special CATIII (109.90 OES, Finalapproachtrack: 154°)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB:''' (SBG 382.0), primär Richtung 16 (Radial 156)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Visual Circling:''', Richtung 16 bis SI 410.0 (Radial 336, wegbrechen nach links)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC Stationen in Salzburg ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Salzburg gibt es folgende Stationen:&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_DEL   (Salzburg Delivery) auf Freq. 121.750&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(an stark frequentierten Samstagen, sonst nur TWR)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_TWR   (Salzburg Tower) auf Freq. 118.100&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_APP   (Salzburg Radar) auf Freq. 123.720&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_F_APP (Salzburg Director) auf Freq. 134.97&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(bei starker Verkehrsfrequenz)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWI (Innsbruck Kranebitten)==&lt;br /&gt;
===Pisten===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''08/26:''' Betonpiste mit 2000 (6562´) Meter Länge und 45 Meter (148´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''LOC/DME EAST''' (111.10 OEV)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''LOC/DME WEST''' (109.70 OEJ)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC Stationen in Innsbruck ===&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWI TWR (Innsbruck Tower) 120.100&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWI_APP (Innsbruck Radar) auf 119.275&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mehr Informationen ===&lt;br /&gt;
* auf [[LOWI_Primer]] gibt es detaillierte Infos und Schulungsmaterial zum Controllen in Innsbruck&lt;br /&gt;
(danke an unseren emsigen Tiroler Herrmann Plunser!)&lt;br /&gt;
Achtung: Work in progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWK (Klagenfurt Alpe Adria Airport)==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pisten ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''10L/28R:''' Beton mit 2720 Meter (8294') Länge und 45 Meter Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''10R/28L''' Graspiste mit 710 Meter (2329') Länge&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Folgende Anflugverfahren stehen für Klagenfurt zur Verfügung für die Piste 10/28:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''ILS'''&lt;br /&gt;
**28R: 110.10 (OEK) 285°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB'''&lt;br /&gt;
**10L: 405 (KW)  105°&lt;br /&gt;
**28R: 374 (KFT) 273°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC-Stationen in Klagenfurt ===&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWK_TWR (Klagenfurt Tower) auf 118.100&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWK_APP (Klagenfurt Radar) auf 126.820&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWK_ATIS: 126.320&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWG (Graz Thalerhof)==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pisten ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''17L/35L:''' Graspiste mit 760 (2493´) Meter Länge und 30 Meter (98´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''17C/35C:''' Betonpiste mit 3000 (9843´) Meter Länge und 45 Meter (148´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''17R/35R:''' Graspiste mit 640 (2100´) Meter Länge und 25 Meter (82´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Folgende Anflugverfahren stehen für Graz zur Verfügung für die Piste 17C/35C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''ILS'''&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: 110.90 / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
**CAT II / III: 110.90 / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''VOR/DME'''&lt;br /&gt;
**17C: 116.20 (GRZ VOR) / 168°&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: 116.20 (GRZ VOR) / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB'''&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: 290 (GRZ NDB) / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''GPS'''&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: OWG01 / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC-Stationen in Graz ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWG_TWR: 118.200&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWG_APP: 119.300&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWG_ATIS: 126.120&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]][[Category:Airports]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Airport_Details&amp;diff=2623</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Airport Details</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Airport_Details&amp;diff=2623"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T10:52:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Anflugverfahren */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&lt;br /&gt;
== LOWW (Wien Schwechat) ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Possible Runway Configurations ===&lt;br /&gt;
The runway utilization concept for LOWW is based on the fact that the airport layout with it's crossing runways normally does '''not allow simultaneous approaches''' to both runways. So, whenever possible, runways 11/29 and 16/34 will be used independently to allow departures on one runway (normally 16 or 29) while using the other runway for landing aircraft.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Possible runway configurations are:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 11 / DEP RWY 16 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; SE winds, if no simultaneous approach possible&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 34 / DEP RWY 29 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; calm/NW winds&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 16 / DEP RWY 29 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; calm/SW winds&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 11/16sim. / DEP RWY 16 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; calm/SE winds, simultaneous approach possible&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 29 / DEP RWY 29 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; 1900z - 0500z, Noise Abatement&lt;br /&gt;
Simultaneous approaches to runways 11 and 16 are conducted only at tower's discretion during certain weather conditions (visual reduction of separation). Aircrews are advised to show landing lights as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In case of technical uncertainties during final approach - that might be possible lead to a missed approach - aircrews are asked to inform ATC immediately.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====All Weather Operations (AWO)====&lt;br /&gt;
With Low Visibility Procedures in operation, standard approach runway will be runway 16.&lt;br /&gt;
Arrivals will be vectored out of the holdings into the left hand circuit for runway 16. Approximate track distance from the holdings to touchdown shall be calculated with 40 to 70 nautical miles.&lt;br /&gt;
Runway 29 is also equipped with a CAT IIIb ILS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Taxi Instructions===&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way giving taxi instructions to aircraft is to:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxi outgoing aircraft on taxiway MIKE (former OSCAR) ASAP.&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxi incoming aircraft on taxiway LIMA (former INDIA) ASAP.&lt;br /&gt;
In this way, collision of aircraft should be avoided. Incoming aircraft on runway 16/34 vacating via B3 to B10 should use taxiway DELTA and LIMA (former INDIA).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In case of a landing on runway 29 no aircraft is allowed to be in the extended runway centreline of runway 29 while landing aircraft is passing above. In this case aircraft should hold at ROMEO, FOXTROTT, SIERRA and GOLF and wait until the incoming aircraft touched down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Intersection take-off====&lt;br /&gt;
Intersection takeoffs can be granted by GND in coordination with TWR and in accordance or on pilot’s request.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===VFR Traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
VFR traffic can enter/leave the control zone (CTR) via sector SIERRA (to the south), sector ECHO (to the east) and along the Danube river on the route Klosterneuburg – Freudenau. Maximum altitude in these sectors is 1500ft or according to the VFR charts published online at www.vacc-sag.org.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===APP Airspace===&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW is located very close to the Austrian state boundaries with Hungary, Slovakia and the Czech Republik and space within the TMA (Terminal Maneuvering Area) is very limited.&lt;br /&gt;
Arrivals are being transferred to LOWW_APP by '''five independently working ACC sectors''' (LKAA/ACC Praha, LZBB/ACC Bratislava, LHCC/ACC Budapest, ACC Wien South, ACC Wien North). Therefore final decisions on the arrival sequence are normally made at a distance of approximately 40 NM from touchdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_APP itself operates '''up to four different sectors''', depending on the amount of traffic. Two '''Upper Radar''' sectors specify the arrival sequence for the Lower Sectors. Upper Sectors are operated between FL240 and FL110.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Lower Radar''' (FL100 and below) will then make final decisions on the arrival sequence by transferring arriving aircraft to the '''Director''', who issues vectors onto the final approach track and sets up a safe flow of landing traffic. Unless otherwise instructed, initial contact on Director frequency (normally 119.800) shall be made by stating the callsign only in order to reduce frequency load.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the appropriate spacing is assured until touchdown, Director will transfer the arriving aircraft to Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For high traffic procedures refer to [[LOWW - High Traffic Procedures]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Visual Approaches ====&lt;br /&gt;
Approaches using &amp;quot;Own Separation&amp;quot;. Visual Approaches will be issued whenever the traffic situation permits. Due to several noise sensitive areas in the vicinity of Vienna Airport, LOWW_APP has to impose certain restrictions on visual approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
* NO visual or short approaches will be issued in the right-hand circuit for runway 16 and in the left-hand circuit for runway 11 (City of Vienna). &lt;br /&gt;
* Aircraft instructed to &amp;quot;maintain own separation&amp;quot; during final approach are expected to maintain a safe and efficient separation (normally less than 2,5 NM) to the preceding landing aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== LOWL (Blue Danube Airport) ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pisten ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''08/26:''' Beton mit 3 Kilometer Länge und 60 Meter Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''08/26 (Gras):''' Graspiste mit 660 Meter Länge und 45 Meter Breite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Die Graspiste wird in Real nur für An- und Abflüge von Helikoptern verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
Folgende Anflugverfahren beziehen sich nur auf die Piste 08/26. Die parallele Graspiste ist nur per Sicht anzufliegen.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''ILS:''' &lt;br /&gt;
** Richtung 26 bis CAT IIIb (109.30, Finalapproachtrack: 266°)&lt;br /&gt;
** Richtung 08 nur CAT I (110.55, Finalapproachtrack: 086°)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''VOR''' (LNZ, 116.600):&lt;br /&gt;
** Primär Richtung 08 (Radial 086)&lt;br /&gt;
** Mit Platzrundenanflug Richtung 26 (Radial 086, Wegbrechen nach Süden)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB''' (LNZ 327):&lt;br /&gt;
** Primär Richtung 26 (Radial 266)&lt;br /&gt;
** Mit Platzrundenanflug Richtung 08 (Radial 266, Wegbrechen nach Süden)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC-Stationen in Linz ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Linz gibt es folgende drei Stationen:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWL_ATIS (Linz ATIS) auf 128.120&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWL_TWR (Linz Turm) auf 118.800&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWL_APP (Linz Radar) auf 129.620&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Besonderheiten in Linz ===&lt;br /&gt;
* In Linz dürfen Platzrundenanflüge (Visualcirclings) nur in südliche Richtung gemacht werden!&lt;br /&gt;
* Der Bereich südlich der Piste 26-08 ist militärisches Gelände!&lt;br /&gt;
* Für größere Flugzeugtypen stehen in Linz folgende Parkpositionen zur Verfügung:&lt;br /&gt;
** Position 13 bis zur Boeing 747-400&lt;br /&gt;
** Position 11 auch bis Boeing 747-400 (Wenn auf 11 und 13 B744 sind, kein Platz auf 12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWS (Salzburg Maxglan) ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Pisten===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''15/33:''' Beton mit 2.75 Kilometer Länge und 45 Meter Breite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''ILS:''' Richtung 16 bis Special CATIII (109.90 OES, Finalapproachtrack: 154°)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB:''' (SBG 382.0), primär Richtung 16 (Radial 156)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Visual Circling:''', Richtung 16 bis SI 410.0 (Radial 336, wegbrechen nach links)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC Stationen in Salzburg ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Salzburg gibt es folgende Stationen:&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_DEL   (Salzburg Delivery) auf Freq. 121.750&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(an stark frequentierten Samstagen, sonst nur TWR)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_TWR   (Salzburg Tower) auf Freq. 118.100&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_APP   (Salzburg Radar) auf Freq. 123.720&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_F_APP (Salzburg Director) auf Freq. 134.97&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(bei starker Verkehrsfrequenz)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWI (Innsbruck Kranebitten)==&lt;br /&gt;
===Pisten===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''08/26:''' Betonpiste mit 2000 (6562´) Meter Länge und 45 Meter (148´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''LOC/DME EAST''' (111.10 OEV)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''LOC/DME WEST''' (109.70 OEJ)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC Stationen in Innsbruck ===&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWI TWR (Innsbruck Tower) 120.100&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWI_APP (Innsbruck Radar) auf 119.275&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mehr Informationen ===&lt;br /&gt;
* auf [[LOWI_Primer]] gibt es detaillierte Infos und Schulungsmaterial zum Controllen in Innsbruck&lt;br /&gt;
(danke an unseren emsigen Tiroler Herrmann Plunser!)&lt;br /&gt;
Achtung: Work in progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWK (Klagenfurt Alpe Adria Airport)==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pisten ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''10/28:''' Beton mit 2720 Meter (8294') Länge und 45 Meter Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''10R/28L''' Graspiste mit 710 Meter (2329') Länge&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Folgende Anflugverfahren stehen für Klagenfurt zur Verfügung für die Piste 10/28:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''ILS'''&lt;br /&gt;
**28: 110.10 (OEK) 285°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB'''&lt;br /&gt;
**10: 405 (KW)  105°&lt;br /&gt;
**28: 374 (KFT) 273°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC-Stationen in Klagenfurt ===&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWK_TWR (Klagenfurt Tower) auf 118.100&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWK_APP (Klagenfurt Radar) auf 126.820&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWK_ATIS: 126.320&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWG (Graz Thalerhof)==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pisten ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''17L/35L:''' Graspiste mit 760 (2493´) Meter Länge und 30 Meter (98´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''17C/35C:''' Betonpiste mit 3000 (9843´) Meter Länge und 45 Meter (148´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''17R/35R:''' Graspiste mit 640 (2100´) Meter Länge und 25 Meter (82´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Folgende Anflugverfahren stehen für Graz zur Verfügung für die Piste 17C/35C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''ILS'''&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: 110.90 / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
**CAT II / III: 110.90 / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''VOR/DME'''&lt;br /&gt;
**17C: 116.20 (GRZ VOR) / 168°&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: 116.20 (GRZ VOR) / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB'''&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: 290 (GRZ NDB) / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''GPS'''&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: OWG01 / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC-Stationen in Graz ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWG_TWR: 118.200&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWG_APP: 119.300&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWG_ATIS: 126.120&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]][[Category:Airports]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Airport_Details&amp;diff=2622</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Airport Details</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Airport_Details&amp;diff=2622"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T10:51:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Pisten */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''&lt;br /&gt;
== LOWW (Wien Schwechat) ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Possible Runway Configurations ===&lt;br /&gt;
The runway utilization concept for LOWW is based on the fact that the airport layout with it's crossing runways normally does '''not allow simultaneous approaches''' to both runways. So, whenever possible, runways 11/29 and 16/34 will be used independently to allow departures on one runway (normally 16 or 29) while using the other runway for landing aircraft.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
'''Possible runway configurations are:'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 11 / DEP RWY 16 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; SE winds, if no simultaneous approach possible&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 34 / DEP RWY 29 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; calm/NW winds&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 16 / DEP RWY 29 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; calm/SW winds&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 11/16sim. / DEP RWY 16 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; calm/SE winds, simultaneous approach possible&lt;br /&gt;
* ARR RWY 29 / DEP RWY 29 &amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;gt; 1900z - 0500z, Noise Abatement&lt;br /&gt;
Simultaneous approaches to runways 11 and 16 are conducted only at tower's discretion during certain weather conditions (visual reduction of separation). Aircrews are advised to show landing lights as soon as possible.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In case of technical uncertainties during final approach - that might be possible lead to a missed approach - aircrews are asked to inform ATC immediately.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====All Weather Operations (AWO)====&lt;br /&gt;
With Low Visibility Procedures in operation, standard approach runway will be runway 16.&lt;br /&gt;
Arrivals will be vectored out of the holdings into the left hand circuit for runway 16. Approximate track distance from the holdings to touchdown shall be calculated with 40 to 70 nautical miles.&lt;br /&gt;
Runway 29 is also equipped with a CAT IIIb ILS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Taxi Instructions===&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way giving taxi instructions to aircraft is to:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxi outgoing aircraft on taxiway MIKE (former OSCAR) ASAP.&lt;br /&gt;
*Taxi incoming aircraft on taxiway LIMA (former INDIA) ASAP.&lt;br /&gt;
In this way, collision of aircraft should be avoided. Incoming aircraft on runway 16/34 vacating via B3 to B10 should use taxiway DELTA and LIMA (former INDIA).&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In case of a landing on runway 29 no aircraft is allowed to be in the extended runway centreline of runway 29 while landing aircraft is passing above. In this case aircraft should hold at ROMEO, FOXTROTT, SIERRA and GOLF and wait until the incoming aircraft touched down.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
====Intersection take-off====&lt;br /&gt;
Intersection takeoffs can be granted by GND in coordination with TWR and in accordance or on pilot’s request.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===VFR Traffic===&lt;br /&gt;
VFR traffic can enter/leave the control zone (CTR) via sector SIERRA (to the south), sector ECHO (to the east) and along the Danube river on the route Klosterneuburg – Freudenau. Maximum altitude in these sectors is 1500ft or according to the VFR charts published online at www.vacc-sag.org.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===APP Airspace===&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW is located very close to the Austrian state boundaries with Hungary, Slovakia and the Czech Republik and space within the TMA (Terminal Maneuvering Area) is very limited.&lt;br /&gt;
Arrivals are being transferred to LOWW_APP by '''five independently working ACC sectors''' (LKAA/ACC Praha, LZBB/ACC Bratislava, LHCC/ACC Budapest, ACC Wien South, ACC Wien North). Therefore final decisions on the arrival sequence are normally made at a distance of approximately 40 NM from touchdown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_APP itself operates '''up to four different sectors''', depending on the amount of traffic. Two '''Upper Radar''' sectors specify the arrival sequence for the Lower Sectors. Upper Sectors are operated between FL240 and FL110.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The '''Lower Radar''' (FL100 and below) will then make final decisions on the arrival sequence by transferring arriving aircraft to the '''Director''', who issues vectors onto the final approach track and sets up a safe flow of landing traffic. Unless otherwise instructed, initial contact on Director frequency (normally 119.800) shall be made by stating the callsign only in order to reduce frequency load.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the appropriate spacing is assured until touchdown, Director will transfer the arriving aircraft to Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For high traffic procedures refer to [[LOWW - High Traffic Procedures]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Visual Approaches ====&lt;br /&gt;
Approaches using &amp;quot;Own Separation&amp;quot;. Visual Approaches will be issued whenever the traffic situation permits. Due to several noise sensitive areas in the vicinity of Vienna Airport, LOWW_APP has to impose certain restrictions on visual approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
* NO visual or short approaches will be issued in the right-hand circuit for runway 16 and in the left-hand circuit for runway 11 (City of Vienna). &lt;br /&gt;
* Aircraft instructed to &amp;quot;maintain own separation&amp;quot; during final approach are expected to maintain a safe and efficient separation (normally less than 2,5 NM) to the preceding landing aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== LOWL (Blue Danube Airport) ==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pisten ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''08/26:''' Beton mit 3 Kilometer Länge und 60 Meter Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''08/26 (Gras):''' Graspiste mit 660 Meter Länge und 45 Meter Breite.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Die Graspiste wird in Real nur für An- und Abflüge von Helikoptern verwendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
Folgende Anflugverfahren beziehen sich nur auf die Piste 08/26. Die parallele Graspiste ist nur per Sicht anzufliegen.&lt;br /&gt;
*'''ILS:''' &lt;br /&gt;
** Richtung 26 bis CAT IIIb (109.30, Finalapproachtrack: 266°)&lt;br /&gt;
** Richtung 08 nur CAT I (110.55, Finalapproachtrack: 086°)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''VOR''' (LNZ, 116.600):&lt;br /&gt;
** Primär Richtung 08 (Radial 086)&lt;br /&gt;
** Mit Platzrundenanflug Richtung 26 (Radial 086, Wegbrechen nach Süden)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB''' (LNZ 327):&lt;br /&gt;
** Primär Richtung 26 (Radial 266)&lt;br /&gt;
** Mit Platzrundenanflug Richtung 08 (Radial 266, Wegbrechen nach Süden)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC-Stationen in Linz ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Linz gibt es folgende drei Stationen:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWL_ATIS (Linz ATIS) auf 128.120&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWL_TWR (Linz Turm) auf 118.800&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWL_APP (Linz Radar) auf 129.620&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Besonderheiten in Linz ===&lt;br /&gt;
* In Linz dürfen Platzrundenanflüge (Visualcirclings) nur in südliche Richtung gemacht werden!&lt;br /&gt;
* Der Bereich südlich der Piste 26-08 ist militärisches Gelände!&lt;br /&gt;
* Für größere Flugzeugtypen stehen in Linz folgende Parkpositionen zur Verfügung:&lt;br /&gt;
** Position 13 bis zur Boeing 747-400&lt;br /&gt;
** Position 11 auch bis Boeing 747-400 (Wenn auf 11 und 13 B744 sind, kein Platz auf 12)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWS (Salzburg Maxglan) ==&lt;br /&gt;
===Pisten===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''15/33:''' Beton mit 2.75 Kilometer Länge und 45 Meter Breite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''ILS:''' Richtung 16 bis Special CATIII (109.90 OES, Finalapproachtrack: 156°)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB:''' (SBG 382.0), primär Richtung 16 (Radial 156)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Visual Circling:''', Richtung 16 bis SI 410.0 (Radial 336, wegbrechen nach links)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC Stationen in Salzburg ===&lt;br /&gt;
In Salzburg gibt es folgende Stationen:&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_DEL   (Salzburg Delivery) auf Freq. 121.750&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(an stark frequentierten Samstagen, sonst nur TWR)&amp;lt;br/&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_TWR   (Salzburg Tower) auf Freq. 118.100&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_APP   (Salzburg Radar) auf Freq. 123.720&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWS_F_APP (Salzburg Director) auf Freq. 134.97&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;(bei starker Verkehrsfrequenz)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWI (Innsbruck Kranebitten)==&lt;br /&gt;
===Pisten===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''08/26:''' Betonpiste mit 2000 (6562´) Meter Länge und 45 Meter (148´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''LOC/DME EAST''' (111.10 OEV)&lt;br /&gt;
* '''LOC/DME WEST''' (109.70 OEJ)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC Stationen in Innsbruck ===&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWI TWR (Innsbruck Tower) 120.100&lt;br /&gt;
*LOWI_APP (Innsbruck Radar) auf 119.275&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mehr Informationen ===&lt;br /&gt;
* auf [[LOWI_Primer]] gibt es detaillierte Infos und Schulungsmaterial zum Controllen in Innsbruck&lt;br /&gt;
(danke an unseren emsigen Tiroler Herrmann Plunser!)&lt;br /&gt;
Achtung: Work in progress.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWK (Klagenfurt Alpe Adria Airport)==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pisten ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''10/28:''' Beton mit 2720 Meter (8294') Länge und 45 Meter Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''10R/28L''' Graspiste mit 710 Meter (2329') Länge&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Folgende Anflugverfahren stehen für Klagenfurt zur Verfügung für die Piste 10/28:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''ILS'''&lt;br /&gt;
**28: 110.10 (OEK) 285°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB'''&lt;br /&gt;
**10: 405 (KW)  105°&lt;br /&gt;
**28: 374 (KFT) 273°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC-Stationen in Klagenfurt ===&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWK_TWR (Klagenfurt Tower) auf 118.100&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWK_APP (Klagenfurt Radar) auf 126.820&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWK_ATIS: 126.320&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==LOWG (Graz Thalerhof)==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Pisten ===&lt;br /&gt;
* '''17L/35L:''' Graspiste mit 760 (2493´) Meter Länge und 30 Meter (98´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''17C/35C:''' Betonpiste mit 3000 (9843´) Meter Länge und 45 Meter (148´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
* '''17R/35R:''' Graspiste mit 640 (2100´) Meter Länge und 25 Meter (82´) Breite&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Anflugverfahren ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Folgende Anflugverfahren stehen für Graz zur Verfügung für die Piste 17C/35C:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''ILS'''&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: 110.90 / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
**CAT II / III: 110.90 / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''VOR/DME'''&lt;br /&gt;
**17C: 116.20 (GRZ VOR) / 168°&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: 116.20 (GRZ VOR) / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''NDB'''&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: 290 (GRZ NDB) / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''GPS'''&lt;br /&gt;
**35C: OWG01 / 348°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== ATC-Stationen in Graz ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWG_TWR: 118.200&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWG_APP: 119.300&lt;br /&gt;
* LOWG_ATIS: 126.120&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]][[Category:Airports]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2621</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Radar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2621"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:57:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Types of Instrument Approaches */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
==Airspace Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Austrian Airspace is structured into four different Types of Airspace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class C:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other and from flights operating under VFR. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of other VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class D:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are given traffic information in respect of VFR flights. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of all other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class E:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are subject to ATC clearance. Flights under VFR are not subject to ATC clearance. As far as is practical, traffic information is given to all flights in respect of VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class G:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR or VFR. ATC separation is not provided. Traffic Information may be given as far as is practical in respect of other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classes C-E are referred to as controlled airspace. Class G is uncontrolled airspace. Controlled Airspace is shared between different ATC-Units (TWR, APP, CTR) and within these units they can be split further into different sectors.&lt;br /&gt;
==Responsibilities==&lt;br /&gt;
Each Radar Controller has an area of responsibility which may consist of one or more sectors. He has to maintain the required seperation between aircraft within his sector and ensures the expeditious flow of traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Minimum Radar Separation==&lt;br /&gt;
A Controller has to make sure that two Aircraft which are under his control never get closer than the minimum radar seperation. If two aircraft get closer than that, this incident is called a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
*The standard &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Vertical Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; is 1000 ft up to FL290 and 2000 ft above that. However Austria is considered RVSM (Reduced Vertical Seperation Minima) airspace so the upper limit of the 1000 ft seperation minimum is raised to FL410. In real life this demands special equipment of the aircraft involved, however on VATSIM all aircraft are considered RVSM capable.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Horizontal Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; depends on the radar equipment involved. APP Sectors work with a minimum of 3 nm, CTR Sectors use 5 nm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some cases where these minima may be under-run such as visual seperation or formation flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MRVA, MSA, MOCA==&lt;br /&gt;
MRVA (Minimum Radar Vectoring Altitude): The MRVA is defined as the lowest available altitude above   Mean Sea Level (MSL) in controlled airspace under consideration of the MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude) above ground and the airspace structure within a specified area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude): Minimum Sector Altitude is the minimum altitude that may be used under emergency conditions which will provide a minimum clearance of 1000ft above obstacles and terrain contained within a sector of 25 NM radius centred on a radio navigational aid. MSA can be given as areas between radials from a VOR at the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MOCA (Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitude): This is the lowest altitude that an aircraft can fly in IMC (Instrument Meteorological Conditions) and still keep safe clearance from terrain and obstacles. MOCA is often lower then MEA (se below). It is only used in emergencies, especially to get below icing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Structure of Flightplans and Routings==&lt;br /&gt;
A route consist of one or more points connected by eithe airways or directs (DCT).&lt;br /&gt;
 SITNI UL856 BAGSI Q114 RTT&lt;br /&gt;
In this case SITNI is the first point of the Route, thereafter it follows the airway UL856 to BAGSI and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
===SIDs===&lt;br /&gt;
SID (Standard Instrument Departure): It is a pre-defined route which aircrafts have to fly to get to their initial airway to follow their desired routing to their destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g.: Flightplan from LOWW (Wien) to Salzburg (LOWS): SITNI L856 SBG DCT - SITNI is our first waypoint of our routing and let us say for instance that in Vienna Runway 29 is in use. We take a look at our charts and we see that we can plan for a socalled SITNI4C departure route.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIDs are specified by the local Air Traffic Control. A SID can contain the following navigation aids: R-NAV Waypoints, VORs, NDBs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===STARs===&lt;br /&gt;
STARs (Standart Terminal Arrival Routes): STARs are pre-defined routes to get an aircraft to the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A STAR falls into three parts namely navigational point, version number and runway (depending on the airport), e.g. GAMLI4W arrival. The point at which the STAR ends is called Initial Approach Fix (IAF). In some cases the STARs continue and end at the Final Approach Fix (FAF), and that means that you as controller don't need to vector the aircraft unless there is other traffic in the way. The only thing you have to do is to instruct the pilot how to descend the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are exceptions of course, where the STARs don't end at the final, but at a navigational point some distance away from the runway. You as a controller must give vectors the last part to the runway. If you for some reason don’t give vectors, the pilot must enter holding at the STAR's ending point (clearance limit).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types of Instrument Approaches===&lt;br /&gt;
An '''instrument approach''' or '''instrument approach procedure (IAP)''' is a type of air navigation that allows pilots to land an aircraft in reduced visibility (Instrument Meteorological Conditions [IMC]) or to reach visual conditions permitting a visual landing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) '''Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - ILS (Instrument Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - MLS (Microwave Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - PAR (Precision Approach Radar)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - LAAS (Ground Based Augmentation System [GBAS] for Global Satellite Navigation Systems [GNSS])&lt;br /&gt;
 - JPALS (Joint Precision Approach and Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GCA (Ground Controlled Approach)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) '''Non-Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer&lt;br /&gt;
 - VOR&lt;br /&gt;
 - NDB (with ADF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Simplified Directional Facility (SDF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - TACAN&lt;br /&gt;
 - Surveillance Radar Approach (SRA) [also known in some countries as ASR approach]&lt;br /&gt;
 - Visual&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Vectoring===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of vectoring:&lt;br /&gt;
* Lateral Vectoring &lt;br /&gt;
* Vertical Vectoring&lt;br /&gt;
====Lateral Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, turn left heading 165°&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, turn right heading 300°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When issuing a heading to an aircraft, make sure that you are using a direction ending on 0 (zero) or on 5 (five).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you provide Radar Vectors to an aircraft then always tell the pilot the reason why you are doing this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123 turn right heading 080°, radar vectors for ILS approach RWY 11&lt;br /&gt;
After vectoring an aircraft you might have to send the aircraft back on its flight planned route:&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, proceed direct to SITNI&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to know, that as soon as you take an aircraft of a publsihed route, either by vectoring or by using a direct, you are also responsible for the necessary terrain clearance. To do this always consider the MRVA on the aircrafts path.&lt;br /&gt;
====Vertical Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, climb FL240&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, descend Altitude 3000 feet, QNH 1016&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see there are 2 types of heights namely Altitude and Flightlevel (FL).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flightlevel''' is used for aircraft flying above the Transition Altitude, Transition Level or climbing through and above the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to Standard Pressure [1013 QNE]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Altitude''' is used for aircraft flying below the Transition Altitude or for Aircraft descending through and below the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to local QNH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
A controller may issue speed instructions within an aircrafts operating limits. There are two possible ways to do this, either by using Indicated Airspeed (FL280 or below) or by specifying a Mach number (FL280 or above).&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, maintain speed 280 knots&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF456, maintain Mach 0.81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Seperation and Sequencing Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
===Planning===&lt;br /&gt;
To effectively use the sequencing techniques explained below we first have to assess the current situation.&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current seperation====&lt;br /&gt;
In VRC and ES there are tools available to determine the seperation between aircraft. One of them is the Seperation Predictor. It is a very comfortable way to determine the point where two aircraft, given a constant speed, will be closest to each other. Furthermore it gives you the minimum distance and the time to go to this point.&lt;br /&gt;
To constantly survey the distance between to aircraft (or between an aircraft and a point) you can use seperation links (or anchors).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These tools give you an overview over the lateral situation. The vertical situations is a bit more complicated since you have to use a bit of math. If you have two converging aircraft who are not at a constant altitude you need their rate of climb/descend to determine the spacing at their closest point.&lt;br /&gt;
 APP: AUA265, report rate of climb.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA265:rate of climb 2500 feet per minute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current spacing====&lt;br /&gt;
Often procedures in a sector include a so called &amp;quot;miles-in-trail&amp;quot; requirement. This means that aircraft flying over the same point and for example have a common destination need to cross the point in a certain distance. Also when working as an approach controller we need to know how close two aircraft will be on approach. How can we determine the current spacing?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First we need to choose a merging point. In a miles in trail requirement this would typically be the handoff point. In the approach area that could be a point somewhere on the approach (e.g. 12 nm final or the point of base turn). Now we can measure the distance of both aircraft to the merging point. If both aircraft have the same speed and are routing direct to the merging point you directly get the spacing at this point. However if differnet speeds are involved things get more complicated. In this case there is no easy and fast way to determine the spacing at the merging point.&lt;br /&gt;
You will have to use your experience to judge these situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you can use this technique to determine the spacing between multiple aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
===The concept of positive seperation===&lt;br /&gt;
Imagine you are the controller in a sector when suddenly the radio communication with your pilots does not work anymore. Take this assumption as the basis of the positive seperation concept. It is policy to always keep aircraft guaranteed safe to each other. This means as soon as you recognize a possible conflict, imeediately resolve it. It's never a good idea to say to yourself &amp;quot;I'll get back to it later&amp;quot; because you might forget it, the voice channel might be blocked and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the dense approach airspace this is often not easy but it will save you a lot of nerves if you keep converging traffic on different levels!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Resolving conflicts===&lt;br /&gt;
There are multple ways of resolving a conflict. You can alter the aircrafts flight path, altitude or speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts altitude to resolve a conflict is relatively easy. Just make sure you achieve the necessary seperation when the two aircraft meet. In the cruise phase you have to keep in mind the aircrafts performance. Often aircraft can't climb higher due to their weight, so don't be surprised if the pilot rejects the altitude change. Also have a look at the aircrafts further intentions. For example it is often not a good idea to put an aircraft that has to descend in a short time anyway on top of another one.&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots prefer to stay at their cruising altitude however in certain situations (e.g. one aircraft overtaking another one) don't hesitate to change the cruise level in accordance with the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speed restrictions for seperation are also possible but mostly you should use them to maintain the present seperation. However in congested airspace where other means of seperation are not possible (e.g. due to terrain) you can also use speeds to achieve a certain seperation. Bear in mind that especially during cruise flight an aircrafts speed margin might not be very large.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts flight path to achieve a safe situation is often the best way. Consider the following basic situation:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Two aircraft are flying to the same point at the same altitude. If they keep on flying they will meet each other exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To resolve the conflict you have to change the heading of one of the aircraft. You will soon discover that the best possibility is to turn one aircraft behind the other one. The earlier you start such a maneuver the smaller the heading change has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spacing techniques===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways of achieving a certain seperation: Modifying an aircrafts speed or it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
====The Delay Vector====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Your working a sector which has an exit agreement that requires you to put aircraft ten miles in trail. This means the distance between two aircraft exiting your sector with the same destination has to be ten nautical miles. In this sector multiple streams of traffic are merged into one and leave your area via an intersection called TEMTA. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
First thing you'll have to do is to determine their current spacing using the techniques discussed above. By doing this we get a spacing of 5 nm, so we have to do something. We don't want to change their speed so what else can we do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What we will do is lengthen the way of one of the aircrafts and shorten the other ones as far as possible. If possible put the first aircraft on a direct to the merging point. Sometimes this is already enough to gain some miles but in this case we put the second aircraft on a so called delay vector. This means we turn the aircraft away from the direct route to lengthen it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AUA91, proceed direct TEMTA, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA91: Proceeding direct TEMTA, maintaining 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AFR291, for seperation turn right heading 130, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: turning right heading 130, maintaining speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
To be sure we assigned a common speed and we also gave a short hint to the pilot about the cause for the vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we have to constantly assess the spacing between these two aircraft. As soon as we achieved our required spacing we put the Air France back on it's route.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AFR291, proceed direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: proceeding direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case we used a delay vector of about 40 degrees. You will learn by experience how big this delay vector has to be, however as before, the earlier you start the maneuver the smaller it has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
It is often also necessary to use speed restrictions to achieve or maintain a certain spacing. In these cases IAS should be used below FL 240 and Mach in the regions above. Especially in cruise flight most aircraft have a small speed margin, so the effect of speed control is limited. Often speed control is used additionally to putting the aircraft onto a delay vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircrews are expected to maintain instructed speeds as accurately as possible (+ / - 10knts). In case of unability to maintain instructed speed (weather reasons, operating limitations etc.) the controller has to be informed immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Holding===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Useage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The primary use of a holding is delaying aircraft that have arrived over their destination but cannot land yet because of traffic congestion, poor weather, or unavailability of the runway.  Several aircraft may fly the same holding pattern at the same time, separated vertically by 1,000 feet or more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''How does it look like'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding is situated around a holding fix. In a standard holding pattern the aircraft flies inbound to the holding fix on a certain course (Inbound leg). After passing the fix it turns right (standard turn: 2° per second) and flies one minute (1,5 min above FL 140) into the other direction (outbound leg). After one minute the pilot turns right again (standard turn) and establishes again on the inbound leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you count all this together you end up with four minutes required to finish one holding pattern. However some holding patterns use left turns, others don't use one minute to measure the outbound leg, but fly to a certain distance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also every holding has a minimum altitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flying a Hold'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Most aircraft have a specific holding speed published by the manufacturer.Maximum holding speeds are established in order to keep aircraft within the protected holding area during their one-minute inbound and outbound legs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a rule of thumb the Speed to be flown depends on the altitude or flight level the aircraft is at within the hold as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * At 6,000' MSL and below: 200 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * From 6,001' to FL 140: 230 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * At and above FL140: 265 knots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Duration'''&lt;br /&gt;
A Complete hold should take:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and below 4 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and above 5 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Holding Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding clearance issued by ATC includes at least:&lt;br /&gt;
 - A clearance to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The direction to hold from the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - A specified radial, course, or inbound track.&lt;br /&gt;
 - If DME is used, the DME distances at which the fix end and outbound end turns are to be&lt;br /&gt;
   commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The altitude or FL to be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to expect further clearance or an approach clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to leave the fix in the event of a communications failure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the right&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the left&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Course: The course flown on the inbound leg to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Inbound Leg: The standard 1 or 1.5 minute leg to the holding fix as Published&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Fix: This can be a VOR, a VORDME, an Intersection or an NDB&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Turn: A standard rate, 180 degrees turn which is begun at the holding Fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Abeam: The position opposite the holding fix, where the outbound begins.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Leg: This leg is defined by the inbound leg, pilots should adjust the outbound leg&lt;br /&gt;
      so that the inbound turn, the other standard 180° turn is completed just as the holding&lt;br /&gt;
      course is intercepted.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Side: The side of the course where the hold is accomplished.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Holding Side: The side of the course where you do not want the pilot to be holding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Non Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A non-standard holding pattern is one in which&lt;br /&gt;
 - The fix end and outbound end turns are to the left; and/or&lt;br /&gt;
 - The planned time along the inbound track is other than the standard one-minute or&lt;br /&gt;
   one-and-a-half minute leg appropriate for the altitude flown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Entry Holding Procedure'''&lt;br /&gt;
**Direct Entry (aircraft flies directly to the holding fix, and immediately begins the first turn outbound)&lt;br /&gt;
**Parallel Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, parallels the inbound course for one minute outbound, and then turns back, flies directly to the fix, and proceeds in the hold from there&lt;br /&gt;
**Teardrop Entry or Offset Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, turns into the protected area, flies for one minute, and then turns back inbound, proceeds to the fix and continues from there).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Coordination with adjacent Sectors==&lt;br /&gt;
The coordination respectively the communication between controllers (and of course pilots) is on of the most important things in aviation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A clear instruction to the person I want to speak to falls into 4 parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Who am I calling&lt;br /&gt;
 - What do I want&lt;br /&gt;
 - How are we going to archieve this (short and clear instructions!) &lt;br /&gt;
 - Did the person I called unterstand my instruction properly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Handoff===&lt;br /&gt;
At some point you'll have to send the pilot on to the next controller. With a Tower this is relatively easy: Just drop the track and send him onto the Tower frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However between Radar controllers a more sophisticated system is used.&lt;br /&gt;
A Handoff consists of two stages:&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Communication.&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Control====&lt;br /&gt;
The first part is done by sending a handoff request to the next controller. You may only do this if the plane is safe and will remain safe within your sector at all time. So initiate the handoff if you don't need him anymore, but not before that.&lt;br /&gt;
The other controller accepts the handoff. Again he only does this if he can really accept the traffic without creating a conflict. If that's not possible the two of you will have to work out a different solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the next controller rejects the handoff, the aircraft is not allowed to enter his sector and it is your responsibility to ensure it doesn't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;You are responsible for everything that happens in your sector.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' And you are not allowed to do anything in somebody else's if it is not stated in your sectors Letters of Agreement or without his permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the handoff is accepted, transfer of control is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Communication====&lt;br /&gt;
This is easy, just send him on the next frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Release===&lt;br /&gt;
Some times it comes in handy to change an aircrafts direction, altitude or speed while he is still in the previous sector. In this case you can coordinate with the controller responsible that you change one of these things early. This is called a release and often the phrase:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Released for ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
is used.&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Traffic==&lt;br /&gt;
===Flight Information Positions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flight Information Service (FIS) is an air traffic facility that provides a myriad of services to the pilot, such as pilot briefings, relaying of clearances and broadcasting of weather information.&lt;br /&gt;
At selected locations, FIS also provides en-route Flight Advisory Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Abnormal Situations - Emergencies, Radio Failures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Emergencies===&lt;br /&gt;
Emergencies are very uncomfortable situations for every controller. Emergencies shall be handeled expeditiously to get them safe down to the ground.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot tells the ATC what his intentions are and what he will do next and not the other way round. ATC keeps all the traffic in the vicinity of the emergency aircraft away to assure  that no other aircraft gets injured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Radio Failures===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to recognize a radio failure. Either you call the aircraft and don't get an answer or the pilot notices the failure and sets Squawk 7600. In the second case you will get an indication on your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First thing to do, is to find out if the pilot can still hear you:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read Squawk Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 or&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read turn right by 30° for 30 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
If he does you can give him instructions as usual. It is a good idea to let the pilot acknowledge each of the instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, Acknowledge all further instructions by Squawking Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Inform the other controllers involved of the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot is not able to hear you, he will continue his flight according to his flightplan until he reaches his clearance limit. There he will enter the associated holding pattern, stay there 5 minutes and then conduct the approach to the active runway. In this case keep the other aircraft out of his way and again inform the other controllers involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Positions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Weather Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Special Requests&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_I_APP (118.520) and LOVV_I_CTR (124.400) are the FIS/FIC Positions within Austrian airspace. They are responsible for the VFR Flights. They allocate Squawks, provide Traffic Information and offer Weather Information (worldwide) and coordinate with other controllers requests from pilots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2620</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Radar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2620"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:56:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Types of Instrument Approaches */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
==Airspace Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Austrian Airspace is structured into four different Types of Airspace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class C:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other and from flights operating under VFR. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of other VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class D:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are given traffic information in respect of VFR flights. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of all other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class E:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are subject to ATC clearance. Flights under VFR are not subject to ATC clearance. As far as is practical, traffic information is given to all flights in respect of VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class G:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR or VFR. ATC separation is not provided. Traffic Information may be given as far as is practical in respect of other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classes C-E are referred to as controlled airspace. Class G is uncontrolled airspace. Controlled Airspace is shared between different ATC-Units (TWR, APP, CTR) and within these units they can be split further into different sectors.&lt;br /&gt;
==Responsibilities==&lt;br /&gt;
Each Radar Controller has an area of responsibility which may consist of one or more sectors. He has to maintain the required seperation between aircraft within his sector and ensures the expeditious flow of traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Minimum Radar Separation==&lt;br /&gt;
A Controller has to make sure that two Aircraft which are under his control never get closer than the minimum radar seperation. If two aircraft get closer than that, this incident is called a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
*The standard &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Vertical Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; is 1000 ft up to FL290 and 2000 ft above that. However Austria is considered RVSM (Reduced Vertical Seperation Minima) airspace so the upper limit of the 1000 ft seperation minimum is raised to FL410. In real life this demands special equipment of the aircraft involved, however on VATSIM all aircraft are considered RVSM capable.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Horizontal Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; depends on the radar equipment involved. APP Sectors work with a minimum of 3 nm, CTR Sectors use 5 nm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some cases where these minima may be under-run such as visual seperation or formation flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MRVA, MSA, MOCA==&lt;br /&gt;
MRVA (Minimum Radar Vectoring Altitude): The MRVA is defined as the lowest available altitude above   Mean Sea Level (MSL) in controlled airspace under consideration of the MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude) above ground and the airspace structure within a specified area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude): Minimum Sector Altitude is the minimum altitude that may be used under emergency conditions which will provide a minimum clearance of 1000ft above obstacles and terrain contained within a sector of 25 NM radius centred on a radio navigational aid. MSA can be given as areas between radials from a VOR at the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MOCA (Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitude): This is the lowest altitude that an aircraft can fly in IMC (Instrument Meteorological Conditions) and still keep safe clearance from terrain and obstacles. MOCA is often lower then MEA (se below). It is only used in emergencies, especially to get below icing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Structure of Flightplans and Routings==&lt;br /&gt;
A route consist of one or more points connected by eithe airways or directs (DCT).&lt;br /&gt;
 SITNI UL856 BAGSI Q114 RTT&lt;br /&gt;
In this case SITNI is the first point of the Route, thereafter it follows the airway UL856 to BAGSI and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
===SIDs===&lt;br /&gt;
SID (Standard Instrument Departure): It is a pre-defined route which aircrafts have to fly to get to their initial airway to follow their desired routing to their destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g.: Flightplan from LOWW (Wien) to Salzburg (LOWS): SITNI L856 SBG DCT - SITNI is our first waypoint of our routing and let us say for instance that in Vienna Runway 29 is in use. We take a look at our charts and we see that we can plan for a socalled SITNI4C departure route.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIDs are specified by the local Air Traffic Control. A SID can contain the following navigation aids: R-NAV Waypoints, VORs, NDBs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===STARs===&lt;br /&gt;
STARs (Standart Terminal Arrival Routes): STARs are pre-defined routes to get an aircraft to the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A STAR falls into three parts namely navigational point, version number and runway (depending on the airport), e.g. GAMLI4W arrival. The point at which the STAR ends is called Initial Approach Fix (IAF). In some cases the STARs continue and end at the Final Approach Fix (FAF), and that means that you as controller don't need to vector the aircraft unless there is other traffic in the way. The only thing you have to do is to instruct the pilot how to descend the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are exceptions of course, where the STARs don't end at the final, but at a navigational point some distance away from the runway. You as a controller must give vectors the last part to the runway. If you for some reason don’t give vectors, the pilot must enter holding at the STAR's ending point (clearance limit).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types of Instrument Approaches===&lt;br /&gt;
An '''instrument approach''' or '''instrument approach procedure (IAP)''' is a type of air navigation that allows pilots to land an aircraft in reduced visibility (Instrument Meteorological Conditions [IMC]) or to reach visual conditions permitting a visual landing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) '''Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - ILS (Instrument Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - MLS (Microwave Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - PAR (Precision Approach Radar)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - LAAS (Ground Based Augmentation System [GBAS] for Global Satellite Navigation Systems [GNSS])&lt;br /&gt;
 - JPALS (Joint Precision Approach and Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GCA (Ground Controlled Approach)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) '''Non-Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer&lt;br /&gt;
 - VOR&lt;br /&gt;
 - NDB (with ADF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Simplified Directional Facility (SDF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - TACAN&lt;br /&gt;
 - Surveillance Radar Approach (SRA) [also known in some countries as ASR approach]&lt;br /&gt;
 - Visual&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Vectoring===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of vectoring:&lt;br /&gt;
* Lateral Vectoring &lt;br /&gt;
* Vertical Vectoring&lt;br /&gt;
====Lateral Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, turn left heading 165°&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, turn right heading 300°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When issuing a heading to an aircraft, make sure that you are using a direction ending on 0 (zero) or on 5 (five).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you provide Radar Vectors to an aircraft then always tell the pilot the reason why you are doing this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123 turn right heading 080°, radar vectors for ILS approach RWY 11&lt;br /&gt;
After vectoring an aircraft you might have to send the aircraft back on its flight planned route:&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, proceed direct to SITNI&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to know, that as soon as you take an aircraft of a publsihed route, either by vectoring or by using a direct, you are also responsible for the necessary terrain clearance. To do this always consider the MRVA on the aircrafts path.&lt;br /&gt;
====Vertical Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, climb FL240&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, descend Altitude 3000 feet, QNH 1016&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see there are 2 types of heights namely Altitude and Flightlevel (FL).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flightlevel''' is used for aircraft flying above the Transition Altitude, Transition Level or climbing through and above the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to Standard Pressure [1013 QNE]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Altitude''' is used for aircraft flying below the Transition Altitude or for Aircraft descending through and below the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to local QNH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
A controller may issue speed instructions within an aircrafts operating limits. There are two possible ways to do this, either by using Indicated Airspeed (FL280 or below) or by specifying a Mach number (FL280 or above).&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, maintain speed 280 knots&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF456, maintain Mach 0.81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Seperation and Sequencing Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
===Planning===&lt;br /&gt;
To effectively use the sequencing techniques explained below we first have to assess the current situation.&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current seperation====&lt;br /&gt;
In VRC and ES there are tools available to determine the seperation between aircraft. One of them is the Seperation Predictor. It is a very comfortable way to determine the point where two aircraft, given a constant speed, will be closest to each other. Furthermore it gives you the minimum distance and the time to go to this point.&lt;br /&gt;
To constantly survey the distance between to aircraft (or between an aircraft and a point) you can use seperation links (or anchors).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These tools give you an overview over the lateral situation. The vertical situations is a bit more complicated since you have to use a bit of math. If you have two converging aircraft who are not at a constant altitude you need their rate of climb/descend to determine the spacing at their closest point.&lt;br /&gt;
 APP: AUA265, report rate of climb.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA265:rate of climb 2500 feet per minute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current spacing====&lt;br /&gt;
Often procedures in a sector include a so called &amp;quot;miles-in-trail&amp;quot; requirement. This means that aircraft flying over the same point and for example have a common destination need to cross the point in a certain distance. Also when working as an approach controller we need to know how close two aircraft will be on approach. How can we determine the current spacing?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First we need to choose a merging point. In a miles in trail requirement this would typically be the handoff point. In the approach area that could be a point somewhere on the approach (e.g. 12 nm final or the point of base turn). Now we can measure the distance of both aircraft to the merging point. If both aircraft have the same speed and are routing direct to the merging point you directly get the spacing at this point. However if differnet speeds are involved things get more complicated. In this case there is no easy and fast way to determine the spacing at the merging point.&lt;br /&gt;
You will have to use your experience to judge these situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you can use this technique to determine the spacing between multiple aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
===The concept of positive seperation===&lt;br /&gt;
Imagine you are the controller in a sector when suddenly the radio communication with your pilots does not work anymore. Take this assumption as the basis of the positive seperation concept. It is policy to always keep aircraft guaranteed safe to each other. This means as soon as you recognize a possible conflict, imeediately resolve it. It's never a good idea to say to yourself &amp;quot;I'll get back to it later&amp;quot; because you might forget it, the voice channel might be blocked and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the dense approach airspace this is often not easy but it will save you a lot of nerves if you keep converging traffic on different levels!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Resolving conflicts===&lt;br /&gt;
There are multple ways of resolving a conflict. You can alter the aircrafts flight path, altitude or speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts altitude to resolve a conflict is relatively easy. Just make sure you achieve the necessary seperation when the two aircraft meet. In the cruise phase you have to keep in mind the aircrafts performance. Often aircraft can't climb higher due to their weight, so don't be surprised if the pilot rejects the altitude change. Also have a look at the aircrafts further intentions. For example it is often not a good idea to put an aircraft that has to descend in a short time anyway on top of another one.&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots prefer to stay at their cruising altitude however in certain situations (e.g. one aircraft overtaking another one) don't hesitate to change the cruise level in accordance with the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speed restrictions for seperation are also possible but mostly you should use them to maintain the present seperation. However in congested airspace where other means of seperation are not possible (e.g. due to terrain) you can also use speeds to achieve a certain seperation. Bear in mind that especially during cruise flight an aircrafts speed margin might not be very large.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts flight path to achieve a safe situation is often the best way. Consider the following basic situation:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Two aircraft are flying to the same point at the same altitude. If they keep on flying they will meet each other exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To resolve the conflict you have to change the heading of one of the aircraft. You will soon discover that the best possibility is to turn one aircraft behind the other one. The earlier you start such a maneuver the smaller the heading change has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spacing techniques===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways of achieving a certain seperation: Modifying an aircrafts speed or it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
====The Delay Vector====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Your working a sector which has an exit agreement that requires you to put aircraft ten miles in trail. This means the distance between two aircraft exiting your sector with the same destination has to be ten nautical miles. In this sector multiple streams of traffic are merged into one and leave your area via an intersection called TEMTA. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
First thing you'll have to do is to determine their current spacing using the techniques discussed above. By doing this we get a spacing of 5 nm, so we have to do something. We don't want to change their speed so what else can we do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What we will do is lengthen the way of one of the aircrafts and shorten the other ones as far as possible. If possible put the first aircraft on a direct to the merging point. Sometimes this is already enough to gain some miles but in this case we put the second aircraft on a so called delay vector. This means we turn the aircraft away from the direct route to lengthen it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AUA91, proceed direct TEMTA, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA91: Proceeding direct TEMTA, maintaining 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AFR291, for seperation turn right heading 130, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: turning right heading 130, maintaining speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
To be sure we assigned a common speed and we also gave a short hint to the pilot about the cause for the vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we have to constantly assess the spacing between these two aircraft. As soon as we achieved our required spacing we put the Air France back on it's route.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AFR291, proceed direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: proceeding direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case we used a delay vector of about 40 degrees. You will learn by experience how big this delay vector has to be, however as before, the earlier you start the maneuver the smaller it has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
It is often also necessary to use speed restrictions to achieve or maintain a certain spacing. In these cases IAS should be used below FL 240 and Mach in the regions above. Especially in cruise flight most aircraft have a small speed margin, so the effect of speed control is limited. Often speed control is used additionally to putting the aircraft onto a delay vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircrews are expected to maintain instructed speeds as accurately as possible (+ / - 10knts). In case of unability to maintain instructed speed (weather reasons, operating limitations etc.) the controller has to be informed immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Holding===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Useage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The primary use of a holding is delaying aircraft that have arrived over their destination but cannot land yet because of traffic congestion, poor weather, or unavailability of the runway.  Several aircraft may fly the same holding pattern at the same time, separated vertically by 1,000 feet or more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''How does it look like'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding is situated around a holding fix. In a standard holding pattern the aircraft flies inbound to the holding fix on a certain course (Inbound leg). After passing the fix it turns right (standard turn: 2° per second) and flies one minute (1,5 min above FL 140) into the other direction (outbound leg). After one minute the pilot turns right again (standard turn) and establishes again on the inbound leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you count all this together you end up with four minutes required to finish one holding pattern. However some holding patterns use left turns, others don't use one minute to measure the outbound leg, but fly to a certain distance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also every holding has a minimum altitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flying a Hold'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Most aircraft have a specific holding speed published by the manufacturer.Maximum holding speeds are established in order to keep aircraft within the protected holding area during their one-minute inbound and outbound legs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a rule of thumb the Speed to be flown depends on the altitude or flight level the aircraft is at within the hold as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * At 6,000' MSL and below: 200 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * From 6,001' to FL 140: 230 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * At and above FL140: 265 knots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Duration'''&lt;br /&gt;
A Complete hold should take:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and below 4 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and above 5 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Holding Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding clearance issued by ATC includes at least:&lt;br /&gt;
 - A clearance to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The direction to hold from the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - A specified radial, course, or inbound track.&lt;br /&gt;
 - If DME is used, the DME distances at which the fix end and outbound end turns are to be&lt;br /&gt;
   commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The altitude or FL to be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to expect further clearance or an approach clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to leave the fix in the event of a communications failure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the right&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the left&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Course: The course flown on the inbound leg to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Inbound Leg: The standard 1 or 1.5 minute leg to the holding fix as Published&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Fix: This can be a VOR, a VORDME, an Intersection or an NDB&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Turn: A standard rate, 180 degrees turn which is begun at the holding Fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Abeam: The position opposite the holding fix, where the outbound begins.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Leg: This leg is defined by the inbound leg, pilots should adjust the outbound leg&lt;br /&gt;
      so that the inbound turn, the other standard 180° turn is completed just as the holding&lt;br /&gt;
      course is intercepted.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Side: The side of the course where the hold is accomplished.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Holding Side: The side of the course where you do not want the pilot to be holding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Non Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A non-standard holding pattern is one in which&lt;br /&gt;
 - The fix end and outbound end turns are to the left; and/or&lt;br /&gt;
 - The planned time along the inbound track is other than the standard one-minute or&lt;br /&gt;
   one-and-a-half minute leg appropriate for the altitude flown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Entry Holding Procedure'''&lt;br /&gt;
**Direct Entry (aircraft flies directly to the holding fix, and immediately begins the first turn outbound)&lt;br /&gt;
**Parallel Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, parallels the inbound course for one minute outbound, and then turns back, flies directly to the fix, and proceeds in the hold from there&lt;br /&gt;
**Teardrop Entry or Offset Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, turns into the protected area, flies for one minute, and then turns back inbound, proceeds to the fix and continues from there).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Coordination with adjacent Sectors==&lt;br /&gt;
The coordination respectively the communication between controllers (and of course pilots) is on of the most important things in aviation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A clear instruction to the person I want to speak to falls into 4 parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Who am I calling&lt;br /&gt;
 - What do I want&lt;br /&gt;
 - How are we going to archieve this (short and clear instructions!) &lt;br /&gt;
 - Did the person I called unterstand my instruction properly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Handoff===&lt;br /&gt;
At some point you'll have to send the pilot on to the next controller. With a Tower this is relatively easy: Just drop the track and send him onto the Tower frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However between Radar controllers a more sophisticated system is used.&lt;br /&gt;
A Handoff consists of two stages:&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Communication.&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Control====&lt;br /&gt;
The first part is done by sending a handoff request to the next controller. You may only do this if the plane is safe and will remain safe within your sector at all time. So initiate the handoff if you don't need him anymore, but not before that.&lt;br /&gt;
The other controller accepts the handoff. Again he only does this if he can really accept the traffic without creating a conflict. If that's not possible the two of you will have to work out a different solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the next controller rejects the handoff, the aircraft is not allowed to enter his sector and it is your responsibility to ensure it doesn't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;You are responsible for everything that happens in your sector.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' And you are not allowed to do anything in somebody else's if it is not stated in your sectors Letters of Agreement or without his permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the handoff is accepted, transfer of control is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Communication====&lt;br /&gt;
This is easy, just send him on the next frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Release===&lt;br /&gt;
Some times it comes in handy to change an aircrafts direction, altitude or speed while he is still in the previous sector. In this case you can coordinate with the controller responsible that you change one of these things early. This is called a release and often the phrase:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Released for ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
is used.&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Traffic==&lt;br /&gt;
===Flight Information Positions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flight Information Service (FIS) is an air traffic facility that provides a myriad of services to the pilot, such as pilot briefings, relaying of clearances and broadcasting of weather information.&lt;br /&gt;
At selected locations, FIS also provides en-route Flight Advisory Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Abnormal Situations - Emergencies, Radio Failures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Emergencies===&lt;br /&gt;
Emergencies are very uncomfortable situations for every controller. Emergencies shall be handeled expeditiously to get them safe down to the ground.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot tells the ATC what his intentions are and what he will do next and not the other way round. ATC keeps all the traffic in the vicinity of the emergency aircraft away to assure  that no other aircraft gets injured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Radio Failures===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to recognize a radio failure. Either you call the aircraft and don't get an answer or the pilot notices the failure and sets Squawk 7600. In the second case you will get an indication on your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First thing to do, is to find out if the pilot can still hear you:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read Squawk Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 or&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read turn right by 30° for 30 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
If he does you can give him instructions as usual. It is a good idea to let the pilot acknowledge each of the instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, Acknowledge all further instructions by Squawking Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Inform the other controllers involved of the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot is not able to hear you, he will continue his flight according to his flightplan until he reaches his clearance limit. There he will enter the associated holding pattern, stay there 5 minutes and then conduct the approach to the active runway. In this case keep the other aircraft out of his way and again inform the other controllers involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Positions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Weather Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Special Requests&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_I_APP (118.520) and LOVV_I_CTR (124.400) are the FIS/FIC Positions within Austrian airspace. They are responsible for the VFR Flights. They allocate Squawks, provide Traffic Information and offer Weather Information (worldwide) and coordinate with other controllers requests from pilots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2619</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Radar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2619"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:56:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Types of Instrument Approaches */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
==Airspace Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Austrian Airspace is structured into four different Types of Airspace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class C:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other and from flights operating under VFR. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of other VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class D:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are given traffic information in respect of VFR flights. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of all other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class E:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are subject to ATC clearance. Flights under VFR are not subject to ATC clearance. As far as is practical, traffic information is given to all flights in respect of VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class G:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR or VFR. ATC separation is not provided. Traffic Information may be given as far as is practical in respect of other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classes C-E are referred to as controlled airspace. Class G is uncontrolled airspace. Controlled Airspace is shared between different ATC-Units (TWR, APP, CTR) and within these units they can be split further into different sectors.&lt;br /&gt;
==Responsibilities==&lt;br /&gt;
Each Radar Controller has an area of responsibility which may consist of one or more sectors. He has to maintain the required seperation between aircraft within his sector and ensures the expeditious flow of traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Minimum Radar Separation==&lt;br /&gt;
A Controller has to make sure that two Aircraft which are under his control never get closer than the minimum radar seperation. If two aircraft get closer than that, this incident is called a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
*The standard &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Vertical Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; is 1000 ft up to FL290 and 2000 ft above that. However Austria is considered RVSM (Reduced Vertical Seperation Minima) airspace so the upper limit of the 1000 ft seperation minimum is raised to FL410. In real life this demands special equipment of the aircraft involved, however on VATSIM all aircraft are considered RVSM capable.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Horizontal Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; depends on the radar equipment involved. APP Sectors work with a minimum of 3 nm, CTR Sectors use 5 nm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some cases where these minima may be under-run such as visual seperation or formation flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MRVA, MSA, MOCA==&lt;br /&gt;
MRVA (Minimum Radar Vectoring Altitude): The MRVA is defined as the lowest available altitude above   Mean Sea Level (MSL) in controlled airspace under consideration of the MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude) above ground and the airspace structure within a specified area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude): Minimum Sector Altitude is the minimum altitude that may be used under emergency conditions which will provide a minimum clearance of 1000ft above obstacles and terrain contained within a sector of 25 NM radius centred on a radio navigational aid. MSA can be given as areas between radials from a VOR at the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MOCA (Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitude): This is the lowest altitude that an aircraft can fly in IMC (Instrument Meteorological Conditions) and still keep safe clearance from terrain and obstacles. MOCA is often lower then MEA (se below). It is only used in emergencies, especially to get below icing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Structure of Flightplans and Routings==&lt;br /&gt;
A route consist of one or more points connected by eithe airways or directs (DCT).&lt;br /&gt;
 SITNI UL856 BAGSI Q114 RTT&lt;br /&gt;
In this case SITNI is the first point of the Route, thereafter it follows the airway UL856 to BAGSI and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
===SIDs===&lt;br /&gt;
SID (Standard Instrument Departure): It is a pre-defined route which aircrafts have to fly to get to their initial airway to follow their desired routing to their destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g.: Flightplan from LOWW (Wien) to Salzburg (LOWS): SITNI L856 SBG DCT - SITNI is our first waypoint of our routing and let us say for instance that in Vienna Runway 29 is in use. We take a look at our charts and we see that we can plan for a socalled SITNI4C departure route.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIDs are specified by the local Air Traffic Control. A SID can contain the following navigation aids: R-NAV Waypoints, VORs, NDBs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===STARs===&lt;br /&gt;
STARs (Standart Terminal Arrival Routes): STARs are pre-defined routes to get an aircraft to the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A STAR falls into three parts namely navigational point, version number and runway (depending on the airport), e.g. GAMLI4W arrival. The point at which the STAR ends is called Initial Approach Fix (IAF). In some cases the STARs continue and end at the Final Approach Fix (FAF), and that means that you as controller don't need to vector the aircraft unless there is other traffic in the way. The only thing you have to do is to instruct the pilot how to descend the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are exceptions of course, where the STARs don't end at the final, but at a navigational point some distance away from the runway. You as a controller must give vectors the last part to the runway. If you for some reason don’t give vectors, the pilot must enter holding at the STAR's ending point (clearance limit).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types of Instrument Approaches===&lt;br /&gt;
An '''instrument approach''' or '''instrument approach procedure (IAP)''' is a type of air navigation that allows pilots to land an aircraft in reduced visibility (Instrument Meteorological Conditions [IMC]) or to reach visual conditions permitting a visual landing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) '''Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - ILS (Instrument Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - MLS (Microwave Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - PAR (Precision Approach Radar)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - LAAS (Ground Based Augmentation System [GBAS] for Global Satellite Navigation Systems [GNSS])&lt;br /&gt;
 - JPALS (Joint Precision Approach and Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GCA (Ground Controlled Approach)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) '''Non-Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer&lt;br /&gt;
 - VOR&lt;br /&gt;
 - NDB (with ADF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Simplified Directional Facility (SDF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - TACAN&lt;br /&gt;
 - Surveillance Radar Approach (SRA) [also known in some countries as ASR approach]&lt;br /&gt;
 - Visual&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Vectoring===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of vectoring:&lt;br /&gt;
* Lateral Vectoring &lt;br /&gt;
* Vertical Vectoring&lt;br /&gt;
====Lateral Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, turn left heading 165°&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, turn right heading 300°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When issuing a heading to an aircraft, make sure that you are using a direction ending on 0 (zero) or on 5 (five).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you provide Radar Vectors to an aircraft then always tell the pilot the reason why you are doing this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123 turn right heading 080°, radar vectors for ILS approach RWY 11&lt;br /&gt;
After vectoring an aircraft you might have to send the aircraft back on its flight planned route:&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, proceed direct to SITNI&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to know, that as soon as you take an aircraft of a publsihed route, either by vectoring or by using a direct, you are also responsible for the necessary terrain clearance. To do this always consider the MRVA on the aircrafts path.&lt;br /&gt;
====Vertical Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, climb FL240&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, descend Altitude 3000 feet, QNH 1016&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see there are 2 types of heights namely Altitude and Flightlevel (FL).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flightlevel''' is used for aircraft flying above the Transition Altitude, Transition Level or climbing through and above the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to Standard Pressure [1013 QNE]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Altitude''' is used for aircraft flying below the Transition Altitude or for Aircraft descending through and below the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to local QNH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
A controller may issue speed instructions within an aircrafts operating limits. There are two possible ways to do this, either by using Indicated Airspeed (FL280 or below) or by specifying a Mach number (FL280 or above).&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, maintain speed 280 knots&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF456, maintain Mach 0.81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Seperation and Sequencing Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
===Planning===&lt;br /&gt;
To effectively use the sequencing techniques explained below we first have to assess the current situation.&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current seperation====&lt;br /&gt;
In VRC and ES there are tools available to determine the seperation between aircraft. One of them is the Seperation Predictor. It is a very comfortable way to determine the point where two aircraft, given a constant speed, will be closest to each other. Furthermore it gives you the minimum distance and the time to go to this point.&lt;br /&gt;
To constantly survey the distance between to aircraft (or between an aircraft and a point) you can use seperation links (or anchors).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These tools give you an overview over the lateral situation. The vertical situations is a bit more complicated since you have to use a bit of math. If you have two converging aircraft who are not at a constant altitude you need their rate of climb/descend to determine the spacing at their closest point.&lt;br /&gt;
 APP: AUA265, report rate of climb.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA265:rate of climb 2500 feet per minute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current spacing====&lt;br /&gt;
Often procedures in a sector include a so called &amp;quot;miles-in-trail&amp;quot; requirement. This means that aircraft flying over the same point and for example have a common destination need to cross the point in a certain distance. Also when working as an approach controller we need to know how close two aircraft will be on approach. How can we determine the current spacing?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First we need to choose a merging point. In a miles in trail requirement this would typically be the handoff point. In the approach area that could be a point somewhere on the approach (e.g. 12 nm final or the point of base turn). Now we can measure the distance of both aircraft to the merging point. If both aircraft have the same speed and are routing direct to the merging point you directly get the spacing at this point. However if differnet speeds are involved things get more complicated. In this case there is no easy and fast way to determine the spacing at the merging point.&lt;br /&gt;
You will have to use your experience to judge these situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you can use this technique to determine the spacing between multiple aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
===The concept of positive seperation===&lt;br /&gt;
Imagine you are the controller in a sector when suddenly the radio communication with your pilots does not work anymore. Take this assumption as the basis of the positive seperation concept. It is policy to always keep aircraft guaranteed safe to each other. This means as soon as you recognize a possible conflict, imeediately resolve it. It's never a good idea to say to yourself &amp;quot;I'll get back to it later&amp;quot; because you might forget it, the voice channel might be blocked and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the dense approach airspace this is often not easy but it will save you a lot of nerves if you keep converging traffic on different levels!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Resolving conflicts===&lt;br /&gt;
There are multple ways of resolving a conflict. You can alter the aircrafts flight path, altitude or speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts altitude to resolve a conflict is relatively easy. Just make sure you achieve the necessary seperation when the two aircraft meet. In the cruise phase you have to keep in mind the aircrafts performance. Often aircraft can't climb higher due to their weight, so don't be surprised if the pilot rejects the altitude change. Also have a look at the aircrafts further intentions. For example it is often not a good idea to put an aircraft that has to descend in a short time anyway on top of another one.&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots prefer to stay at their cruising altitude however in certain situations (e.g. one aircraft overtaking another one) don't hesitate to change the cruise level in accordance with the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speed restrictions for seperation are also possible but mostly you should use them to maintain the present seperation. However in congested airspace where other means of seperation are not possible (e.g. due to terrain) you can also use speeds to achieve a certain seperation. Bear in mind that especially during cruise flight an aircrafts speed margin might not be very large.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts flight path to achieve a safe situation is often the best way. Consider the following basic situation:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Two aircraft are flying to the same point at the same altitude. If they keep on flying they will meet each other exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To resolve the conflict you have to change the heading of one of the aircraft. You will soon discover that the best possibility is to turn one aircraft behind the other one. The earlier you start such a maneuver the smaller the heading change has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spacing techniques===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways of achieving a certain seperation: Modifying an aircrafts speed or it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
====The Delay Vector====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Your working a sector which has an exit agreement that requires you to put aircraft ten miles in trail. This means the distance between two aircraft exiting your sector with the same destination has to be ten nautical miles. In this sector multiple streams of traffic are merged into one and leave your area via an intersection called TEMTA. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
First thing you'll have to do is to determine their current spacing using the techniques discussed above. By doing this we get a spacing of 5 nm, so we have to do something. We don't want to change their speed so what else can we do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What we will do is lengthen the way of one of the aircrafts and shorten the other ones as far as possible. If possible put the first aircraft on a direct to the merging point. Sometimes this is already enough to gain some miles but in this case we put the second aircraft on a so called delay vector. This means we turn the aircraft away from the direct route to lengthen it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AUA91, proceed direct TEMTA, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA91: Proceeding direct TEMTA, maintaining 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AFR291, for seperation turn right heading 130, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: turning right heading 130, maintaining speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
To be sure we assigned a common speed and we also gave a short hint to the pilot about the cause for the vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we have to constantly assess the spacing between these two aircraft. As soon as we achieved our required spacing we put the Air France back on it's route.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AFR291, proceed direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: proceeding direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case we used a delay vector of about 40 degrees. You will learn by experience how big this delay vector has to be, however as before, the earlier you start the maneuver the smaller it has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
It is often also necessary to use speed restrictions to achieve or maintain a certain spacing. In these cases IAS should be used below FL 240 and Mach in the regions above. Especially in cruise flight most aircraft have a small speed margin, so the effect of speed control is limited. Often speed control is used additionally to putting the aircraft onto a delay vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircrews are expected to maintain instructed speeds as accurately as possible (+ / - 10knts). In case of unability to maintain instructed speed (weather reasons, operating limitations etc.) the controller has to be informed immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Holding===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Useage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The primary use of a holding is delaying aircraft that have arrived over their destination but cannot land yet because of traffic congestion, poor weather, or unavailability of the runway.  Several aircraft may fly the same holding pattern at the same time, separated vertically by 1,000 feet or more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''How does it look like'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding is situated around a holding fix. In a standard holding pattern the aircraft flies inbound to the holding fix on a certain course (Inbound leg). After passing the fix it turns right (standard turn: 2° per second) and flies one minute (1,5 min above FL 140) into the other direction (outbound leg). After one minute the pilot turns right again (standard turn) and establishes again on the inbound leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you count all this together you end up with four minutes required to finish one holding pattern. However some holding patterns use left turns, others don't use one minute to measure the outbound leg, but fly to a certain distance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also every holding has a minimum altitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flying a Hold'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Most aircraft have a specific holding speed published by the manufacturer.Maximum holding speeds are established in order to keep aircraft within the protected holding area during their one-minute inbound and outbound legs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a rule of thumb the Speed to be flown depends on the altitude or flight level the aircraft is at within the hold as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * At 6,000' MSL and below: 200 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * From 6,001' to FL 140: 230 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * At and above FL140: 265 knots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Duration'''&lt;br /&gt;
A Complete hold should take:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and below 4 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and above 5 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Holding Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding clearance issued by ATC includes at least:&lt;br /&gt;
 - A clearance to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The direction to hold from the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - A specified radial, course, or inbound track.&lt;br /&gt;
 - If DME is used, the DME distances at which the fix end and outbound end turns are to be&lt;br /&gt;
   commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The altitude or FL to be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to expect further clearance or an approach clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to leave the fix in the event of a communications failure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the right&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the left&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Course: The course flown on the inbound leg to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Inbound Leg: The standard 1 or 1.5 minute leg to the holding fix as Published&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Fix: This can be a VOR, a VORDME, an Intersection or an NDB&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Turn: A standard rate, 180 degrees turn which is begun at the holding Fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Abeam: The position opposite the holding fix, where the outbound begins.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Leg: This leg is defined by the inbound leg, pilots should adjust the outbound leg&lt;br /&gt;
      so that the inbound turn, the other standard 180° turn is completed just as the holding&lt;br /&gt;
      course is intercepted.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Side: The side of the course where the hold is accomplished.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Holding Side: The side of the course where you do not want the pilot to be holding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Non Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A non-standard holding pattern is one in which&lt;br /&gt;
 - The fix end and outbound end turns are to the left; and/or&lt;br /&gt;
 - The planned time along the inbound track is other than the standard one-minute or&lt;br /&gt;
   one-and-a-half minute leg appropriate for the altitude flown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Entry Holding Procedure'''&lt;br /&gt;
**Direct Entry (aircraft flies directly to the holding fix, and immediately begins the first turn outbound)&lt;br /&gt;
**Parallel Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, parallels the inbound course for one minute outbound, and then turns back, flies directly to the fix, and proceeds in the hold from there&lt;br /&gt;
**Teardrop Entry or Offset Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, turns into the protected area, flies for one minute, and then turns back inbound, proceeds to the fix and continues from there).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Coordination with adjacent Sectors==&lt;br /&gt;
The coordination respectively the communication between controllers (and of course pilots) is on of the most important things in aviation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A clear instruction to the person I want to speak to falls into 4 parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Who am I calling&lt;br /&gt;
 - What do I want&lt;br /&gt;
 - How are we going to archieve this (short and clear instructions!) &lt;br /&gt;
 - Did the person I called unterstand my instruction properly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Handoff===&lt;br /&gt;
At some point you'll have to send the pilot on to the next controller. With a Tower this is relatively easy: Just drop the track and send him onto the Tower frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However between Radar controllers a more sophisticated system is used.&lt;br /&gt;
A Handoff consists of two stages:&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Communication.&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Control====&lt;br /&gt;
The first part is done by sending a handoff request to the next controller. You may only do this if the plane is safe and will remain safe within your sector at all time. So initiate the handoff if you don't need him anymore, but not before that.&lt;br /&gt;
The other controller accepts the handoff. Again he only does this if he can really accept the traffic without creating a conflict. If that's not possible the two of you will have to work out a different solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the next controller rejects the handoff, the aircraft is not allowed to enter his sector and it is your responsibility to ensure it doesn't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;You are responsible for everything that happens in your sector.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' And you are not allowed to do anything in somebody else's if it is not stated in your sectors Letters of Agreement or without his permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the handoff is accepted, transfer of control is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Communication====&lt;br /&gt;
This is easy, just send him on the next frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Release===&lt;br /&gt;
Some times it comes in handy to change an aircrafts direction, altitude or speed while he is still in the previous sector. In this case you can coordinate with the controller responsible that you change one of these things early. This is called a release and often the phrase:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Released for ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
is used.&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Traffic==&lt;br /&gt;
===Flight Information Positions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flight Information Service (FIS) is an air traffic facility that provides a myriad of services to the pilot, such as pilot briefings, relaying of clearances and broadcasting of weather information.&lt;br /&gt;
At selected locations, FIS also provides en-route Flight Advisory Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Abnormal Situations - Emergencies, Radio Failures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Emergencies===&lt;br /&gt;
Emergencies are very uncomfortable situations for every controller. Emergencies shall be handeled expeditiously to get them safe down to the ground.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot tells the ATC what his intentions are and what he will do next and not the other way round. ATC keeps all the traffic in the vicinity of the emergency aircraft away to assure  that no other aircraft gets injured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Radio Failures===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to recognize a radio failure. Either you call the aircraft and don't get an answer or the pilot notices the failure and sets Squawk 7600. In the second case you will get an indication on your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First thing to do, is to find out if the pilot can still hear you:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read Squawk Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 or&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read turn right by 30° for 30 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
If he does you can give him instructions as usual. It is a good idea to let the pilot acknowledge each of the instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, Acknowledge all further instructions by Squawking Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Inform the other controllers involved of the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot is not able to hear you, he will continue his flight according to his flightplan until he reaches his clearance limit. There he will enter the associated holding pattern, stay there 5 minutes and then conduct the approach to the active runway. In this case keep the other aircraft out of his way and again inform the other controllers involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Positions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Weather Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Special Requests&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_I_APP (118.520) and LOVV_I_CTR (124.400) are the FIS/FIC Positions within Austrian airspace. They are responsible for the VFR Flights. They allocate Squawks, provide Traffic Information and offer Weather Information (worldwide) and coordinate with other controllers requests from pilots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2618</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Radar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2618"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:56:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Types of Instrument Approaches */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
==Airspace Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Austrian Airspace is structured into four different Types of Airspace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class C:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other and from flights operating under VFR. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of other VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class D:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are given traffic information in respect of VFR flights. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of all other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class E:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are subject to ATC clearance. Flights under VFR are not subject to ATC clearance. As far as is practical, traffic information is given to all flights in respect of VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class G:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR or VFR. ATC separation is not provided. Traffic Information may be given as far as is practical in respect of other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classes C-E are referred to as controlled airspace. Class G is uncontrolled airspace. Controlled Airspace is shared between different ATC-Units (TWR, APP, CTR) and within these units they can be split further into different sectors.&lt;br /&gt;
==Responsibilities==&lt;br /&gt;
Each Radar Controller has an area of responsibility which may consist of one or more sectors. He has to maintain the required seperation between aircraft within his sector and ensures the expeditious flow of traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Minimum Radar Separation==&lt;br /&gt;
A Controller has to make sure that two Aircraft which are under his control never get closer than the minimum radar seperation. If two aircraft get closer than that, this incident is called a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
*The standard &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Vertical Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; is 1000 ft up to FL290 and 2000 ft above that. However Austria is considered RVSM (Reduced Vertical Seperation Minima) airspace so the upper limit of the 1000 ft seperation minimum is raised to FL410. In real life this demands special equipment of the aircraft involved, however on VATSIM all aircraft are considered RVSM capable.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Horizontal Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; depends on the radar equipment involved. APP Sectors work with a minimum of 3 nm, CTR Sectors use 5 nm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some cases where these minima may be under-run such as visual seperation or formation flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MRVA, MSA, MOCA==&lt;br /&gt;
MRVA (Minimum Radar Vectoring Altitude): The MRVA is defined as the lowest available altitude above   Mean Sea Level (MSL) in controlled airspace under consideration of the MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude) above ground and the airspace structure within a specified area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude): Minimum Sector Altitude is the minimum altitude that may be used under emergency conditions which will provide a minimum clearance of 1000ft above obstacles and terrain contained within a sector of 25 NM radius centred on a radio navigational aid. MSA can be given as areas between radials from a VOR at the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MOCA (Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitude): This is the lowest altitude that an aircraft can fly in IMC (Instrument Meteorological Conditions) and still keep safe clearance from terrain and obstacles. MOCA is often lower then MEA (se below). It is only used in emergencies, especially to get below icing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Structure of Flightplans and Routings==&lt;br /&gt;
A route consist of one or more points connected by eithe airways or directs (DCT).&lt;br /&gt;
 SITNI UL856 BAGSI Q114 RTT&lt;br /&gt;
In this case SITNI is the first point of the Route, thereafter it follows the airway UL856 to BAGSI and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
===SIDs===&lt;br /&gt;
SID (Standard Instrument Departure): It is a pre-defined route which aircrafts have to fly to get to their initial airway to follow their desired routing to their destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g.: Flightplan from LOWW (Wien) to Salzburg (LOWS): SITNI L856 SBG DCT - SITNI is our first waypoint of our routing and let us say for instance that in Vienna Runway 29 is in use. We take a look at our charts and we see that we can plan for a socalled SITNI4C departure route.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIDs are specified by the local Air Traffic Control. A SID can contain the following navigation aids: R-NAV Waypoints, VORs, NDBs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===STARs===&lt;br /&gt;
STARs (Standart Terminal Arrival Routes): STARs are pre-defined routes to get an aircraft to the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A STAR falls into three parts namely navigational point, version number and runway (depending on the airport), e.g. GAMLI4W arrival. The point at which the STAR ends is called Initial Approach Fix (IAF). In some cases the STARs continue and end at the Final Approach Fix (FAF), and that means that you as controller don't need to vector the aircraft unless there is other traffic in the way. The only thing you have to do is to instruct the pilot how to descend the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are exceptions of course, where the STARs don't end at the final, but at a navigational point some distance away from the runway. You as a controller must give vectors the last part to the runway. If you for some reason don’t give vectors, the pilot must enter holding at the STAR's ending point (clearance limit).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types of Instrument Approaches===&lt;br /&gt;
An '''instrument approach''' or '''instrument approach procedure (IAP)''' is a type of air navigation that allows pilots to land an aircraft in reduced visibility (Instrument Meteorological Conditions [IMC]) or to reach visual conditions permitting a visual landing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) '''Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - ILS (Instrument Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - MLS (Microwave Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - PAR (Precision Approach Radar)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - LAAS (Ground Based Augmentation System [GBAS] for Global Satellite Navigation Systems [GNSS])&lt;br /&gt;
 - JPALS (Joint Precision Approach and Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GCA (Ground Controlled Approach)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) '''Non-Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer&lt;br /&gt;
 - VOR&lt;br /&gt;
 - NDB (with ADF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Simplified Directional Facility (SDF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - TACAN&lt;br /&gt;
 - Surveillance Radar Approach (SRA) [also known in some countries as ASR approach]&lt;br /&gt;
 - Visual&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Vectoring===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of vectoring:&lt;br /&gt;
* Lateral Vectoring &lt;br /&gt;
* Vertical Vectoring&lt;br /&gt;
====Lateral Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, turn left heading 165°&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, turn right heading 300°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When issuing a heading to an aircraft, make sure that you are using a direction ending on 0 (zero) or on 5 (five).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you provide Radar Vectors to an aircraft then always tell the pilot the reason why you are doing this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123 turn right heading 080°, radar vectors for ILS approach RWY 11&lt;br /&gt;
After vectoring an aircraft you might have to send the aircraft back on its flight planned route:&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, proceed direct to SITNI&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to know, that as soon as you take an aircraft of a publsihed route, either by vectoring or by using a direct, you are also responsible for the necessary terrain clearance. To do this always consider the MRVA on the aircrafts path.&lt;br /&gt;
====Vertical Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, climb FL240&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, descend Altitude 3000 feet, QNH 1016&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see there are 2 types of heights namely Altitude and Flightlevel (FL).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flightlevel''' is used for aircraft flying above the Transition Altitude, Transition Level or climbing through and above the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to Standard Pressure [1013 QNE]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Altitude''' is used for aircraft flying below the Transition Altitude or for Aircraft descending through and below the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to local QNH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
A controller may issue speed instructions within an aircrafts operating limits. There are two possible ways to do this, either by using Indicated Airspeed (FL280 or below) or by specifying a Mach number (FL280 or above).&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, maintain speed 280 knots&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF456, maintain Mach 0.81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Seperation and Sequencing Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
===Planning===&lt;br /&gt;
To effectively use the sequencing techniques explained below we first have to assess the current situation.&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current seperation====&lt;br /&gt;
In VRC and ES there are tools available to determine the seperation between aircraft. One of them is the Seperation Predictor. It is a very comfortable way to determine the point where two aircraft, given a constant speed, will be closest to each other. Furthermore it gives you the minimum distance and the time to go to this point.&lt;br /&gt;
To constantly survey the distance between to aircraft (or between an aircraft and a point) you can use seperation links (or anchors).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These tools give you an overview over the lateral situation. The vertical situations is a bit more complicated since you have to use a bit of math. If you have two converging aircraft who are not at a constant altitude you need their rate of climb/descend to determine the spacing at their closest point.&lt;br /&gt;
 APP: AUA265, report rate of climb.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA265:rate of climb 2500 feet per minute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current spacing====&lt;br /&gt;
Often procedures in a sector include a so called &amp;quot;miles-in-trail&amp;quot; requirement. This means that aircraft flying over the same point and for example have a common destination need to cross the point in a certain distance. Also when working as an approach controller we need to know how close two aircraft will be on approach. How can we determine the current spacing?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First we need to choose a merging point. In a miles in trail requirement this would typically be the handoff point. In the approach area that could be a point somewhere on the approach (e.g. 12 nm final or the point of base turn). Now we can measure the distance of both aircraft to the merging point. If both aircraft have the same speed and are routing direct to the merging point you directly get the spacing at this point. However if differnet speeds are involved things get more complicated. In this case there is no easy and fast way to determine the spacing at the merging point.&lt;br /&gt;
You will have to use your experience to judge these situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you can use this technique to determine the spacing between multiple aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
===The concept of positive seperation===&lt;br /&gt;
Imagine you are the controller in a sector when suddenly the radio communication with your pilots does not work anymore. Take this assumption as the basis of the positive seperation concept. It is policy to always keep aircraft guaranteed safe to each other. This means as soon as you recognize a possible conflict, imeediately resolve it. It's never a good idea to say to yourself &amp;quot;I'll get back to it later&amp;quot; because you might forget it, the voice channel might be blocked and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the dense approach airspace this is often not easy but it will save you a lot of nerves if you keep converging traffic on different levels!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Resolving conflicts===&lt;br /&gt;
There are multple ways of resolving a conflict. You can alter the aircrafts flight path, altitude or speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts altitude to resolve a conflict is relatively easy. Just make sure you achieve the necessary seperation when the two aircraft meet. In the cruise phase you have to keep in mind the aircrafts performance. Often aircraft can't climb higher due to their weight, so don't be surprised if the pilot rejects the altitude change. Also have a look at the aircrafts further intentions. For example it is often not a good idea to put an aircraft that has to descend in a short time anyway on top of another one.&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots prefer to stay at their cruising altitude however in certain situations (e.g. one aircraft overtaking another one) don't hesitate to change the cruise level in accordance with the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speed restrictions for seperation are also possible but mostly you should use them to maintain the present seperation. However in congested airspace where other means of seperation are not possible (e.g. due to terrain) you can also use speeds to achieve a certain seperation. Bear in mind that especially during cruise flight an aircrafts speed margin might not be very large.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts flight path to achieve a safe situation is often the best way. Consider the following basic situation:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Two aircraft are flying to the same point at the same altitude. If they keep on flying they will meet each other exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To resolve the conflict you have to change the heading of one of the aircraft. You will soon discover that the best possibility is to turn one aircraft behind the other one. The earlier you start such a maneuver the smaller the heading change has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spacing techniques===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways of achieving a certain seperation: Modifying an aircrafts speed or it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
====The Delay Vector====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Your working a sector which has an exit agreement that requires you to put aircraft ten miles in trail. This means the distance between two aircraft exiting your sector with the same destination has to be ten nautical miles. In this sector multiple streams of traffic are merged into one and leave your area via an intersection called TEMTA. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
First thing you'll have to do is to determine their current spacing using the techniques discussed above. By doing this we get a spacing of 5 nm, so we have to do something. We don't want to change their speed so what else can we do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What we will do is lengthen the way of one of the aircrafts and shorten the other ones as far as possible. If possible put the first aircraft on a direct to the merging point. Sometimes this is already enough to gain some miles but in this case we put the second aircraft on a so called delay vector. This means we turn the aircraft away from the direct route to lengthen it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AUA91, proceed direct TEMTA, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA91: Proceeding direct TEMTA, maintaining 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AFR291, for seperation turn right heading 130, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: turning right heading 130, maintaining speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
To be sure we assigned a common speed and we also gave a short hint to the pilot about the cause for the vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we have to constantly assess the spacing between these two aircraft. As soon as we achieved our required spacing we put the Air France back on it's route.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AFR291, proceed direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: proceeding direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case we used a delay vector of about 40 degrees. You will learn by experience how big this delay vector has to be, however as before, the earlier you start the maneuver the smaller it has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
It is often also necessary to use speed restrictions to achieve or maintain a certain spacing. In these cases IAS should be used below FL 240 and Mach in the regions above. Especially in cruise flight most aircraft have a small speed margin, so the effect of speed control is limited. Often speed control is used additionally to putting the aircraft onto a delay vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircrews are expected to maintain instructed speeds as accurately as possible (+ / - 10knts). In case of unability to maintain instructed speed (weather reasons, operating limitations etc.) the controller has to be informed immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Holding===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Useage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The primary use of a holding is delaying aircraft that have arrived over their destination but cannot land yet because of traffic congestion, poor weather, or unavailability of the runway.  Several aircraft may fly the same holding pattern at the same time, separated vertically by 1,000 feet or more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''How does it look like'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding is situated around a holding fix. In a standard holding pattern the aircraft flies inbound to the holding fix on a certain course (Inbound leg). After passing the fix it turns right (standard turn: 2° per second) and flies one minute (1,5 min above FL 140) into the other direction (outbound leg). After one minute the pilot turns right again (standard turn) and establishes again on the inbound leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you count all this together you end up with four minutes required to finish one holding pattern. However some holding patterns use left turns, others don't use one minute to measure the outbound leg, but fly to a certain distance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also every holding has a minimum altitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flying a Hold'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Most aircraft have a specific holding speed published by the manufacturer.Maximum holding speeds are established in order to keep aircraft within the protected holding area during their one-minute inbound and outbound legs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a rule of thumb the Speed to be flown depends on the altitude or flight level the aircraft is at within the hold as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * At 6,000' MSL and below: 200 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * From 6,001' to FL 140: 230 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * At and above FL140: 265 knots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Duration'''&lt;br /&gt;
A Complete hold should take:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and below 4 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and above 5 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Holding Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding clearance issued by ATC includes at least:&lt;br /&gt;
 - A clearance to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The direction to hold from the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - A specified radial, course, or inbound track.&lt;br /&gt;
 - If DME is used, the DME distances at which the fix end and outbound end turns are to be&lt;br /&gt;
   commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The altitude or FL to be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to expect further clearance or an approach clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to leave the fix in the event of a communications failure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the right&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the left&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Course: The course flown on the inbound leg to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Inbound Leg: The standard 1 or 1.5 minute leg to the holding fix as Published&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Fix: This can be a VOR, a VORDME, an Intersection or an NDB&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Turn: A standard rate, 180 degrees turn which is begun at the holding Fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Abeam: The position opposite the holding fix, where the outbound begins.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Leg: This leg is defined by the inbound leg, pilots should adjust the outbound leg&lt;br /&gt;
      so that the inbound turn, the other standard 180° turn is completed just as the holding&lt;br /&gt;
      course is intercepted.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Side: The side of the course where the hold is accomplished.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Holding Side: The side of the course where you do not want the pilot to be holding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Non Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A non-standard holding pattern is one in which&lt;br /&gt;
 - The fix end and outbound end turns are to the left; and/or&lt;br /&gt;
 - The planned time along the inbound track is other than the standard one-minute or&lt;br /&gt;
   one-and-a-half minute leg appropriate for the altitude flown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Entry Holding Procedure'''&lt;br /&gt;
**Direct Entry (aircraft flies directly to the holding fix, and immediately begins the first turn outbound)&lt;br /&gt;
**Parallel Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, parallels the inbound course for one minute outbound, and then turns back, flies directly to the fix, and proceeds in the hold from there&lt;br /&gt;
**Teardrop Entry or Offset Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, turns into the protected area, flies for one minute, and then turns back inbound, proceeds to the fix and continues from there).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Coordination with adjacent Sectors==&lt;br /&gt;
The coordination respectively the communication between controllers (and of course pilots) is on of the most important things in aviation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A clear instruction to the person I want to speak to falls into 4 parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Who am I calling&lt;br /&gt;
 - What do I want&lt;br /&gt;
 - How are we going to archieve this (short and clear instructions!) &lt;br /&gt;
 - Did the person I called unterstand my instruction properly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Handoff===&lt;br /&gt;
At some point you'll have to send the pilot on to the next controller. With a Tower this is relatively easy: Just drop the track and send him onto the Tower frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However between Radar controllers a more sophisticated system is used.&lt;br /&gt;
A Handoff consists of two stages:&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Communication.&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Control====&lt;br /&gt;
The first part is done by sending a handoff request to the next controller. You may only do this if the plane is safe and will remain safe within your sector at all time. So initiate the handoff if you don't need him anymore, but not before that.&lt;br /&gt;
The other controller accepts the handoff. Again he only does this if he can really accept the traffic without creating a conflict. If that's not possible the two of you will have to work out a different solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the next controller rejects the handoff, the aircraft is not allowed to enter his sector and it is your responsibility to ensure it doesn't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;You are responsible for everything that happens in your sector.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' And you are not allowed to do anything in somebody else's if it is not stated in your sectors Letters of Agreement or without his permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the handoff is accepted, transfer of control is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Communication====&lt;br /&gt;
This is easy, just send him on the next frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Release===&lt;br /&gt;
Some times it comes in handy to change an aircrafts direction, altitude or speed while he is still in the previous sector. In this case you can coordinate with the controller responsible that you change one of these things early. This is called a release and often the phrase:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Released for ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
is used.&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Traffic==&lt;br /&gt;
===Flight Information Positions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flight Information Service (FIS) is an air traffic facility that provides a myriad of services to the pilot, such as pilot briefings, relaying of clearances and broadcasting of weather information.&lt;br /&gt;
At selected locations, FIS also provides en-route Flight Advisory Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Abnormal Situations - Emergencies, Radio Failures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Emergencies===&lt;br /&gt;
Emergencies are very uncomfortable situations for every controller. Emergencies shall be handeled expeditiously to get them safe down to the ground.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot tells the ATC what his intentions are and what he will do next and not the other way round. ATC keeps all the traffic in the vicinity of the emergency aircraft away to assure  that no other aircraft gets injured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Radio Failures===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to recognize a radio failure. Either you call the aircraft and don't get an answer or the pilot notices the failure and sets Squawk 7600. In the second case you will get an indication on your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First thing to do, is to find out if the pilot can still hear you:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read Squawk Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 or&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read turn right by 30° for 30 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
If he does you can give him instructions as usual. It is a good idea to let the pilot acknowledge each of the instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, Acknowledge all further instructions by Squawking Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Inform the other controllers involved of the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot is not able to hear you, he will continue his flight according to his flightplan until he reaches his clearance limit. There he will enter the associated holding pattern, stay there 5 minutes and then conduct the approach to the active runway. In this case keep the other aircraft out of his way and again inform the other controllers involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Positions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Weather Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Special Requests&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_I_APP (118.520) and LOVV_I_CTR (124.400) are the FIS/FIC Positions within Austrian airspace. They are responsible for the VFR Flights. They allocate Squawks, provide Traffic Information and offer Weather Information (worldwide) and coordinate with other controllers requests from pilots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2617</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Radar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2617"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:56:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* The Delay Vector */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
==Airspace Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Austrian Airspace is structured into four different Types of Airspace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class C:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other and from flights operating under VFR. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of other VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class D:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are given traffic information in respect of VFR flights. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of all other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class E:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are subject to ATC clearance. Flights under VFR are not subject to ATC clearance. As far as is practical, traffic information is given to all flights in respect of VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class G:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR or VFR. ATC separation is not provided. Traffic Information may be given as far as is practical in respect of other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classes C-E are referred to as controlled airspace. Class G is uncontrolled airspace. Controlled Airspace is shared between different ATC-Units (TWR, APP, CTR) and within these units they can be split further into different sectors.&lt;br /&gt;
==Responsibilities==&lt;br /&gt;
Each Radar Controller has an area of responsibility which may consist of one or more sectors. He has to maintain the required seperation between aircraft within his sector and ensures the expeditious flow of traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Minimum Radar Separation==&lt;br /&gt;
A Controller has to make sure that two Aircraft which are under his control never get closer than the minimum radar seperation. If two aircraft get closer than that, this incident is called a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
*The standard &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Vertical Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; is 1000 ft up to FL290 and 2000 ft above that. However Austria is considered RVSM (Reduced Vertical Seperation Minima) airspace so the upper limit of the 1000 ft seperation minimum is raised to FL410. In real life this demands special equipment of the aircraft involved, however on VATSIM all aircraft are considered RVSM capable.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Horizontal Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; depends on the radar equipment involved. APP Sectors work with a minimum of 3 nm, CTR Sectors use 5 nm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some cases where these minima may be under-run such as visual seperation or formation flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MRVA, MSA, MOCA==&lt;br /&gt;
MRVA (Minimum Radar Vectoring Altitude): The MRVA is defined as the lowest available altitude above   Mean Sea Level (MSL) in controlled airspace under consideration of the MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude) above ground and the airspace structure within a specified area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude): Minimum Sector Altitude is the minimum altitude that may be used under emergency conditions which will provide a minimum clearance of 1000ft above obstacles and terrain contained within a sector of 25 NM radius centred on a radio navigational aid. MSA can be given as areas between radials from a VOR at the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MOCA (Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitude): This is the lowest altitude that an aircraft can fly in IMC (Instrument Meteorological Conditions) and still keep safe clearance from terrain and obstacles. MOCA is often lower then MEA (se below). It is only used in emergencies, especially to get below icing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Structure of Flightplans and Routings==&lt;br /&gt;
A route consist of one or more points connected by eithe airways or directs (DCT).&lt;br /&gt;
 SITNI UL856 BAGSI Q114 RTT&lt;br /&gt;
In this case SITNI is the first point of the Route, thereafter it follows the airway UL856 to BAGSI and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
===SIDs===&lt;br /&gt;
SID (Standard Instrument Departure): It is a pre-defined route which aircrafts have to fly to get to their initial airway to follow their desired routing to their destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g.: Flightplan from LOWW (Wien) to Salzburg (LOWS): SITNI L856 SBG DCT - SITNI is our first waypoint of our routing and let us say for instance that in Vienna Runway 29 is in use. We take a look at our charts and we see that we can plan for a socalled SITNI4C departure route.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIDs are specified by the local Air Traffic Control. A SID can contain the following navigation aids: R-NAV Waypoints, VORs, NDBs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===STARs===&lt;br /&gt;
STARs (Standart Terminal Arrival Routes): STARs are pre-defined routes to get an aircraft to the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A STAR falls into three parts namely navigational point, version number and runway (depending on the airport), e.g. GAMLI4W arrival. The point at which the STAR ends is called Initial Approach Fix (IAF). In some cases the STARs continue and end at the Final Approach Fix (FAF), and that means that you as controller don't need to vector the aircraft unless there is other traffic in the way. The only thing you have to do is to instruct the pilot how to descend the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are exceptions of course, where the STARs don't end at the final, but at a navigational point some distance away from the runway. You as a controller must give vectors the last part to the runway. If you for some reason don’t give vectors, the pilot must enter holding at the STAR's ending point (clearance limit).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types of Instrument Approaches===&lt;br /&gt;
An '''instrument approach''' or '''instrument approach procedure (IAP)''' is a type of air navigation that allows pilots to land an aircraft in reduced visibility (Instrument Meteorological Conditions [IMC]) or to reach visual conditions permitting a visual landing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) '''Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - ILS (Instrument Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - MLS (Microwave Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - PAR (Precision Approach Radar)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - LAAS (Ground Based Augmentation System [GBAS] for Global Satellite Navigation Systems [GNSS])&lt;br /&gt;
 - JPALS (Joint Precision Approach and Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GCA (Ground Controlled Approach)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) '''Non-Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer&lt;br /&gt;
 - VOR&lt;br /&gt;
 - NDB (with ADF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Simplified Directional Facility (SDF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - TACAN&lt;br /&gt;
 - Surveillance Radar Approach (SRA) [also known in some countries as ASR approach]&lt;br /&gt;
 - Visual&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Vectoring===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of vectoring:&lt;br /&gt;
* Lateral Vectoring &lt;br /&gt;
* Vertical Vectoring&lt;br /&gt;
====Lateral Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, turn left heading 165°&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, turn right heading 300°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When issuing a heading to an aircraft, make sure that you are using a direction ending on 0 (zero) or on 5 (five).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you provide Radar Vectors to an aircraft then always tell the pilot the reason why you are doing this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123 turn right heading 080°, radar vectors for ILS approach RWY 11&lt;br /&gt;
After vectoring an aircraft you might have to send the aircraft back on its flight planned route:&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, proceed direct to SITNI&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to know, that as soon as you take an aircraft of a publsihed route, either by vectoring or by using a direct, you are also responsible for the necessary terrain clearance. To do this always consider the MRVA on the aircrafts path.&lt;br /&gt;
====Vertical Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, climb FL240&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, descend Altitude 3000 feet, QNH 1016&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see there are 2 types of heights namely Altitude and Flightlevel (FL).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flightlevel''' is used for aircraft flying above the Transition Altitude, Transition Level or climbing through and above the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to Standard Pressure [1013 QNE]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Altitude''' is used for aircraft flying below the Transition Altitude or for Aircraft descending through and below the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to local QNH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
A controller may issue speed instructions within an aircrafts operating limits. There are two possible ways to do this, either by using Indicated Airspeed (FL280 or below) or by specifying a Mach number (FL280 or above).&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, maintain speed 280 knots&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF456, maintain Mach 0.81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Seperation and Sequencing Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
===Planning===&lt;br /&gt;
To effectively use the sequencing techniques explained below we first have to assess the current situation.&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current seperation====&lt;br /&gt;
In VRC and ES there are tools available to determine the seperation between aircraft. One of them is the Seperation Predictor. It is a very comfortable way to determine the point where two aircraft, given a constant speed, will be closest to each other. Furthermore it gives you the minimum distance and the time to go to this point.&lt;br /&gt;
To constantly survey the distance between to aircraft (or between an aircraft and a point) you can use seperation links (or anchors).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These tools give you an overview over the lateral situation. The vertical situations is a bit more complicated since you have to use a bit of math. If you have two converging aircraft who are not at a constant altitude you need their rate of climb/descend to determine the spacing at their closest point.&lt;br /&gt;
 APP: AUA265, report rate of climb.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA265:rate of climb 2500 feet per minute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current spacing====&lt;br /&gt;
Often procedures in a sector include a so called &amp;quot;miles-in-trail&amp;quot; requirement. This means that aircraft flying over the same point and for example have a common destination need to cross the point in a certain distance. Also when working as an approach controller we need to know how close two aircraft will be on approach. How can we determine the current spacing?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First we need to choose a merging point. In a miles in trail requirement this would typically be the handoff point. In the approach area that could be a point somewhere on the approach (e.g. 12 nm final or the point of base turn). Now we can measure the distance of both aircraft to the merging point. If both aircraft have the same speed and are routing direct to the merging point you directly get the spacing at this point. However if differnet speeds are involved things get more complicated. In this case there is no easy and fast way to determine the spacing at the merging point.&lt;br /&gt;
You will have to use your experience to judge these situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you can use this technique to determine the spacing between multiple aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
===The concept of positive seperation===&lt;br /&gt;
Imagine you are the controller in a sector when suddenly the radio communication with your pilots does not work anymore. Take this assumption as the basis of the positive seperation concept. It is policy to always keep aircraft guaranteed safe to each other. This means as soon as you recognize a possible conflict, imeediately resolve it. It's never a good idea to say to yourself &amp;quot;I'll get back to it later&amp;quot; because you might forget it, the voice channel might be blocked and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the dense approach airspace this is often not easy but it will save you a lot of nerves if you keep converging traffic on different levels!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Resolving conflicts===&lt;br /&gt;
There are multple ways of resolving a conflict. You can alter the aircrafts flight path, altitude or speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts altitude to resolve a conflict is relatively easy. Just make sure you achieve the necessary seperation when the two aircraft meet. In the cruise phase you have to keep in mind the aircrafts performance. Often aircraft can't climb higher due to their weight, so don't be surprised if the pilot rejects the altitude change. Also have a look at the aircrafts further intentions. For example it is often not a good idea to put an aircraft that has to descend in a short time anyway on top of another one.&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots prefer to stay at their cruising altitude however in certain situations (e.g. one aircraft overtaking another one) don't hesitate to change the cruise level in accordance with the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speed restrictions for seperation are also possible but mostly you should use them to maintain the present seperation. However in congested airspace where other means of seperation are not possible (e.g. due to terrain) you can also use speeds to achieve a certain seperation. Bear in mind that especially during cruise flight an aircrafts speed margin might not be very large.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts flight path to achieve a safe situation is often the best way. Consider the following basic situation:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Two aircraft are flying to the same point at the same altitude. If they keep on flying they will meet each other exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To resolve the conflict you have to change the heading of one of the aircraft. You will soon discover that the best possibility is to turn one aircraft behind the other one. The earlier you start such a maneuver the smaller the heading change has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spacing techniques===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways of achieving a certain seperation: Modifying an aircrafts speed or it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
====The Delay Vector====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Your working a sector which has an exit agreement that requires you to put aircraft ten miles in trail. This means the distance between two aircraft exiting your sector with the same destination has to be ten nautical miles. In this sector multiple streams of traffic are merged into one and leave your area via an intersection called TEMTA. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
First thing you'll have to do is to determine their current spacing using the techniques discussed above. By doing this we get a spacing of 5 nm, so we have to do something. We don't want to change their speed so what else can we do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What we will do is lengthen the way of one of the aircrafts and shorten the other ones as far as possible. If possible put the first aircraft on a direct to the merging point. Sometimes this is already enough to gain some miles but in this case we put the second aircraft on a so called delay vector. This means we turn the aircraft away from the direct route to lengthen it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AUA91, proceed direct TEMTA, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA91: Proceeding direct TEMTA, maintaining 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AFR291, for seperation turn right heading 130, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: turning right heading 130, maintaining speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
To be sure we assigned a common speed and we also gave a short hint to the pilot about the cause for the vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we have to constantly assess the spacing between these two aircraft. As soon as we achieved our required spacing we put the Air France back on it's route.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR: AFR291, proceed direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: proceeding direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case we used a delay vector of about 40 degrees. You will learn by experience how big this delay vector has to be, however as before, the earlier you start the maneuver the smaller it has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
It is often also necessary to use speed restrictions to achieve or maintain a certain spacing. In these cases IAS should be used below FL 240 and Mach in the regions above. Especially in cruise flight most aircraft have a small speed margin, so the effect of speed control is limited. Often speed control is used additionally to putting the aircraft onto a delay vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircrews are expected to maintain instructed speeds as accurately as possible (+ / - 10knts). In case of unability to maintain instructed speed (weather reasons, operating limitations etc.) the controller has to be informed immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Holding===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Useage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The primary use of a holding is delaying aircraft that have arrived over their destination but cannot land yet because of traffic congestion, poor weather, or unavailability of the runway.  Several aircraft may fly the same holding pattern at the same time, separated vertically by 1,000 feet or more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''How does it look like'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding is situated around a holding fix. In a standard holding pattern the aircraft flies inbound to the holding fix on a certain course (Inbound leg). After passing the fix it turns right (standard turn: 2° per second) and flies one minute (1,5 min above FL 140) into the other direction (outbound leg). After one minute the pilot turns right again (standard turn) and establishes again on the inbound leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you count all this together you end up with four minutes required to finish one holding pattern. However some holding patterns use left turns, others don't use one minute to measure the outbound leg, but fly to a certain distance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also every holding has a minimum altitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flying a Hold'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Most aircraft have a specific holding speed published by the manufacturer.Maximum holding speeds are established in order to keep aircraft within the protected holding area during their one-minute inbound and outbound legs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a rule of thumb the Speed to be flown depends on the altitude or flight level the aircraft is at within the hold as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * At 6,000' MSL and below: 200 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * From 6,001' to FL 140: 230 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * At and above FL140: 265 knots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Duration'''&lt;br /&gt;
A Complete hold should take:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and below 4 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and above 5 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Holding Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding clearance issued by ATC includes at least:&lt;br /&gt;
 - A clearance to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The direction to hold from the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - A specified radial, course, or inbound track.&lt;br /&gt;
 - If DME is used, the DME distances at which the fix end and outbound end turns are to be&lt;br /&gt;
   commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The altitude or FL to be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to expect further clearance or an approach clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to leave the fix in the event of a communications failure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the right&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the left&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Course: The course flown on the inbound leg to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Inbound Leg: The standard 1 or 1.5 minute leg to the holding fix as Published&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Fix: This can be a VOR, a VORDME, an Intersection or an NDB&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Turn: A standard rate, 180 degrees turn which is begun at the holding Fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Abeam: The position opposite the holding fix, where the outbound begins.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Leg: This leg is defined by the inbound leg, pilots should adjust the outbound leg&lt;br /&gt;
      so that the inbound turn, the other standard 180° turn is completed just as the holding&lt;br /&gt;
      course is intercepted.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Side: The side of the course where the hold is accomplished.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Holding Side: The side of the course where you do not want the pilot to be holding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Non Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A non-standard holding pattern is one in which&lt;br /&gt;
 - The fix end and outbound end turns are to the left; and/or&lt;br /&gt;
 - The planned time along the inbound track is other than the standard one-minute or&lt;br /&gt;
   one-and-a-half minute leg appropriate for the altitude flown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Entry Holding Procedure'''&lt;br /&gt;
**Direct Entry (aircraft flies directly to the holding fix, and immediately begins the first turn outbound)&lt;br /&gt;
**Parallel Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, parallels the inbound course for one minute outbound, and then turns back, flies directly to the fix, and proceeds in the hold from there&lt;br /&gt;
**Teardrop Entry or Offset Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, turns into the protected area, flies for one minute, and then turns back inbound, proceeds to the fix and continues from there).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Coordination with adjacent Sectors==&lt;br /&gt;
The coordination respectively the communication between controllers (and of course pilots) is on of the most important things in aviation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A clear instruction to the person I want to speak to falls into 4 parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Who am I calling&lt;br /&gt;
 - What do I want&lt;br /&gt;
 - How are we going to archieve this (short and clear instructions!) &lt;br /&gt;
 - Did the person I called unterstand my instruction properly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Handoff===&lt;br /&gt;
At some point you'll have to send the pilot on to the next controller. With a Tower this is relatively easy: Just drop the track and send him onto the Tower frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However between Radar controllers a more sophisticated system is used.&lt;br /&gt;
A Handoff consists of two stages:&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Communication.&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Control====&lt;br /&gt;
The first part is done by sending a handoff request to the next controller. You may only do this if the plane is safe and will remain safe within your sector at all time. So initiate the handoff if you don't need him anymore, but not before that.&lt;br /&gt;
The other controller accepts the handoff. Again he only does this if he can really accept the traffic without creating a conflict. If that's not possible the two of you will have to work out a different solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the next controller rejects the handoff, the aircraft is not allowed to enter his sector and it is your responsibility to ensure it doesn't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;You are responsible for everything that happens in your sector.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' And you are not allowed to do anything in somebody else's if it is not stated in your sectors Letters of Agreement or without his permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the handoff is accepted, transfer of control is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Communication====&lt;br /&gt;
This is easy, just send him on the next frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Release===&lt;br /&gt;
Some times it comes in handy to change an aircrafts direction, altitude or speed while he is still in the previous sector. In this case you can coordinate with the controller responsible that you change one of these things early. This is called a release and often the phrase:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Released for ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
is used.&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Traffic==&lt;br /&gt;
===Flight Information Positions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flight Information Service (FIS) is an air traffic facility that provides a myriad of services to the pilot, such as pilot briefings, relaying of clearances and broadcasting of weather information.&lt;br /&gt;
At selected locations, FIS also provides en-route Flight Advisory Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Abnormal Situations - Emergencies, Radio Failures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Emergencies===&lt;br /&gt;
Emergencies are very uncomfortable situations for every controller. Emergencies shall be handeled expeditiously to get them safe down to the ground.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot tells the ATC what his intentions are and what he will do next and not the other way round. ATC keeps all the traffic in the vicinity of the emergency aircraft away to assure  that no other aircraft gets injured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Radio Failures===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to recognize a radio failure. Either you call the aircraft and don't get an answer or the pilot notices the failure and sets Squawk 7600. In the second case you will get an indication on your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First thing to do, is to find out if the pilot can still hear you:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read Squawk Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 or&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read turn right by 30° for 30 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
If he does you can give him instructions as usual. It is a good idea to let the pilot acknowledge each of the instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, Acknowledge all further instructions by Squawking Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Inform the other controllers involved of the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot is not able to hear you, he will continue his flight according to his flightplan until he reaches his clearance limit. There he will enter the associated holding pattern, stay there 5 minutes and then conduct the approach to the active runway. In this case keep the other aircraft out of his way and again inform the other controllers involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Positions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Weather Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Special Requests&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_I_APP (118.520) and LOVV_I_CTR (124.400) are the FIS/FIC Positions within Austrian airspace. They are responsible for the VFR Flights. They allocate Squawks, provide Traffic Information and offer Weather Information (worldwide) and coordinate with other controllers requests from pilots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2616</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Radar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2616"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:55:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Radio Failures */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
==Airspace Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Austrian Airspace is structured into four different Types of Airspace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class C:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other and from flights operating under VFR. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of other VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class D:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are given traffic information in respect of VFR flights. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of all other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class E:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are subject to ATC clearance. Flights under VFR are not subject to ATC clearance. As far as is practical, traffic information is given to all flights in respect of VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class G:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR or VFR. ATC separation is not provided. Traffic Information may be given as far as is practical in respect of other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classes C-E are referred to as controlled airspace. Class G is uncontrolled airspace. Controlled Airspace is shared between different ATC-Units (TWR, APP, CTR) and within these units they can be split further into different sectors.&lt;br /&gt;
==Responsibilities==&lt;br /&gt;
Each Radar Controller has an area of responsibility which may consist of one or more sectors. He has to maintain the required seperation between aircraft within his sector and ensures the expeditious flow of traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Minimum Radar Separation==&lt;br /&gt;
A Controller has to make sure that two Aircraft which are under his control never get closer than the minimum radar seperation. If two aircraft get closer than that, this incident is called a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
*The standard &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Vertical Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; is 1000 ft up to FL290 and 2000 ft above that. However Austria is considered RVSM (Reduced Vertical Seperation Minima) airspace so the upper limit of the 1000 ft seperation minimum is raised to FL410. In real life this demands special equipment of the aircraft involved, however on VATSIM all aircraft are considered RVSM capable.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Horizontal Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; depends on the radar equipment involved. APP Sectors work with a minimum of 3 nm, CTR Sectors use 5 nm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some cases where these minima may be under-run such as visual seperation or formation flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MRVA, MSA, MOCA==&lt;br /&gt;
MRVA (Minimum Radar Vectoring Altitude): The MRVA is defined as the lowest available altitude above   Mean Sea Level (MSL) in controlled airspace under consideration of the MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude) above ground and the airspace structure within a specified area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude): Minimum Sector Altitude is the minimum altitude that may be used under emergency conditions which will provide a minimum clearance of 1000ft above obstacles and terrain contained within a sector of 25 NM radius centred on a radio navigational aid. MSA can be given as areas between radials from a VOR at the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MOCA (Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitude): This is the lowest altitude that an aircraft can fly in IMC (Instrument Meteorological Conditions) and still keep safe clearance from terrain and obstacles. MOCA is often lower then MEA (se below). It is only used in emergencies, especially to get below icing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Structure of Flightplans and Routings==&lt;br /&gt;
A route consist of one or more points connected by eithe airways or directs (DCT).&lt;br /&gt;
 SITNI UL856 BAGSI Q114 RTT&lt;br /&gt;
In this case SITNI is the first point of the Route, thereafter it follows the airway UL856 to BAGSI and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
===SIDs===&lt;br /&gt;
SID (Standard Instrument Departure): It is a pre-defined route which aircrafts have to fly to get to their initial airway to follow their desired routing to their destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g.: Flightplan from LOWW (Wien) to Salzburg (LOWS): SITNI L856 SBG DCT - SITNI is our first waypoint of our routing and let us say for instance that in Vienna Runway 29 is in use. We take a look at our charts and we see that we can plan for a socalled SITNI4C departure route.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIDs are specified by the local Air Traffic Control. A SID can contain the following navigation aids: R-NAV Waypoints, VORs, NDBs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===STARs===&lt;br /&gt;
STARs (Standart Terminal Arrival Routes): STARs are pre-defined routes to get an aircraft to the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A STAR falls into three parts namely navigational point, version number and runway (depending on the airport), e.g. GAMLI4W arrival. The point at which the STAR ends is called Initial Approach Fix (IAF). In some cases the STARs continue and end at the Final Approach Fix (FAF), and that means that you as controller don't need to vector the aircraft unless there is other traffic in the way. The only thing you have to do is to instruct the pilot how to descend the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are exceptions of course, where the STARs don't end at the final, but at a navigational point some distance away from the runway. You as a controller must give vectors the last part to the runway. If you for some reason don’t give vectors, the pilot must enter holding at the STAR's ending point (clearance limit).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types of Instrument Approaches===&lt;br /&gt;
An '''instrument approach''' or '''instrument approach procedure (IAP)''' is a type of air navigation that allows pilots to land an aircraft in reduced visibility (Instrument Meteorological Conditions [IMC]) or to reach visual conditions permitting a visual landing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) '''Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - ILS (Instrument Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - MLS (Microwave Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - PAR (Precision Approach Radar)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - LAAS (Ground Based Augmentation System [GBAS] for Global Satellite Navigation Systems [GNSS])&lt;br /&gt;
 - JPALS (Joint Precision Approach and Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GCA (Ground Controlled Approach)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) '''Non-Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer&lt;br /&gt;
 - VOR&lt;br /&gt;
 - NDB (with ADF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Simplified Directional Facility (SDF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - TACAN&lt;br /&gt;
 - Surveillance Radar Approach (SRA) [also known in some countries as ASR approach]&lt;br /&gt;
 - Visual&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Vectoring===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of vectoring:&lt;br /&gt;
* Lateral Vectoring &lt;br /&gt;
* Vertical Vectoring&lt;br /&gt;
====Lateral Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, turn left heading 165°&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, turn right heading 300°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When issuing a heading to an aircraft, make sure that you are using a direction ending on 0 (zero) or on 5 (five).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you provide Radar Vectors to an aircraft then always tell the pilot the reason why you are doing this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123 turn right heading 080°, radar vectors for ILS approach RWY 11&lt;br /&gt;
After vectoring an aircraft you might have to send the aircraft back on its flight planned route:&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, proceed direct to SITNI&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to know, that as soon as you take an aircraft of a publsihed route, either by vectoring or by using a direct, you are also responsible for the necessary terrain clearance. To do this always consider the MRVA on the aircrafts path.&lt;br /&gt;
====Vertical Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, climb FL240&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, descend Altitude 3000 feet, QNH 1016&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see there are 2 types of heights namely Altitude and Flightlevel (FL).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flightlevel''' is used for aircraft flying above the Transition Altitude, Transition Level or climbing through and above the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to Standard Pressure [1013 QNE]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Altitude''' is used for aircraft flying below the Transition Altitude or for Aircraft descending through and below the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to local QNH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
A controller may issue speed instructions within an aircrafts operating limits. There are two possible ways to do this, either by using Indicated Airspeed (FL280 or below) or by specifying a Mach number (FL280 or above).&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, maintain speed 280 knots&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF456, maintain Mach 0.81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Seperation and Sequencing Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
===Planning===&lt;br /&gt;
To effectively use the sequencing techniques explained below we first have to assess the current situation.&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current seperation====&lt;br /&gt;
In VRC and ES there are tools available to determine the seperation between aircraft. One of them is the Seperation Predictor. It is a very comfortable way to determine the point where two aircraft, given a constant speed, will be closest to each other. Furthermore it gives you the minimum distance and the time to go to this point.&lt;br /&gt;
To constantly survey the distance between to aircraft (or between an aircraft and a point) you can use seperation links (or anchors).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These tools give you an overview over the lateral situation. The vertical situations is a bit more complicated since you have to use a bit of math. If you have two converging aircraft who are not at a constant altitude you need their rate of climb/descend to determine the spacing at their closest point.&lt;br /&gt;
 APP: AUA265, report rate of climb.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA265:rate of climb 2500 feet per minute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current spacing====&lt;br /&gt;
Often procedures in a sector include a so called &amp;quot;miles-in-trail&amp;quot; requirement. This means that aircraft flying over the same point and for example have a common destination need to cross the point in a certain distance. Also when working as an approach controller we need to know how close two aircraft will be on approach. How can we determine the current spacing?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First we need to choose a merging point. In a miles in trail requirement this would typically be the handoff point. In the approach area that could be a point somewhere on the approach (e.g. 12 nm final or the point of base turn). Now we can measure the distance of both aircraft to the merging point. If both aircraft have the same speed and are routing direct to the merging point you directly get the spacing at this point. However if differnet speeds are involved things get more complicated. In this case there is no easy and fast way to determine the spacing at the merging point.&lt;br /&gt;
You will have to use your experience to judge these situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you can use this technique to determine the spacing between multiple aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
===The concept of positive seperation===&lt;br /&gt;
Imagine you are the controller in a sector when suddenly the radio communication with your pilots does not work anymore. Take this assumption as the basis of the positive seperation concept. It is policy to always keep aircraft guaranteed safe to each other. This means as soon as you recognize a possible conflict, imeediately resolve it. It's never a good idea to say to yourself &amp;quot;I'll get back to it later&amp;quot; because you might forget it, the voice channel might be blocked and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the dense approach airspace this is often not easy but it will save you a lot of nerves if you keep converging traffic on different levels!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Resolving conflicts===&lt;br /&gt;
There are multple ways of resolving a conflict. You can alter the aircrafts flight path, altitude or speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts altitude to resolve a conflict is relatively easy. Just make sure you achieve the necessary seperation when the two aircraft meet. In the cruise phase you have to keep in mind the aircrafts performance. Often aircraft can't climb higher due to their weight, so don't be surprised if the pilot rejects the altitude change. Also have a look at the aircrafts further intentions. For example it is often not a good idea to put an aircraft that has to descend in a short time anyway on top of another one.&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots prefer to stay at their cruising altitude however in certain situations (e.g. one aircraft overtaking another one) don't hesitate to change the cruise level in accordance with the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speed restrictions for seperation are also possible but mostly you should use them to maintain the present seperation. However in congested airspace where other means of seperation are not possible (e.g. due to terrain) you can also use speeds to achieve a certain seperation. Bear in mind that especially during cruise flight an aircrafts speed margin might not be very large.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts flight path to achieve a safe situation is often the best way. Consider the following basic situation:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Two aircraft are flying to the same point at the same altitude. If they keep on flying they will meet each other exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To resolve the conflict you have to change the heading of one of the aircraft. You will soon discover that the best possibility is to turn one aircraft behind the other one. The earlier you start such a maneuver the smaller the heading change has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spacing techniques===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways of achieving a certain seperation: Modifying an aircrafts speed or it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
====The Delay Vector====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Your working a sector which has an exit agreement that requires you to put aircraft ten miles in trail. This means the distance between two aircraft exiting your sector with the same destination has to be ten nautical miles. In this sector multiple streams of traffic are merged into one and leave your area via an intersection called TEMTA. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
First thing you'll have to do is to determine their current spacing using the techniques discussed above. By doing this we get a spacing of 5 nm, so we have to do something. We don't want to change their speed so what else can we do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What we will do is lengthen the way of one of the aircrafts and shorten the other ones as far as possible. If possible put the first aircraft on a direct to the merging point. Sometimes this is already enough to gain some miles but in this case we put the second aircraft on a so called delay vector. This means we turn the aircraft away from the direct route to lengthen it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AUA91, proceed direct TEMTA, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA91: Proceeding direct TEMTA, maintaining 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AFR291, for seperation turn right heading 130, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: turning right heading 130, maintaining speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
To be sure we assigned a common speed and we also gave a short hint to the pilot about the cause for the vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we have to constantly assess the spacing between these two aircraft. As soon as we achieved our required spacing we put the Air France back on it's route.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AFR291, proceed direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: proceeding direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case we used a delay vector of about 40 degrees. You will learn by experience how big this delay vector has to be, however as before, the earlier you start the maneuver the smaller it has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
It is often also necessary to use speed restrictions to achieve or maintain a certain spacing. In these cases IAS should be used below FL 240 and Mach in the regions above. Especially in cruise flight most aircraft have a small speed margin, so the effect of speed control is limited. Often speed control is used additionally to putting the aircraft onto a delay vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircrews are expected to maintain instructed speeds as accurately as possible (+ / - 10knts). In case of unability to maintain instructed speed (weather reasons, operating limitations etc.) the controller has to be informed immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Holding===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Useage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The primary use of a holding is delaying aircraft that have arrived over their destination but cannot land yet because of traffic congestion, poor weather, or unavailability of the runway.  Several aircraft may fly the same holding pattern at the same time, separated vertically by 1,000 feet or more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''How does it look like'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding is situated around a holding fix. In a standard holding pattern the aircraft flies inbound to the holding fix on a certain course (Inbound leg). After passing the fix it turns right (standard turn: 2° per second) and flies one minute (1,5 min above FL 140) into the other direction (outbound leg). After one minute the pilot turns right again (standard turn) and establishes again on the inbound leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you count all this together you end up with four minutes required to finish one holding pattern. However some holding patterns use left turns, others don't use one minute to measure the outbound leg, but fly to a certain distance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also every holding has a minimum altitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flying a Hold'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Most aircraft have a specific holding speed published by the manufacturer.Maximum holding speeds are established in order to keep aircraft within the protected holding area during their one-minute inbound and outbound legs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a rule of thumb the Speed to be flown depends on the altitude or flight level the aircraft is at within the hold as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * At 6,000' MSL and below: 200 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * From 6,001' to FL 140: 230 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * At and above FL140: 265 knots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Duration'''&lt;br /&gt;
A Complete hold should take:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and below 4 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and above 5 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Holding Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding clearance issued by ATC includes at least:&lt;br /&gt;
 - A clearance to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The direction to hold from the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - A specified radial, course, or inbound track.&lt;br /&gt;
 - If DME is used, the DME distances at which the fix end and outbound end turns are to be&lt;br /&gt;
   commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The altitude or FL to be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to expect further clearance or an approach clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to leave the fix in the event of a communications failure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the right&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the left&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Course: The course flown on the inbound leg to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Inbound Leg: The standard 1 or 1.5 minute leg to the holding fix as Published&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Fix: This can be a VOR, a VORDME, an Intersection or an NDB&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Turn: A standard rate, 180 degrees turn which is begun at the holding Fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Abeam: The position opposite the holding fix, where the outbound begins.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Leg: This leg is defined by the inbound leg, pilots should adjust the outbound leg&lt;br /&gt;
      so that the inbound turn, the other standard 180° turn is completed just as the holding&lt;br /&gt;
      course is intercepted.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Side: The side of the course where the hold is accomplished.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Holding Side: The side of the course where you do not want the pilot to be holding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Non Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A non-standard holding pattern is one in which&lt;br /&gt;
 - The fix end and outbound end turns are to the left; and/or&lt;br /&gt;
 - The planned time along the inbound track is other than the standard one-minute or&lt;br /&gt;
   one-and-a-half minute leg appropriate for the altitude flown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Entry Holding Procedure'''&lt;br /&gt;
**Direct Entry (aircraft flies directly to the holding fix, and immediately begins the first turn outbound)&lt;br /&gt;
**Parallel Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, parallels the inbound course for one minute outbound, and then turns back, flies directly to the fix, and proceeds in the hold from there&lt;br /&gt;
**Teardrop Entry or Offset Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, turns into the protected area, flies for one minute, and then turns back inbound, proceeds to the fix and continues from there).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Coordination with adjacent Sectors==&lt;br /&gt;
The coordination respectively the communication between controllers (and of course pilots) is on of the most important things in aviation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A clear instruction to the person I want to speak to falls into 4 parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Who am I calling&lt;br /&gt;
 - What do I want&lt;br /&gt;
 - How are we going to archieve this (short and clear instructions!) &lt;br /&gt;
 - Did the person I called unterstand my instruction properly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Handoff===&lt;br /&gt;
At some point you'll have to send the pilot on to the next controller. With a Tower this is relatively easy: Just drop the track and send him onto the Tower frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However between Radar controllers a more sophisticated system is used.&lt;br /&gt;
A Handoff consists of two stages:&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Communication.&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Control====&lt;br /&gt;
The first part is done by sending a handoff request to the next controller. You may only do this if the plane is safe and will remain safe within your sector at all time. So initiate the handoff if you don't need him anymore, but not before that.&lt;br /&gt;
The other controller accepts the handoff. Again he only does this if he can really accept the traffic without creating a conflict. If that's not possible the two of you will have to work out a different solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the next controller rejects the handoff, the aircraft is not allowed to enter his sector and it is your responsibility to ensure it doesn't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;You are responsible for everything that happens in your sector.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' And you are not allowed to do anything in somebody else's if it is not stated in your sectors Letters of Agreement or without his permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the handoff is accepted, transfer of control is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Communication====&lt;br /&gt;
This is easy, just send him on the next frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Release===&lt;br /&gt;
Some times it comes in handy to change an aircrafts direction, altitude or speed while he is still in the previous sector. In this case you can coordinate with the controller responsible that you change one of these things early. This is called a release and often the phrase:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Released for ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
is used.&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Traffic==&lt;br /&gt;
===Flight Information Positions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flight Information Service (FIS) is an air traffic facility that provides a myriad of services to the pilot, such as pilot briefings, relaying of clearances and broadcasting of weather information.&lt;br /&gt;
At selected locations, FIS also provides en-route Flight Advisory Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Abnormal Situations - Emergencies, Radio Failures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Emergencies===&lt;br /&gt;
Emergencies are very uncomfortable situations for every controller. Emergencies shall be handeled expeditiously to get them safe down to the ground.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot tells the ATC what his intentions are and what he will do next and not the other way round. ATC keeps all the traffic in the vicinity of the emergency aircraft away to assure  that no other aircraft gets injured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Radio Failures===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to recognize a radio failure. Either you call the aircraft and don't get an answer or the pilot notices the failure and sets Squawk 7600. In the second case you will get an indication on your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First thing to do, is to find out if the pilot can still hear you:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read Squawk Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 or&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read turn right by 30° for 30 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
If he does you can give him instructions as usual. It is a good idea to let the pilot acknowledge each of the instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, Acknowledge all further instructions by Squawking Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Inform the other controllers involved of the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot is not able to hear you, he will continue his flight according to his flightplan until he reaches his clearance limit. There he will enter the associated holding pattern, stay there 5 minutes and then conduct the approach to the active runway. In this case keep the other aircraft out of his way and again inform the other controllers involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Positions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Weather Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Special Requests&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_I_APP (118.520) and LOVV_I_CTR (124.400) are the FIS/FIC Positions within Austrian airspace. They are responsible for the VFR Flights. They allocate Squawks, provide Traffic Information and offer Weather Information (worldwide) and coordinate with other controllers requests from pilots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2615</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Radar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2615"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:55:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Information Positions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
==Airspace Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Austrian Airspace is structured into four different Types of Airspace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class C:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other and from flights operating under VFR. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of other VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class D:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are given traffic information in respect of VFR flights. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of all other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class E:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are subject to ATC clearance. Flights under VFR are not subject to ATC clearance. As far as is practical, traffic information is given to all flights in respect of VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class G:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR or VFR. ATC separation is not provided. Traffic Information may be given as far as is practical in respect of other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classes C-E are referred to as controlled airspace. Class G is uncontrolled airspace. Controlled Airspace is shared between different ATC-Units (TWR, APP, CTR) and within these units they can be split further into different sectors.&lt;br /&gt;
==Responsibilities==&lt;br /&gt;
Each Radar Controller has an area of responsibility which may consist of one or more sectors. He has to maintain the required seperation between aircraft within his sector and ensures the expeditious flow of traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Minimum Radar Separation==&lt;br /&gt;
A Controller has to make sure that two Aircraft which are under his control never get closer than the minimum radar seperation. If two aircraft get closer than that, this incident is called a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
*The standard &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Vertical Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; is 1000 ft up to FL290 and 2000 ft above that. However Austria is considered RVSM (Reduced Vertical Seperation Minima) airspace so the upper limit of the 1000 ft seperation minimum is raised to FL410. In real life this demands special equipment of the aircraft involved, however on VATSIM all aircraft are considered RVSM capable.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Horizontal Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; depends on the radar equipment involved. APP Sectors work with a minimum of 3 nm, CTR Sectors use 5 nm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some cases where these minima may be under-run such as visual seperation or formation flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MRVA, MSA, MOCA==&lt;br /&gt;
MRVA (Minimum Radar Vectoring Altitude): The MRVA is defined as the lowest available altitude above   Mean Sea Level (MSL) in controlled airspace under consideration of the MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude) above ground and the airspace structure within a specified area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude): Minimum Sector Altitude is the minimum altitude that may be used under emergency conditions which will provide a minimum clearance of 1000ft above obstacles and terrain contained within a sector of 25 NM radius centred on a radio navigational aid. MSA can be given as areas between radials from a VOR at the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MOCA (Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitude): This is the lowest altitude that an aircraft can fly in IMC (Instrument Meteorological Conditions) and still keep safe clearance from terrain and obstacles. MOCA is often lower then MEA (se below). It is only used in emergencies, especially to get below icing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Structure of Flightplans and Routings==&lt;br /&gt;
A route consist of one or more points connected by eithe airways or directs (DCT).&lt;br /&gt;
 SITNI UL856 BAGSI Q114 RTT&lt;br /&gt;
In this case SITNI is the first point of the Route, thereafter it follows the airway UL856 to BAGSI and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
===SIDs===&lt;br /&gt;
SID (Standard Instrument Departure): It is a pre-defined route which aircrafts have to fly to get to their initial airway to follow their desired routing to their destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g.: Flightplan from LOWW (Wien) to Salzburg (LOWS): SITNI L856 SBG DCT - SITNI is our first waypoint of our routing and let us say for instance that in Vienna Runway 29 is in use. We take a look at our charts and we see that we can plan for a socalled SITNI4C departure route.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIDs are specified by the local Air Traffic Control. A SID can contain the following navigation aids: R-NAV Waypoints, VORs, NDBs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===STARs===&lt;br /&gt;
STARs (Standart Terminal Arrival Routes): STARs are pre-defined routes to get an aircraft to the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A STAR falls into three parts namely navigational point, version number and runway (depending on the airport), e.g. GAMLI4W arrival. The point at which the STAR ends is called Initial Approach Fix (IAF). In some cases the STARs continue and end at the Final Approach Fix (FAF), and that means that you as controller don't need to vector the aircraft unless there is other traffic in the way. The only thing you have to do is to instruct the pilot how to descend the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are exceptions of course, where the STARs don't end at the final, but at a navigational point some distance away from the runway. You as a controller must give vectors the last part to the runway. If you for some reason don’t give vectors, the pilot must enter holding at the STAR's ending point (clearance limit).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types of Instrument Approaches===&lt;br /&gt;
An '''instrument approach''' or '''instrument approach procedure (IAP)''' is a type of air navigation that allows pilots to land an aircraft in reduced visibility (Instrument Meteorological Conditions [IMC]) or to reach visual conditions permitting a visual landing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) '''Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - ILS (Instrument Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - MLS (Microwave Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - PAR (Precision Approach Radar)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - LAAS (Ground Based Augmentation System [GBAS] for Global Satellite Navigation Systems [GNSS])&lt;br /&gt;
 - JPALS (Joint Precision Approach and Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GCA (Ground Controlled Approach)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) '''Non-Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer&lt;br /&gt;
 - VOR&lt;br /&gt;
 - NDB (with ADF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Simplified Directional Facility (SDF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - TACAN&lt;br /&gt;
 - Surveillance Radar Approach (SRA) [also known in some countries as ASR approach]&lt;br /&gt;
 - Visual&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Vectoring===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of vectoring:&lt;br /&gt;
* Lateral Vectoring &lt;br /&gt;
* Vertical Vectoring&lt;br /&gt;
====Lateral Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, turn left heading 165°&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, turn right heading 300°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When issuing a heading to an aircraft, make sure that you are using a direction ending on 0 (zero) or on 5 (five).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you provide Radar Vectors to an aircraft then always tell the pilot the reason why you are doing this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123 turn right heading 080°, radar vectors for ILS approach RWY 11&lt;br /&gt;
After vectoring an aircraft you might have to send the aircraft back on its flight planned route:&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, proceed direct to SITNI&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to know, that as soon as you take an aircraft of a publsihed route, either by vectoring or by using a direct, you are also responsible for the necessary terrain clearance. To do this always consider the MRVA on the aircrafts path.&lt;br /&gt;
====Vertical Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, climb FL240&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, descend Altitude 3000 feet, QNH 1016&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see there are 2 types of heights namely Altitude and Flightlevel (FL).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flightlevel''' is used for aircraft flying above the Transition Altitude, Transition Level or climbing through and above the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to Standard Pressure [1013 QNE]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Altitude''' is used for aircraft flying below the Transition Altitude or for Aircraft descending through and below the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to local QNH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
A controller may issue speed instructions within an aircrafts operating limits. There are two possible ways to do this, either by using Indicated Airspeed (FL280 or below) or by specifying a Mach number (FL280 or above).&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, maintain speed 280 knots&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF456, maintain Mach 0.81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Seperation and Sequencing Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
===Planning===&lt;br /&gt;
To effectively use the sequencing techniques explained below we first have to assess the current situation.&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current seperation====&lt;br /&gt;
In VRC and ES there are tools available to determine the seperation between aircraft. One of them is the Seperation Predictor. It is a very comfortable way to determine the point where two aircraft, given a constant speed, will be closest to each other. Furthermore it gives you the minimum distance and the time to go to this point.&lt;br /&gt;
To constantly survey the distance between to aircraft (or between an aircraft and a point) you can use seperation links (or anchors).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These tools give you an overview over the lateral situation. The vertical situations is a bit more complicated since you have to use a bit of math. If you have two converging aircraft who are not at a constant altitude you need their rate of climb/descend to determine the spacing at their closest point.&lt;br /&gt;
 APP: AUA265, report rate of climb.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA265:rate of climb 2500 feet per minute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current spacing====&lt;br /&gt;
Often procedures in a sector include a so called &amp;quot;miles-in-trail&amp;quot; requirement. This means that aircraft flying over the same point and for example have a common destination need to cross the point in a certain distance. Also when working as an approach controller we need to know how close two aircraft will be on approach. How can we determine the current spacing?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First we need to choose a merging point. In a miles in trail requirement this would typically be the handoff point. In the approach area that could be a point somewhere on the approach (e.g. 12 nm final or the point of base turn). Now we can measure the distance of both aircraft to the merging point. If both aircraft have the same speed and are routing direct to the merging point you directly get the spacing at this point. However if differnet speeds are involved things get more complicated. In this case there is no easy and fast way to determine the spacing at the merging point.&lt;br /&gt;
You will have to use your experience to judge these situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you can use this technique to determine the spacing between multiple aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
===The concept of positive seperation===&lt;br /&gt;
Imagine you are the controller in a sector when suddenly the radio communication with your pilots does not work anymore. Take this assumption as the basis of the positive seperation concept. It is policy to always keep aircraft guaranteed safe to each other. This means as soon as you recognize a possible conflict, imeediately resolve it. It's never a good idea to say to yourself &amp;quot;I'll get back to it later&amp;quot; because you might forget it, the voice channel might be blocked and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the dense approach airspace this is often not easy but it will save you a lot of nerves if you keep converging traffic on different levels!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Resolving conflicts===&lt;br /&gt;
There are multple ways of resolving a conflict. You can alter the aircrafts flight path, altitude or speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts altitude to resolve a conflict is relatively easy. Just make sure you achieve the necessary seperation when the two aircraft meet. In the cruise phase you have to keep in mind the aircrafts performance. Often aircraft can't climb higher due to their weight, so don't be surprised if the pilot rejects the altitude change. Also have a look at the aircrafts further intentions. For example it is often not a good idea to put an aircraft that has to descend in a short time anyway on top of another one.&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots prefer to stay at their cruising altitude however in certain situations (e.g. one aircraft overtaking another one) don't hesitate to change the cruise level in accordance with the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speed restrictions for seperation are also possible but mostly you should use them to maintain the present seperation. However in congested airspace where other means of seperation are not possible (e.g. due to terrain) you can also use speeds to achieve a certain seperation. Bear in mind that especially during cruise flight an aircrafts speed margin might not be very large.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts flight path to achieve a safe situation is often the best way. Consider the following basic situation:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Two aircraft are flying to the same point at the same altitude. If they keep on flying they will meet each other exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To resolve the conflict you have to change the heading of one of the aircraft. You will soon discover that the best possibility is to turn one aircraft behind the other one. The earlier you start such a maneuver the smaller the heading change has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spacing techniques===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways of achieving a certain seperation: Modifying an aircrafts speed or it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
====The Delay Vector====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Your working a sector which has an exit agreement that requires you to put aircraft ten miles in trail. This means the distance between two aircraft exiting your sector with the same destination has to be ten nautical miles. In this sector multiple streams of traffic are merged into one and leave your area via an intersection called TEMTA. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
First thing you'll have to do is to determine their current spacing using the techniques discussed above. By doing this we get a spacing of 5 nm, so we have to do something. We don't want to change their speed so what else can we do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What we will do is lengthen the way of one of the aircrafts and shorten the other ones as far as possible. If possible put the first aircraft on a direct to the merging point. Sometimes this is already enough to gain some miles but in this case we put the second aircraft on a so called delay vector. This means we turn the aircraft away from the direct route to lengthen it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AUA91, proceed direct TEMTA, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA91: Proceeding direct TEMTA, maintaining 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AFR291, for seperation turn right heading 130, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: turning right heading 130, maintaining speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
To be sure we assigned a common speed and we also gave a short hint to the pilot about the cause for the vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we have to constantly assess the spacing between these two aircraft. As soon as we achieved our required spacing we put the Air France back on it's route.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AFR291, proceed direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: proceeding direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case we used a delay vector of about 40 degrees. You will learn by experience how big this delay vector has to be, however as before, the earlier you start the maneuver the smaller it has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
It is often also necessary to use speed restrictions to achieve or maintain a certain spacing. In these cases IAS should be used below FL 240 and Mach in the regions above. Especially in cruise flight most aircraft have a small speed margin, so the effect of speed control is limited. Often speed control is used additionally to putting the aircraft onto a delay vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircrews are expected to maintain instructed speeds as accurately as possible (+ / - 10knts). In case of unability to maintain instructed speed (weather reasons, operating limitations etc.) the controller has to be informed immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Holding===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Useage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The primary use of a holding is delaying aircraft that have arrived over their destination but cannot land yet because of traffic congestion, poor weather, or unavailability of the runway.  Several aircraft may fly the same holding pattern at the same time, separated vertically by 1,000 feet or more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''How does it look like'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding is situated around a holding fix. In a standard holding pattern the aircraft flies inbound to the holding fix on a certain course (Inbound leg). After passing the fix it turns right (standard turn: 2° per second) and flies one minute (1,5 min above FL 140) into the other direction (outbound leg). After one minute the pilot turns right again (standard turn) and establishes again on the inbound leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you count all this together you end up with four minutes required to finish one holding pattern. However some holding patterns use left turns, others don't use one minute to measure the outbound leg, but fly to a certain distance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also every holding has a minimum altitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flying a Hold'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Most aircraft have a specific holding speed published by the manufacturer.Maximum holding speeds are established in order to keep aircraft within the protected holding area during their one-minute inbound and outbound legs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a rule of thumb the Speed to be flown depends on the altitude or flight level the aircraft is at within the hold as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * At 6,000' MSL and below: 200 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * From 6,001' to FL 140: 230 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * At and above FL140: 265 knots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Duration'''&lt;br /&gt;
A Complete hold should take:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and below 4 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and above 5 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Holding Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding clearance issued by ATC includes at least:&lt;br /&gt;
 - A clearance to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The direction to hold from the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - A specified radial, course, or inbound track.&lt;br /&gt;
 - If DME is used, the DME distances at which the fix end and outbound end turns are to be&lt;br /&gt;
   commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The altitude or FL to be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to expect further clearance or an approach clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to leave the fix in the event of a communications failure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the right&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the left&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Course: The course flown on the inbound leg to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Inbound Leg: The standard 1 or 1.5 minute leg to the holding fix as Published&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Fix: This can be a VOR, a VORDME, an Intersection or an NDB&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Turn: A standard rate, 180 degrees turn which is begun at the holding Fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Abeam: The position opposite the holding fix, where the outbound begins.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Leg: This leg is defined by the inbound leg, pilots should adjust the outbound leg&lt;br /&gt;
      so that the inbound turn, the other standard 180° turn is completed just as the holding&lt;br /&gt;
      course is intercepted.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Side: The side of the course where the hold is accomplished.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Holding Side: The side of the course where you do not want the pilot to be holding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Non Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A non-standard holding pattern is one in which&lt;br /&gt;
 - The fix end and outbound end turns are to the left; and/or&lt;br /&gt;
 - The planned time along the inbound track is other than the standard one-minute or&lt;br /&gt;
   one-and-a-half minute leg appropriate for the altitude flown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Entry Holding Procedure'''&lt;br /&gt;
**Direct Entry (aircraft flies directly to the holding fix, and immediately begins the first turn outbound)&lt;br /&gt;
**Parallel Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, parallels the inbound course for one minute outbound, and then turns back, flies directly to the fix, and proceeds in the hold from there&lt;br /&gt;
**Teardrop Entry or Offset Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, turns into the protected area, flies for one minute, and then turns back inbound, proceeds to the fix and continues from there).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Coordination with adjacent Sectors==&lt;br /&gt;
The coordination respectively the communication between controllers (and of course pilots) is on of the most important things in aviation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A clear instruction to the person I want to speak to falls into 4 parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Who am I calling&lt;br /&gt;
 - What do I want&lt;br /&gt;
 - How are we going to archieve this (short and clear instructions!) &lt;br /&gt;
 - Did the person I called unterstand my instruction properly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Handoff===&lt;br /&gt;
At some point you'll have to send the pilot on to the next controller. With a Tower this is relatively easy: Just drop the track and send him onto the Tower frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However between Radar controllers a more sophisticated system is used.&lt;br /&gt;
A Handoff consists of two stages:&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Communication.&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Control====&lt;br /&gt;
The first part is done by sending a handoff request to the next controller. You may only do this if the plane is safe and will remain safe within your sector at all time. So initiate the handoff if you don't need him anymore, but not before that.&lt;br /&gt;
The other controller accepts the handoff. Again he only does this if he can really accept the traffic without creating a conflict. If that's not possible the two of you will have to work out a different solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the next controller rejects the handoff, the aircraft is not allowed to enter his sector and it is your responsibility to ensure it doesn't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;You are responsible for everything that happens in your sector.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' And you are not allowed to do anything in somebody else's if it is not stated in your sectors Letters of Agreement or without his permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the handoff is accepted, transfer of control is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Communication====&lt;br /&gt;
This is easy, just send him on the next frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Release===&lt;br /&gt;
Some times it comes in handy to change an aircrafts direction, altitude or speed while he is still in the previous sector. In this case you can coordinate with the controller responsible that you change one of these things early. This is called a release and often the phrase:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Released for ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
is used.&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Traffic==&lt;br /&gt;
===Flight Information Positions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flight Information Service (FIS) is an air traffic facility that provides a myriad of services to the pilot, such as pilot briefings, relaying of clearances and broadcasting of weather information.&lt;br /&gt;
At selected locations, FIS also provides en-route Flight Advisory Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Abnormal Situations - Emergencies, Radio Failures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Emergencies===&lt;br /&gt;
Emergencies are very uncomfortable situations for every controller. Emergencies shall be handeled expeditiously to get them safe down to the ground.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot tells the ATC what his intentions are and what he will do next and not the other way round. ATC keeps all the traffic in the vicinity of the emergency aircraft away to assure  that no other aircraft gets injured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Radio Failures===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to recognize a radio failure. Either you call the aircraft and don't get an answer or the pilot notices the failure and sets Squawk 7600. In the second case you will get an indication on your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First thing to do, is to find out if the pilot can still hear you:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read me Squawk Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 or&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read me turn right by 30° for 30 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
If he does you can give him instructions as usual. It is a good idea to let the pilot acknowledge each of the instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, Acknowledge all further instructions by Squawking Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Inform the other controllers involved of the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot is not able to hear you, he will continue his flight according to his flightplan until he reaches his clearance limit. There he will enter the associated holding pattern, stay there 5 minutes and then conduct the approach to the active runway. In this case keep the other aircraft out of his way and again inform the other controllers involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Positions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Weather Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Special Requests&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_I_APP (118.520) and LOVV_I_CTR (124.400) are the FIS/FIC Positions within Austrian airspace. They are responsible for the VFR Flights. They allocate Squawks, provide Traffic Information and offer Weather Information (worldwide) and coordinate with other controllers requests from pilots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2614</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Radar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2614"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:55:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Information Positions */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
==Airspace Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Austrian Airspace is structured into four different Types of Airspace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class C:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other and from flights operating under VFR. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of other VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class D:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are given traffic information in respect of VFR flights. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of all other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class E:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are subject to ATC clearance. Flights under VFR are not subject to ATC clearance. As far as is practical, traffic information is given to all flights in respect of VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class G:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR or VFR. ATC separation is not provided. Traffic Information may be given as far as is practical in respect of other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classes C-E are referred to as controlled airspace. Class G is uncontrolled airspace. Controlled Airspace is shared between different ATC-Units (TWR, APP, CTR) and within these units they can be split further into different sectors.&lt;br /&gt;
==Responsibilities==&lt;br /&gt;
Each Radar Controller has an area of responsibility which may consist of one or more sectors. He has to maintain the required seperation between aircraft within his sector and ensures the expeditious flow of traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Minimum Radar Separation==&lt;br /&gt;
A Controller has to make sure that two Aircraft which are under his control never get closer than the minimum radar seperation. If two aircraft get closer than that, this incident is called a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
*The standard &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Vertical Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; is 1000 ft up to FL290 and 2000 ft above that. However Austria is considered RVSM (Reduced Vertical Seperation Minima) airspace so the upper limit of the 1000 ft seperation minimum is raised to FL410. In real life this demands special equipment of the aircraft involved, however on VATSIM all aircraft are considered RVSM capable.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Horizontal Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; depends on the radar equipment involved. APP Sectors work with a minimum of 3 nm, CTR Sectors use 5 nm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some cases where these minima may be under-run such as visual seperation or formation flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MRVA, MSA, MOCA==&lt;br /&gt;
MRVA (Minimum Radar Vectoring Altitude): The MRVA is defined as the lowest available altitude above   Mean Sea Level (MSL) in controlled airspace under consideration of the MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude) above ground and the airspace structure within a specified area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude): Minimum Sector Altitude is the minimum altitude that may be used under emergency conditions which will provide a minimum clearance of 1000ft above obstacles and terrain contained within a sector of 25 NM radius centred on a radio navigational aid. MSA can be given as areas between radials from a VOR at the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MOCA (Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitude): This is the lowest altitude that an aircraft can fly in IMC (Instrument Meteorological Conditions) and still keep safe clearance from terrain and obstacles. MOCA is often lower then MEA (se below). It is only used in emergencies, especially to get below icing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Structure of Flightplans and Routings==&lt;br /&gt;
A route consist of one or more points connected by eithe airways or directs (DCT).&lt;br /&gt;
 SITNI UL856 BAGSI Q114 RTT&lt;br /&gt;
In this case SITNI is the first point of the Route, thereafter it follows the airway UL856 to BAGSI and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
===SIDs===&lt;br /&gt;
SID (Standard Instrument Departure): It is a pre-defined route which aircrafts have to fly to get to their initial airway to follow their desired routing to their destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g.: Flightplan from LOWW (Wien) to Salzburg (LOWS): SITNI L856 SBG DCT - SITNI is our first waypoint of our routing and let us say for instance that in Vienna Runway 29 is in use. We take a look at our charts and we see that we can plan for a socalled SITNI4C departure route.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIDs are specified by the local Air Traffic Control. A SID can contain the following navigation aids: R-NAV Waypoints, VORs, NDBs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===STARs===&lt;br /&gt;
STARs (Standart Terminal Arrival Routes): STARs are pre-defined routes to get an aircraft to the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A STAR falls into three parts namely navigational point, version number and runway (depending on the airport), e.g. GAMLI4W arrival. The point at which the STAR ends is called Initial Approach Fix (IAF). In some cases the STARs continue and end at the Final Approach Fix (FAF), and that means that you as controller don't need to vector the aircraft unless there is other traffic in the way. The only thing you have to do is to instruct the pilot how to descend the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are exceptions of course, where the STARs don't end at the final, but at a navigational point some distance away from the runway. You as a controller must give vectors the last part to the runway. If you for some reason don’t give vectors, the pilot must enter holding at the STAR's ending point (clearance limit).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types of Instrument Approaches===&lt;br /&gt;
An '''instrument approach''' or '''instrument approach procedure (IAP)''' is a type of air navigation that allows pilots to land an aircraft in reduced visibility (Instrument Meteorological Conditions [IMC]) or to reach visual conditions permitting a visual landing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) '''Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - ILS (Instrument Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - MLS (Microwave Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - PAR (Precision Approach Radar)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - LAAS (Ground Based Augmentation System [GBAS] for Global Satellite Navigation Systems [GNSS])&lt;br /&gt;
 - JPALS (Joint Precision Approach and Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GCA (Ground Controlled Approach)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) '''Non-Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer&lt;br /&gt;
 - VOR&lt;br /&gt;
 - NDB (with ADF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Simplified Directional Facility (SDF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - TACAN&lt;br /&gt;
 - Surveillance Radar Approach (SRA) [also known in some countries as ASR approach]&lt;br /&gt;
 - Visual&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Vectoring===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of vectoring:&lt;br /&gt;
* Lateral Vectoring &lt;br /&gt;
* Vertical Vectoring&lt;br /&gt;
====Lateral Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, turn left heading 165°&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, turn right heading 300°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When issuing a heading to an aircraft, make sure that you are using a direction ending on 0 (zero) or on 5 (five).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you provide Radar Vectors to an aircraft then always tell the pilot the reason why you are doing this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123 turn right heading 080°, radar vectors for ILS approach RWY 11&lt;br /&gt;
After vectoring an aircraft you might have to send the aircraft back on its flight planned route:&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, proceed direct to SITNI&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to know, that as soon as you take an aircraft of a publsihed route, either by vectoring or by using a direct, you are also responsible for the necessary terrain clearance. To do this always consider the MRVA on the aircrafts path.&lt;br /&gt;
====Vertical Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, climb FL240&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, descend Altitude 3000 feet, QNH 1016&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see there are 2 types of heights namely Altitude and Flightlevel (FL).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flightlevel''' is used for aircraft flying above the Transition Altitude, Transition Level or climbing through and above the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to Standard Pressure [1013 QNE]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Altitude''' is used for aircraft flying below the Transition Altitude or for Aircraft descending through and below the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to local QNH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
A controller may issue speed instructions within an aircrafts operating limits. There are two possible ways to do this, either by using Indicated Airspeed (FL280 or below) or by specifying a Mach number (FL280 or above).&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, maintain speed 280 knots&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF456, maintain Mach 0.81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Seperation and Sequencing Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
===Planning===&lt;br /&gt;
To effectively use the sequencing techniques explained below we first have to assess the current situation.&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current seperation====&lt;br /&gt;
In VRC and ES there are tools available to determine the seperation between aircraft. One of them is the Seperation Predictor. It is a very comfortable way to determine the point where two aircraft, given a constant speed, will be closest to each other. Furthermore it gives you the minimum distance and the time to go to this point.&lt;br /&gt;
To constantly survey the distance between to aircraft (or between an aircraft and a point) you can use seperation links (or anchors).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These tools give you an overview over the lateral situation. The vertical situations is a bit more complicated since you have to use a bit of math. If you have two converging aircraft who are not at a constant altitude you need their rate of climb/descend to determine the spacing at their closest point.&lt;br /&gt;
 APP: AUA265, report rate of climb.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA265:rate of climb 2500 feet per minute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current spacing====&lt;br /&gt;
Often procedures in a sector include a so called &amp;quot;miles-in-trail&amp;quot; requirement. This means that aircraft flying over the same point and for example have a common destination need to cross the point in a certain distance. Also when working as an approach controller we need to know how close two aircraft will be on approach. How can we determine the current spacing?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First we need to choose a merging point. In a miles in trail requirement this would typically be the handoff point. In the approach area that could be a point somewhere on the approach (e.g. 12 nm final or the point of base turn). Now we can measure the distance of both aircraft to the merging point. If both aircraft have the same speed and are routing direct to the merging point you directly get the spacing at this point. However if differnet speeds are involved things get more complicated. In this case there is no easy and fast way to determine the spacing at the merging point.&lt;br /&gt;
You will have to use your experience to judge these situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you can use this technique to determine the spacing between multiple aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
===The concept of positive seperation===&lt;br /&gt;
Imagine you are the controller in a sector when suddenly the radio communication with your pilots does not work anymore. Take this assumption as the basis of the positive seperation concept. It is policy to always keep aircraft guaranteed safe to each other. This means as soon as you recognize a possible conflict, imeediately resolve it. It's never a good idea to say to yourself &amp;quot;I'll get back to it later&amp;quot; because you might forget it, the voice channel might be blocked and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the dense approach airspace this is often not easy but it will save you a lot of nerves if you keep converging traffic on different levels!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Resolving conflicts===&lt;br /&gt;
There are multple ways of resolving a conflict. You can alter the aircrafts flight path, altitude or speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts altitude to resolve a conflict is relatively easy. Just make sure you achieve the necessary seperation when the two aircraft meet. In the cruise phase you have to keep in mind the aircrafts performance. Often aircraft can't climb higher due to their weight, so don't be surprised if the pilot rejects the altitude change. Also have a look at the aircrafts further intentions. For example it is often not a good idea to put an aircraft that has to descend in a short time anyway on top of another one.&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots prefer to stay at their cruising altitude however in certain situations (e.g. one aircraft overtaking another one) don't hesitate to change the cruise level in accordance with the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speed restrictions for seperation are also possible but mostly you should use them to maintain the present seperation. However in congested airspace where other means of seperation are not possible (e.g. due to terrain) you can also use speeds to achieve a certain seperation. Bear in mind that especially during cruise flight an aircrafts speed margin might not be very large.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts flight path to achieve a safe situation is often the best way. Consider the following basic situation:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Two aircraft are flying to the same point at the same altitude. If they keep on flying they will meet each other exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To resolve the conflict you have to change the heading of one of the aircraft. You will soon discover that the best possibility is to turn one aircraft behind the other one. The earlier you start such a maneuver the smaller the heading change has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spacing techniques===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways of achieving a certain seperation: Modifying an aircrafts speed or it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
====The Delay Vector====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Your working a sector which has an exit agreement that requires you to put aircraft ten miles in trail. This means the distance between two aircraft exiting your sector with the same destination has to be ten nautical miles. In this sector multiple streams of traffic are merged into one and leave your area via an intersection called TEMTA. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
First thing you'll have to do is to determine their current spacing using the techniques discussed above. By doing this we get a spacing of 5 nm, so we have to do something. We don't want to change their speed so what else can we do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What we will do is lengthen the way of one of the aircrafts and shorten the other ones as far as possible. If possible put the first aircraft on a direct to the merging point. Sometimes this is already enough to gain some miles but in this case we put the second aircraft on a so called delay vector. This means we turn the aircraft away from the direct route to lengthen it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AUA91, proceed direct TEMTA, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA91: Proceeding direct TEMTA, maintaining 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AFR291, for seperation turn right heading 130, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: turning right heading 130, maintaining speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
To be sure we assigned a common speed and we also gave a short hint to the pilot about the cause for the vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we have to constantly assess the spacing between these two aircraft. As soon as we achieved our required spacing we put the Air France back on it's route.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AFR291, proceed direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: proceeding direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case we used a delay vector of about 40 degrees. You will learn by experience how big this delay vector has to be, however as before, the earlier you start the maneuver the smaller it has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
It is often also necessary to use speed restrictions to achieve or maintain a certain spacing. In these cases IAS should be used below FL 240 and Mach in the regions above. Especially in cruise flight most aircraft have a small speed margin, so the effect of speed control is limited. Often speed control is used additionally to putting the aircraft onto a delay vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircrews are expected to maintain instructed speeds as accurately as possible (+ / - 10knts). In case of unability to maintain instructed speed (weather reasons, operating limitations etc.) the controller has to be informed immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Holding===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Useage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The primary use of a holding is delaying aircraft that have arrived over their destination but cannot land yet because of traffic congestion, poor weather, or unavailability of the runway.  Several aircraft may fly the same holding pattern at the same time, separated vertically by 1,000 feet or more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''How does it look like'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding is situated around a holding fix. In a standard holding pattern the aircraft flies inbound to the holding fix on a certain course (Inbound leg). After passing the fix it turns right (standard turn: 2° per second) and flies one minute (1,5 min above FL 140) into the other direction (outbound leg). After one minute the pilot turns right again (standard turn) and establishes again on the inbound leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you count all this together you end up with four minutes required to finish one holding pattern. However some holding patterns use left turns, others don't use one minute to measure the outbound leg, but fly to a certain distance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also every holding has a minimum altitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flying a Hold'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Most aircraft have a specific holding speed published by the manufacturer.Maximum holding speeds are established in order to keep aircraft within the protected holding area during their one-minute inbound and outbound legs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a rule of thumb the Speed to be flown depends on the altitude or flight level the aircraft is at within the hold as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * At 6,000' MSL and below: 200 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * From 6,001' to FL 140: 230 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * At and above FL140: 265 knots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Duration'''&lt;br /&gt;
A Complete hold should take:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and below 4 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and above 5 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Holding Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding clearance issued by ATC includes at least:&lt;br /&gt;
 - A clearance to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The direction to hold from the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - A specified radial, course, or inbound track.&lt;br /&gt;
 - If DME is used, the DME distances at which the fix end and outbound end turns are to be&lt;br /&gt;
   commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The altitude or FL to be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to expect further clearance or an approach clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to leave the fix in the event of a communications failure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the right&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the left&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Course: The course flown on the inbound leg to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Inbound Leg: The standard 1 or 1.5 minute leg to the holding fix as Published&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Fix: This can be a VOR, a VORDME, an Intersection or an NDB&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Turn: A standard rate, 180 degrees turn which is begun at the holding Fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Abeam: The position opposite the holding fix, where the outbound begins.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Leg: This leg is defined by the inbound leg, pilots should adjust the outbound leg&lt;br /&gt;
      so that the inbound turn, the other standard 180° turn is completed just as the holding&lt;br /&gt;
      course is intercepted.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Side: The side of the course where the hold is accomplished.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Holding Side: The side of the course where you do not want the pilot to be holding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Non Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A non-standard holding pattern is one in which&lt;br /&gt;
 - The fix end and outbound end turns are to the left; and/or&lt;br /&gt;
 - The planned time along the inbound track is other than the standard one-minute or&lt;br /&gt;
   one-and-a-half minute leg appropriate for the altitude flown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Entry Holding Procedure'''&lt;br /&gt;
**Direct Entry (aircraft flies directly to the holding fix, and immediately begins the first turn outbound)&lt;br /&gt;
**Parallel Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, parallels the inbound course for one minute outbound, and then turns back, flies directly to the fix, and proceeds in the hold from there&lt;br /&gt;
**Teardrop Entry or Offset Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, turns into the protected area, flies for one minute, and then turns back inbound, proceeds to the fix and continues from there).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Coordination with adjacent Sectors==&lt;br /&gt;
The coordination respectively the communication between controllers (and of course pilots) is on of the most important things in aviation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A clear instruction to the person I want to speak to falls into 4 parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Who am I calling&lt;br /&gt;
 - What do I want&lt;br /&gt;
 - How are we going to archieve this (short and clear instructions!) &lt;br /&gt;
 - Did the person I called unterstand my instruction properly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Handoff===&lt;br /&gt;
At some point you'll have to send the pilot on to the next controller. With a Tower this is relatively easy: Just drop the track and send him onto the Tower frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However between Radar controllers a more sophisticated system is used.&lt;br /&gt;
A Handoff consists of two stages:&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Communication.&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Control====&lt;br /&gt;
The first part is done by sending a handoff request to the next controller. You may only do this if the plane is safe and will remain safe within your sector at all time. So initiate the handoff if you don't need him anymore, but not before that.&lt;br /&gt;
The other controller accepts the handoff. Again he only does this if he can really accept the traffic without creating a conflict. If that's not possible the two of you will have to work out a different solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the next controller rejects the handoff, the aircraft is not allowed to enter his sector and it is your responsibility to ensure it doesn't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;You are responsible for everything that happens in your sector.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' And you are not allowed to do anything in somebody else's if it is not stated in your sectors Letters of Agreement or without his permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the handoff is accepted, transfer of control is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Communication====&lt;br /&gt;
This is easy, just send him on the next frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Release===&lt;br /&gt;
Some times it comes in handy to change an aircrafts direction, altitude or speed while he is still in the previous sector. In this case you can coordinate with the controller responsible that you change one of these things early. This is called a release and often the phrase:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Released for ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
is used.&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Traffic==&lt;br /&gt;
===Flight Information Positions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flight Information Service (FIS) is an air traffic facility that provides a myriad of services to the pilot, such as pilot briefings, relaying of clearances and broadcasting of weather information.&lt;br /&gt;
At selected locations, FIS also provides en-route Flight Advisory Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Abnormal Situations - Emergencies, Radio Failures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Emergencies===&lt;br /&gt;
Emergencies are very uncomfortable situations for every controller. Emergencies shall be handeled expeditiously to get them safe down to the ground.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot tells the ATC what his intentions are and what he will do next and not the other way round. ATC keeps all the traffic in the vicinity of the emergency aircraft away to assure  that no other aircraft gets injured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Radio Failures===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to recognize a radio failure. Either you call the aircraft and don't get an answer or the pilot notices the failure and sets Squawk 7600. In the second case you will get an indication on your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First thing to do, is to find out if the pilot can still hear you:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read me Squawk Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 or&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read me turn right by 30° for 30 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
If he does you can give him instructions as usual. It is a good idea to let the pilot acknowledge each of the instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, Acknowledge all further instructions by Squawking Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Inform the other controllers involved of the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot is not able to hear you, he will continue his flight according to his flightplan until he reaches his clearance limit. There he will enter the associated holding pattern, stay there 5 minutes and then conduct the approach to the active runway. In this case keep the other aircraft out of his way and again inform the other controllers involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Positions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Weather Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Special Requests&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_I_APP (118.520) and LOVV_I_CTR (124.400) are the FIS/FIC Positions within Austrian airspace. They are responsible for the VFR Flights. They allocate Squawks, provide Traffic Information and offer Weather Information (worldwide) and coordinate with other controllers requests from pilots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2613</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Radar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2613"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:54:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* The Delay Vector */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
==Airspace Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Austrian Airspace is structured into four different Types of Airspace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class C:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other and from flights operating under VFR. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of other VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class D:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are given traffic information in respect of VFR flights. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of all other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class E:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are subject to ATC clearance. Flights under VFR are not subject to ATC clearance. As far as is practical, traffic information is given to all flights in respect of VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class G:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR or VFR. ATC separation is not provided. Traffic Information may be given as far as is practical in respect of other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classes C-E are referred to as controlled airspace. Class G is uncontrolled airspace. Controlled Airspace is shared between different ATC-Units (TWR, APP, CTR) and within these units they can be split further into different sectors.&lt;br /&gt;
==Responsibilities==&lt;br /&gt;
Each Radar Controller has an area of responsibility which may consist of one or more sectors. He has to maintain the required seperation between aircraft within his sector and ensures the expeditious flow of traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Minimum Radar Separation==&lt;br /&gt;
A Controller has to make sure that two Aircraft which are under his control never get closer than the minimum radar seperation. If two aircraft get closer than that, this incident is called a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
*The standard &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Vertical Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; is 1000 ft up to FL290 and 2000 ft above that. However Austria is considered RVSM (Reduced Vertical Seperation Minima) airspace so the upper limit of the 1000 ft seperation minimum is raised to FL410. In real life this demands special equipment of the aircraft involved, however on VATSIM all aircraft are considered RVSM capable.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Horizontal Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; depends on the radar equipment involved. APP Sectors work with a minimum of 3 nm, CTR Sectors use 5 nm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some cases where these minima may be under-run such as visual seperation or formation flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MRVA, MSA, MOCA==&lt;br /&gt;
MRVA (Minimum Radar Vectoring Altitude): The MRVA is defined as the lowest available altitude above   Mean Sea Level (MSL) in controlled airspace under consideration of the MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude) above ground and the airspace structure within a specified area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude): Minimum Sector Altitude is the minimum altitude that may be used under emergency conditions which will provide a minimum clearance of 1000ft above obstacles and terrain contained within a sector of 25 NM radius centred on a radio navigational aid. MSA can be given as areas between radials from a VOR at the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MOCA (Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitude): This is the lowest altitude that an aircraft can fly in IMC (Instrument Meteorological Conditions) and still keep safe clearance from terrain and obstacles. MOCA is often lower then MEA (se below). It is only used in emergencies, especially to get below icing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Structure of Flightplans and Routings==&lt;br /&gt;
A route consist of one or more points connected by eithe airways or directs (DCT).&lt;br /&gt;
 SITNI UL856 BAGSI Q114 RTT&lt;br /&gt;
In this case SITNI is the first point of the Route, thereafter it follows the airway UL856 to BAGSI and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
===SIDs===&lt;br /&gt;
SID (Standard Instrument Departure): It is a pre-defined route which aircrafts have to fly to get to their initial airway to follow their desired routing to their destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g.: Flightplan from LOWW (Wien) to Salzburg (LOWS): SITNI L856 SBG DCT - SITNI is our first waypoint of our routing and let us say for instance that in Vienna Runway 29 is in use. We take a look at our charts and we see that we can plan for a socalled SITNI4C departure route.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIDs are specified by the local Air Traffic Control. A SID can contain the following navigation aids: R-NAV Waypoints, VORs, NDBs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===STARs===&lt;br /&gt;
STARs (Standart Terminal Arrival Routes): STARs are pre-defined routes to get an aircraft to the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A STAR falls into three parts namely navigational point, version number and runway (depending on the airport), e.g. GAMLI4W arrival. The point at which the STAR ends is called Initial Approach Fix (IAF). In some cases the STARs continue and end at the Final Approach Fix (FAF), and that means that you as controller don't need to vector the aircraft unless there is other traffic in the way. The only thing you have to do is to instruct the pilot how to descend the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are exceptions of course, where the STARs don't end at the final, but at a navigational point some distance away from the runway. You as a controller must give vectors the last part to the runway. If you for some reason don’t give vectors, the pilot must enter holding at the STAR's ending point (clearance limit).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types of Instrument Approaches===&lt;br /&gt;
An '''instrument approach''' or '''instrument approach procedure (IAP)''' is a type of air navigation that allows pilots to land an aircraft in reduced visibility (Instrument Meteorological Conditions [IMC]) or to reach visual conditions permitting a visual landing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) '''Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - ILS (Instrument Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - MLS (Microwave Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - PAR (Precision Approach Radar)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - LAAS (Ground Based Augmentation System [GBAS] for Global Satellite Navigation Systems [GNSS])&lt;br /&gt;
 - JPALS (Joint Precision Approach and Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GCA (Ground Controlled Approach)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) '''Non-Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer&lt;br /&gt;
 - VOR&lt;br /&gt;
 - NDB (with ADF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Simplified Directional Facility (SDF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - TACAN&lt;br /&gt;
 - Surveillance Radar Approach (SRA) [also known in some countries as ASR approach]&lt;br /&gt;
 - Visual&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Vectoring===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of vectoring:&lt;br /&gt;
* Lateral Vectoring &lt;br /&gt;
* Vertical Vectoring&lt;br /&gt;
====Lateral Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, turn left heading 165°&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, turn right heading 300°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When issuing a heading to an aircraft, make sure that you are using a direction ending on 0 (zero) or on 5 (five).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you provide Radar Vectors to an aircraft then always tell the pilot the reason why you are doing this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123 turn right heading 080°, radar vectors for ILS approach RWY 11&lt;br /&gt;
After vectoring an aircraft you might have to send the aircraft back on its flight planned route:&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, proceed direct to SITNI&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to know, that as soon as you take an aircraft of a publsihed route, either by vectoring or by using a direct, you are also responsible for the necessary terrain clearance. To do this always consider the MRVA on the aircrafts path.&lt;br /&gt;
====Vertical Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, climb FL240&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, descend Altitude 3000 feet, QNH 1016&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see there are 2 types of heights namely Altitude and Flightlevel (FL).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flightlevel''' is used for aircraft flying above the Transition Altitude, Transition Level or climbing through and above the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to Standard Pressure [1013 QNE]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Altitude''' is used for aircraft flying below the Transition Altitude or for Aircraft descending through and below the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to local QNH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
A controller may issue speed instructions within an aircrafts operating limits. There are two possible ways to do this, either by using Indicated Airspeed (FL280 or below) or by specifying a Mach number (FL280 or above).&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, maintain speed 280 knots&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF456, maintain Mach 0.81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Seperation and Sequencing Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
===Planning===&lt;br /&gt;
To effectively use the sequencing techniques explained below we first have to assess the current situation.&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current seperation====&lt;br /&gt;
In VRC and ES there are tools available to determine the seperation between aircraft. One of them is the Seperation Predictor. It is a very comfortable way to determine the point where two aircraft, given a constant speed, will be closest to each other. Furthermore it gives you the minimum distance and the time to go to this point.&lt;br /&gt;
To constantly survey the distance between to aircraft (or between an aircraft and a point) you can use seperation links (or anchors).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These tools give you an overview over the lateral situation. The vertical situations is a bit more complicated since you have to use a bit of math. If you have two converging aircraft who are not at a constant altitude you need their rate of climb/descend to determine the spacing at their closest point.&lt;br /&gt;
 APP: AUA265, report rate of climb.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA265:rate of climb 2500 feet per minute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current spacing====&lt;br /&gt;
Often procedures in a sector include a so called &amp;quot;miles-in-trail&amp;quot; requirement. This means that aircraft flying over the same point and for example have a common destination need to cross the point in a certain distance. Also when working as an approach controller we need to know how close two aircraft will be on approach. How can we determine the current spacing?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First we need to choose a merging point. In a miles in trail requirement this would typically be the handoff point. In the approach area that could be a point somewhere on the approach (e.g. 12 nm final or the point of base turn). Now we can measure the distance of both aircraft to the merging point. If both aircraft have the same speed and are routing direct to the merging point you directly get the spacing at this point. However if differnet speeds are involved things get more complicated. In this case there is no easy and fast way to determine the spacing at the merging point.&lt;br /&gt;
You will have to use your experience to judge these situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you can use this technique to determine the spacing between multiple aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
===The concept of positive seperation===&lt;br /&gt;
Imagine you are the controller in a sector when suddenly the radio communication with your pilots does not work anymore. Take this assumption as the basis of the positive seperation concept. It is policy to always keep aircraft guaranteed safe to each other. This means as soon as you recognize a possible conflict, imeediately resolve it. It's never a good idea to say to yourself &amp;quot;I'll get back to it later&amp;quot; because you might forget it, the voice channel might be blocked and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the dense approach airspace this is often not easy but it will save you a lot of nerves if you keep converging traffic on different levels!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Resolving conflicts===&lt;br /&gt;
There are multple ways of resolving a conflict. You can alter the aircrafts flight path, altitude or speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts altitude to resolve a conflict is relatively easy. Just make sure you achieve the necessary seperation when the two aircraft meet. In the cruise phase you have to keep in mind the aircrafts performance. Often aircraft can't climb higher due to their weight, so don't be surprised if the pilot rejects the altitude change. Also have a look at the aircrafts further intentions. For example it is often not a good idea to put an aircraft that has to descend in a short time anyway on top of another one.&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots prefer to stay at their cruising altitude however in certain situations (e.g. one aircraft overtaking another one) don't hesitate to change the cruise level in accordance with the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speed restrictions for seperation are also possible but mostly you should use them to maintain the present seperation. However in congested airspace where other means of seperation are not possible (e.g. due to terrain) you can also use speeds to achieve a certain seperation. Bear in mind that especially during cruise flight an aircrafts speed margin might not be very large.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts flight path to achieve a safe situation is often the best way. Consider the following basic situation:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Two aircraft are flying to the same point at the same altitude. If they keep on flying they will meet each other exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To resolve the conflict you have to change the heading of one of the aircraft. You will soon discover that the best possibility is to turn one aircraft behind the other one. The earlier you start such a maneuver the smaller the heading change has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spacing techniques===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways of achieving a certain seperation: Modifying an aircrafts speed or it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
====The Delay Vector====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Your working a sector which has an exit agreement that requires you to put aircraft ten miles in trail. This means the distance between two aircraft exiting your sector with the same destination has to be ten nautical miles. In this sector multiple streams of traffic are merged into one and leave your area via an intersection called TEMTA. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
First thing you'll have to do is to determine their current spacing using the techniques discussed above. By doing this we get a spacing of 5 nm, so we have to do something. We don't want to change their speed so what else can we do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What we will do is lengthen the way of one of the aircrafts and shorten the other ones as far as possible. If possible put the first aircraft on a direct to the merging point. Sometimes this is already enough to gain some miles but in this case we put the second aircraft on a so called delay vector. This means we turn the aircraft away from the direct route to lengthen it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AUA91, proceed direct TEMTA, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA91: Proceeding direct TEMTA, maintaining 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AFR291, for seperation turn right heading 130, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: turning right heading 130, maintaining speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
To be sure we assigned a common speed and we also gave a short hint to the pilot about the cause for the vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we have to constantly assess the spacing between these two aircraft. As soon as we achieved our required spacing we put the Air France back on it's route.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AFR291, proceed direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: proceeding direct TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case we used a delay vector of about 40 degrees. You will learn by experience how big this delay vector has to be, however as before, the earlier you start the maneuver the smaller it has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
It is often also necessary to use speed restrictions to achieve or maintain a certain spacing. In these cases IAS should be used below FL 240 and Mach in the regions above. Especially in cruise flight most aircraft have a small speed margin, so the effect of speed control is limited. Often speed control is used additionally to putting the aircraft onto a delay vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircrews are expected to maintain instructed speeds as accurately as possible (+ / - 10knts). In case of unability to maintain instructed speed (weather reasons, operating limitations etc.) the controller has to be informed immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Holding===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Useage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The primary use of a holding is delaying aircraft that have arrived over their destination but cannot land yet because of traffic congestion, poor weather, or unavailability of the runway.  Several aircraft may fly the same holding pattern at the same time, separated vertically by 1,000 feet or more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''How does it look like'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding is situated around a holding fix. In a standard holding pattern the aircraft flies inbound to the holding fix on a certain course (Inbound leg). After passing the fix it turns right (standard turn: 2° per second) and flies one minute (1,5 min above FL 140) into the other direction (outbound leg). After one minute the pilot turns right again (standard turn) and establishes again on the inbound leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you count all this together you end up with four minutes required to finish one holding pattern. However some holding patterns use left turns, others don't use one minute to measure the outbound leg, but fly to a certain distance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also every holding has a minimum altitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flying a Hold'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Most aircraft have a specific holding speed published by the manufacturer.Maximum holding speeds are established in order to keep aircraft within the protected holding area during their one-minute inbound and outbound legs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a rule of thumb the Speed to be flown depends on the altitude or flight level the aircraft is at within the hold as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * At 6,000' MSL and below: 200 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * From 6,001' to FL 140: 230 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * At and above FL140: 265 knots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Duration'''&lt;br /&gt;
A Complete hold should take:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and below 4 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and above 5 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Holding Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding clearance issued by ATC includes at least:&lt;br /&gt;
 - A clearance to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The direction to hold from the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - A specified radial, course, or inbound track.&lt;br /&gt;
 - If DME is used, the DME distances at which the fix end and outbound end turns are to be&lt;br /&gt;
   commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The altitude or FL to be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to expect further clearance or an approach clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to leave the fix in the event of a communications failure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the right&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the left&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Course: The course flown on the inbound leg to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Inbound Leg: The standard 1 or 1.5 minute leg to the holding fix as Published&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Fix: This can be a VOR, a VORDME, an Intersection or an NDB&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Turn: A standard rate, 180 degrees turn which is begun at the holding Fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Abeam: The position opposite the holding fix, where the outbound begins.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Leg: This leg is defined by the inbound leg, pilots should adjust the outbound leg&lt;br /&gt;
      so that the inbound turn, the other standard 180° turn is completed just as the holding&lt;br /&gt;
      course is intercepted.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Side: The side of the course where the hold is accomplished.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Holding Side: The side of the course where you do not want the pilot to be holding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Non Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A non-standard holding pattern is one in which&lt;br /&gt;
 - The fix end and outbound end turns are to the left; and/or&lt;br /&gt;
 - The planned time along the inbound track is other than the standard one-minute or&lt;br /&gt;
   one-and-a-half minute leg appropriate for the altitude flown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Entry Holding Procedure'''&lt;br /&gt;
**Direct Entry (aircraft flies directly to the holding fix, and immediately begins the first turn outbound)&lt;br /&gt;
**Parallel Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, parallels the inbound course for one minute outbound, and then turns back, flies directly to the fix, and proceeds in the hold from there&lt;br /&gt;
**Teardrop Entry or Offset Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, turns into the protected area, flies for one minute, and then turns back inbound, proceeds to the fix and continues from there).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Coordination with adjacent Sectors==&lt;br /&gt;
The coordination respectively the communication between controllers (and of course pilots) is on of the most important things in aviation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A clear instruction to the person I want to speak to falls into 4 parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Who am I calling&lt;br /&gt;
 - What do I want&lt;br /&gt;
 - How are we going to archieve this (short and clear instructions!) &lt;br /&gt;
 - Did the person I called unterstand my instruction properly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Handoff===&lt;br /&gt;
At some point you'll have to send the pilot on to the next controller. With a Tower this is relatively easy: Just drop the track and send him onto the Tower frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However between Radar controllers a more sophisticated system is used.&lt;br /&gt;
A Handoff consists of two stages:&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Communication.&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Control====&lt;br /&gt;
The first part is done by sending a handoff request to the next controller. You may only do this if the plane is safe and will remain safe within your sector at all time. So initiate the handoff if you don't need him anymore, but not before that.&lt;br /&gt;
The other controller accepts the handoff. Again he only does this if he can really accept the traffic without creating a conflict. If that's not possible the two of you will have to work out a different solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the next controller rejects the handoff, the aircraft is not allowed to enter his sector and it is your responsibility to ensure it doesn't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;You are responsible for everything that happens in your sector.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' And you are not allowed to do anything in somebody else's if it is not stated in your sectors Letters of Agreement or without his permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the handoff is accepted, transfer of control is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Communication====&lt;br /&gt;
This is easy, just send him on the next frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Release===&lt;br /&gt;
Some times it comes in handy to change an aircrafts direction, altitude or speed while he is still in the previous sector. In this case you can coordinate with the controller responsible that you change one of these things early. This is called a release and often the phrase:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Released for ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
is used.&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Traffic==&lt;br /&gt;
===Flight Information Positions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flight Information Service (FIS) is an air traffic facility that provides a myriad of services to the pilot, such as pilot briefings, relaying of clearances and broadcasting of weather information.&lt;br /&gt;
At selected locations, FIS also provides en-route Flight Advisory Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Abnormal Situations - Emergencies, Radio Failures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Emergencies===&lt;br /&gt;
Emergencies are very uncomfortable situations for every controller. Emergencies shall be handeled expeditiously to get them safe down to the ground.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot tells the ATC what his intentions are and what he will do next and not the other way round. ATC keeps all the traffic in the vicinity of the emergency aircraft away to assure  that no other aircraft gets injured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Radio Failures===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to recognize a radio failure. Either you call the aircraft and don't get an answer or the pilot notices the failure and sets Squawk 7600. In the second case you will get an indication on your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First thing to do, is to find out if the pilot can still hear you:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read me Squawk Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 or&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read me turn right by 30° for 30 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
If he does you can give him instructions as usual. It is a good idea to let the pilot acknowledge each of the instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, Acknowledge all further instructions by Squawking Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Inform the other controllers involved of the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot is not able to hear you, he will continue his flight according to his flightplan until he reaches his clearance limit. There he will enter the associated holding pattern, stay there 5 minutes and then conduct the approach to the active runway. In this case keep the other aircraft out of his way and again inform the other controllers involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Positions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Weather Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Special Requests&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_I_APP (118.520) and LOVV_I_CTR (124.400) are the 2 FIS Positions within Austrian airspace. They are responsible for the VFR Flights. They allocate Squawks, provide Traffic Information and offer Weather Information (worldwide) and coordinate with other controllers requests from pilots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2612</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Radar</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radar&amp;diff=2612"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:53:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Vertical Vectoring */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;This study guide is still work in progress. Stay tuned for further chapters.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;'''&lt;br /&gt;
==Airspace Structure==&lt;br /&gt;
Austrian Airspace is structured into four different Types of Airspace:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class C:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other and from flights operating under VFR. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of other VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class D:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. All flights are subject to ATC clearance. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are given traffic information in respect of VFR flights. Flights operating under VFR are given traffic information in respect of all other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class E:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR, SVFR, or VFR. Aircraft operating under IFR and SVFR are separated from each other, and are subject to ATC clearance. Flights under VFR are not subject to ATC clearance. As far as is practical, traffic information is given to all flights in respect of VFR flights.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Class G:''' Operations may be conducted under IFR or VFR. ATC separation is not provided. Traffic Information may be given as far as is practical in respect of other flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Classes C-E are referred to as controlled airspace. Class G is uncontrolled airspace. Controlled Airspace is shared between different ATC-Units (TWR, APP, CTR) and within these units they can be split further into different sectors.&lt;br /&gt;
==Responsibilities==&lt;br /&gt;
Each Radar Controller has an area of responsibility which may consist of one or more sectors. He has to maintain the required seperation between aircraft within his sector and ensures the expeditious flow of traffic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Minimum Radar Separation==&lt;br /&gt;
A Controller has to make sure that two Aircraft which are under his control never get closer than the minimum radar seperation. If two aircraft get closer than that, this incident is called a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
*The standard &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Vertical Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; is 1000 ft up to FL290 and 2000 ft above that. However Austria is considered RVSM (Reduced Vertical Seperation Minima) airspace so the upper limit of the 1000 ft seperation minimum is raised to FL410. In real life this demands special equipment of the aircraft involved, however on VATSIM all aircraft are considered RVSM capable.&lt;br /&gt;
*The &amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Minimum Horizontal Seperation&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt; depends on the radar equipment involved. APP Sectors work with a minimum of 3 nm, CTR Sectors use 5 nm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are some cases where these minima may be under-run such as visual seperation or formation flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==MRVA, MSA, MOCA==&lt;br /&gt;
MRVA (Minimum Radar Vectoring Altitude): The MRVA is defined as the lowest available altitude above   Mean Sea Level (MSL) in controlled airspace under consideration of the MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude) above ground and the airspace structure within a specified area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MSA (Minimum Safe/Sector Altitude): Minimum Sector Altitude is the minimum altitude that may be used under emergency conditions which will provide a minimum clearance of 1000ft above obstacles and terrain contained within a sector of 25 NM radius centred on a radio navigational aid. MSA can be given as areas between radials from a VOR at the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
MOCA (Minimum Obstacle Clearance Altitude): This is the lowest altitude that an aircraft can fly in IMC (Instrument Meteorological Conditions) and still keep safe clearance from terrain and obstacles. MOCA is often lower then MEA (se below). It is only used in emergencies, especially to get below icing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Structure of Flightplans and Routings==&lt;br /&gt;
A route consist of one or more points connected by eithe airways or directs (DCT).&lt;br /&gt;
 SITNI UL856 BAGSI Q114 RTT&lt;br /&gt;
In this case SITNI is the first point of the Route, thereafter it follows the airway UL856 to BAGSI and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
===SIDs===&lt;br /&gt;
SID (Standard Instrument Departure): It is a pre-defined route which aircrafts have to fly to get to their initial airway to follow their desired routing to their destination.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
e.g.: Flightplan from LOWW (Wien) to Salzburg (LOWS): SITNI L856 SBG DCT - SITNI is our first waypoint of our routing and let us say for instance that in Vienna Runway 29 is in use. We take a look at our charts and we see that we can plan for a socalled SITNI4C departure route.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SIDs are specified by the local Air Traffic Control. A SID can contain the following navigation aids: R-NAV Waypoints, VORs, NDBs, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===STARs===&lt;br /&gt;
STARs (Standart Terminal Arrival Routes): STARs are pre-defined routes to get an aircraft to the airport.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A STAR falls into three parts namely navigational point, version number and runway (depending on the airport), e.g. GAMLI4W arrival. The point at which the STAR ends is called Initial Approach Fix (IAF). In some cases the STARs continue and end at the Final Approach Fix (FAF), and that means that you as controller don't need to vector the aircraft unless there is other traffic in the way. The only thing you have to do is to instruct the pilot how to descend the aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are exceptions of course, where the STARs don't end at the final, but at a navigational point some distance away from the runway. You as a controller must give vectors the last part to the runway. If you for some reason don’t give vectors, the pilot must enter holding at the STAR's ending point (clearance limit).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Types of Instrument Approaches===&lt;br /&gt;
An '''instrument approach''' or '''instrument approach procedure (IAP)''' is a type of air navigation that allows pilots to land an aircraft in reduced visibility (Instrument Meteorological Conditions [IMC]) or to reach visual conditions permitting a visual landing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of approaches:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
* Non-Precision Approaches&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.) '''Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - ILS (Instrument Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - MLS (Microwave Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - PAR (Precision Approach Radar)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - LAAS (Ground Based Augmentation System [GBAS] for Global Satellite Navigation Systems [GNSS])&lt;br /&gt;
 - JPALS (Joint Precision Approach and Landing System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GCA (Ground Controlled Approach)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.) '''Non-Precision Approaches'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer&lt;br /&gt;
 - VOR&lt;br /&gt;
 - NDB (with ADF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Localizer Type Directional Aid (LDA)&lt;br /&gt;
 - Simplified Directional Facility (SDF)&lt;br /&gt;
 - GPS (Global Positioning System)&lt;br /&gt;
 - TACAN&lt;br /&gt;
 - Surveillance Radar Approach (SRA) [also known in some countries as ASR approach]&lt;br /&gt;
 - Visual&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Instructions==&lt;br /&gt;
===Vectoring===&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 types of vectoring:&lt;br /&gt;
* Lateral Vectoring &lt;br /&gt;
* Vertical Vectoring&lt;br /&gt;
====Lateral Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, turn left heading 165°&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, turn right heading 300°&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When issuing a heading to an aircraft, make sure that you are using a direction ending on 0 (zero) or on 5 (five).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you provide Radar Vectors to an aircraft then always tell the pilot the reason why you are doing this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123 turn right heading 080°, radar vectors for ILS approach RWY 11&lt;br /&gt;
After vectoring an aircraft you might have to send the aircraft back on its flight planned route:&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, proceed direct to SITNI&lt;br /&gt;
It is important to know, that as soon as you take an aircraft of a publsihed route, either by vectoring or by using a direct, you are also responsible for the necessary terrain clearance. To do this always consider the MRVA on the aircrafts path.&lt;br /&gt;
====Vertical Vectoring====&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, climb FL240&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF243, descend Altitude 3000 feet, QNH 1016&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As you can see there are 2 types of heights namely Altitude and Flightlevel (FL).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flightlevel''' is used for aircraft flying above the Transition Altitude, Transition Level or climbing through and above the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to Standard Pressure [1013 QNE]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Altitude''' is used for aircraft flying below the Transition Altitude or for Aircraft descending through and below the Transition Layer (Altimeter in the aircraft is set to local QNH).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
A controller may issue speed instructions within an aircrafts operating limits. There are two possible ways to do this, either by using Indicated Airspeed (FL280 or below) or by specifying a Mach number (FL280 or above).&lt;br /&gt;
 ABC123, maintain speed 280 knots&lt;br /&gt;
 DEF456, maintain Mach 0.81&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Seperation and Sequencing Techniques==&lt;br /&gt;
===Planning===&lt;br /&gt;
To effectively use the sequencing techniques explained below we first have to assess the current situation.&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current seperation====&lt;br /&gt;
In VRC and ES there are tools available to determine the seperation between aircraft. One of them is the Seperation Predictor. It is a very comfortable way to determine the point where two aircraft, given a constant speed, will be closest to each other. Furthermore it gives you the minimum distance and the time to go to this point.&lt;br /&gt;
To constantly survey the distance between to aircraft (or between an aircraft and a point) you can use seperation links (or anchors).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These tools give you an overview over the lateral situation. The vertical situations is a bit more complicated since you have to use a bit of math. If you have two converging aircraft who are not at a constant altitude you need their rate of climb/descend to determine the spacing at their closest point.&lt;br /&gt;
 APP: AUA265, report rate of climb.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA265:rate of climb 2500 feet per minute.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Determining current spacing====&lt;br /&gt;
Often procedures in a sector include a so called &amp;quot;miles-in-trail&amp;quot; requirement. This means that aircraft flying over the same point and for example have a common destination need to cross the point in a certain distance. Also when working as an approach controller we need to know how close two aircraft will be on approach. How can we determine the current spacing?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First we need to choose a merging point. In a miles in trail requirement this would typically be the handoff point. In the approach area that could be a point somewhere on the approach (e.g. 12 nm final or the point of base turn). Now we can measure the distance of both aircraft to the merging point. If both aircraft have the same speed and are routing direct to the merging point you directly get the spacing at this point. However if differnet speeds are involved things get more complicated. In this case there is no easy and fast way to determine the spacing at the merging point.&lt;br /&gt;
You will have to use your experience to judge these situations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Of course you can use this technique to determine the spacing between multiple aircraft.&lt;br /&gt;
===The concept of positive seperation===&lt;br /&gt;
Imagine you are the controller in a sector when suddenly the radio communication with your pilots does not work anymore. Take this assumption as the basis of the positive seperation concept. It is policy to always keep aircraft guaranteed safe to each other. This means as soon as you recognize a possible conflict, imeediately resolve it. It's never a good idea to say to yourself &amp;quot;I'll get back to it later&amp;quot; because you might forget it, the voice channel might be blocked and so on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the dense approach airspace this is often not easy but it will save you a lot of nerves if you keep converging traffic on different levels!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Resolving conflicts===&lt;br /&gt;
There are multple ways of resolving a conflict. You can alter the aircrafts flight path, altitude or speed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts altitude to resolve a conflict is relatively easy. Just make sure you achieve the necessary seperation when the two aircraft meet. In the cruise phase you have to keep in mind the aircrafts performance. Often aircraft can't climb higher due to their weight, so don't be surprised if the pilot rejects the altitude change. Also have a look at the aircrafts further intentions. For example it is often not a good idea to put an aircraft that has to descend in a short time anyway on top of another one.&lt;br /&gt;
Pilots prefer to stay at their cruising altitude however in certain situations (e.g. one aircraft overtaking another one) don't hesitate to change the cruise level in accordance with the pilot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Speed restrictions for seperation are also possible but mostly you should use them to maintain the present seperation. However in congested airspace where other means of seperation are not possible (e.g. due to terrain) you can also use speeds to achieve a certain seperation. Bear in mind that especially during cruise flight an aircrafts speed margin might not be very large.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Changing an aircrafts flight path to achieve a safe situation is often the best way. Consider the following basic situation:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Two aircraft are flying to the same point at the same altitude. If they keep on flying they will meet each other exactly.&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
To resolve the conflict you have to change the heading of one of the aircraft. You will soon discover that the best possibility is to turn one aircraft behind the other one. The earlier you start such a maneuver the smaller the heading change has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Spacing techniques===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two possible ways of achieving a certain seperation: Modifying an aircrafts speed or it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
====The Delay Vector====&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;prettytable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|Your working a sector which has an exit agreement that requires you to put aircraft ten miles in trail. This means the distance between two aircraft exiting your sector with the same destination has to be ten nautical miles. In this sector multiple streams of traffic are merged into one and leave your area via an intersection called TEMTA. &lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
First thing you'll have to do is to determine their current spacing using the techniques discussed above. By doing this we get a spacing of 5 nm, so we have to do something. We don't want to change their speed so what else can we do?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
What we will do is lengthen the way of one of the aircrafts and shorten the other ones as far as possible. If possible put the first aircraft on a direct to the merging point. Sometimes this is already enough to gain some miles but in this case we put the second aircraft on a so called delay vector. This means we turn the aircraft away from the direct route to lengthen it's flight path.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AUA91, proceed direct to TEMTA, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA91: Proceeding direct to TEMTA, maintaining 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AFR291, for seperation turn right heading 130, maintain speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: turning right heading 130, maintaining speed 290 knots indicated.&lt;br /&gt;
To be sure we assigned a common speed and we also gave a short hint to the pilot about the cause for the vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now we have to constantly assess the spacing between these two aircraft. As soon as we achieved our required spacing we put the Air France back on it's route.&lt;br /&gt;
 RDR:AFR291, proceed direct to TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
 AFR291: proceeding direct to TEMTA.&lt;br /&gt;
In this case we used a delay vector of about 40 degrees. You will learn by experience how big this delay vector has to be, however as before, the earlier you start the maneuver the smaller it has to be.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Speed Control====&lt;br /&gt;
It is often also necessary to use speed restrictions to achieve or maintain a certain spacing. In these cases IAS should be used below FL 240 and Mach in the regions above. Especially in cruise flight most aircraft have a small speed margin, so the effect of speed control is limited. Often speed control is used additionally to putting the aircraft onto a delay vector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aircrews are expected to maintain instructed speeds as accurately as possible (+ / - 10knts). In case of unability to maintain instructed speed (weather reasons, operating limitations etc.) the controller has to be informed immediately.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Holding===&lt;br /&gt;
'''Useage'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The primary use of a holding is delaying aircraft that have arrived over their destination but cannot land yet because of traffic congestion, poor weather, or unavailability of the runway.  Several aircraft may fly the same holding pattern at the same time, separated vertically by 1,000 feet or more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''How does it look like'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding is situated around a holding fix. In a standard holding pattern the aircraft flies inbound to the holding fix on a certain course (Inbound leg). After passing the fix it turns right (standard turn: 2° per second) and flies one minute (1,5 min above FL 140) into the other direction (outbound leg). After one minute the pilot turns right again (standard turn) and establishes again on the inbound leg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you count all this together you end up with four minutes required to finish one holding pattern. However some holding patterns use left turns, others don't use one minute to measure the outbound leg, but fly to a certain distance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also every holding has a minimum altitude.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Flying a Hold'''&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Most aircraft have a specific holding speed published by the manufacturer.Maximum holding speeds are established in order to keep aircraft within the protected holding area during their one-minute inbound and outbound legs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a rule of thumb the Speed to be flown depends on the altitude or flight level the aircraft is at within the hold as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * At 6,000' MSL and below: 200 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * From 6,001' to FL 140: 230 knots&lt;br /&gt;
    * At and above FL140: 265 knots&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Duration'''&lt;br /&gt;
A Complete hold should take:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and below 4 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
    * FL140 and above 5 minutes&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Holding Clearance'''&lt;br /&gt;
A holding clearance issued by ATC includes at least:&lt;br /&gt;
 - A clearance to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The direction to hold from the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
 - A specified radial, course, or inbound track.&lt;br /&gt;
 - If DME is used, the DME distances at which the fix end and outbound end turns are to be&lt;br /&gt;
   commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The altitude or FL to be maintained. &lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to expect further clearance or an approach clearance.&lt;br /&gt;
 - The time to leave the fix in the event of a communications failure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
    * Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the right&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Standard Hold: A hold where all turns are made to the left&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Course: The course flown on the inbound leg to the holding fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Inbound Leg: The standard 1 or 1.5 minute leg to the holding fix as Published&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Fix: This can be a VOR, a VORDME, an Intersection or an NDB&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Turn: A standard rate, 180 degrees turn which is begun at the holding Fix.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Abeam: The position opposite the holding fix, where the outbound begins.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Outbound Leg: This leg is defined by the inbound leg, pilots should adjust the outbound leg&lt;br /&gt;
      so that the inbound turn, the other standard 180° turn is completed just as the holding&lt;br /&gt;
      course is intercepted.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Holding Side: The side of the course where the hold is accomplished.&lt;br /&gt;
    * Non Holding Side: The side of the course where you do not want the pilot to be holding&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Non Standart Holding Pattern'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A non-standard holding pattern is one in which&lt;br /&gt;
 - The fix end and outbound end turns are to the left; and/or&lt;br /&gt;
 - The planned time along the inbound track is other than the standard one-minute or&lt;br /&gt;
   one-and-a-half minute leg appropriate for the altitude flown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Entry Holding Procedure'''&lt;br /&gt;
**Direct Entry (aircraft flies directly to the holding fix, and immediately begins the first turn outbound)&lt;br /&gt;
**Parallel Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, parallels the inbound course for one minute outbound, and then turns back, flies directly to the fix, and proceeds in the hold from there&lt;br /&gt;
**Teardrop Entry or Offset Entry (aircraft flies to the holding fix, turns into the protected area, flies for one minute, and then turns back inbound, proceeds to the fix and continues from there).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Coordination with adjacent Sectors==&lt;br /&gt;
The coordination respectively the communication between controllers (and of course pilots) is on of the most important things in aviation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A clear instruction to the person I want to speak to falls into 4 parts:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 - Who am I calling&lt;br /&gt;
 - What do I want&lt;br /&gt;
 - How are we going to archieve this (short and clear instructions!) &lt;br /&gt;
 - Did the person I called unterstand my instruction properly&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Handoff===&lt;br /&gt;
At some point you'll have to send the pilot on to the next controller. With a Tower this is relatively easy: Just drop the track and send him onto the Tower frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
However between Radar controllers a more sophisticated system is used.&lt;br /&gt;
A Handoff consists of two stages:&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Control&lt;br /&gt;
* Transfer of Communication.&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Control====&lt;br /&gt;
The first part is done by sending a handoff request to the next controller. You may only do this if the plane is safe and will remain safe within your sector at all time. So initiate the handoff if you don't need him anymore, but not before that.&lt;br /&gt;
The other controller accepts the handoff. Again he only does this if he can really accept the traffic without creating a conflict. If that's not possible the two of you will have to work out a different solution.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the next controller rejects the handoff, the aircraft is not allowed to enter his sector and it is your responsibility to ensure it doesn't.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color:#ff0000;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;You are responsible for everything that happens in your sector.&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;''' And you are not allowed to do anything in somebody else's if it is not stated in your sectors Letters of Agreement or without his permission.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the handoff is accepted, transfer of control is complete.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Transfer of Communication====&lt;br /&gt;
This is easy, just send him on the next frequency.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===The Release===&lt;br /&gt;
Some times it comes in handy to change an aircrafts direction, altitude or speed while he is still in the previous sector. In this case you can coordinate with the controller responsible that you change one of these things early. This is called a release and often the phrase:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;Released for ...&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
is used.&lt;br /&gt;
==VFR Traffic==&lt;br /&gt;
===Flight Information Positions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Flight Information Service (FIS) is an air traffic facility that provides a myriad of services to the pilot, such as pilot briefings, relaying of clearances and broadcasting of weather information.&lt;br /&gt;
At selected locations, FIS also provides en-route Flight Advisory Services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Abnormal Situations - Emergencies, Radio Failures==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Emergencies===&lt;br /&gt;
Emergencies are very uncomfortable situations for every controller. Emergencies shall be handeled expeditiously to get them safe down to the ground.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pilot tells the ATC what his intentions are and what he will do next and not the other way round. ATC keeps all the traffic in the vicinity of the emergency aircraft away to assure  that no other aircraft gets injured.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Radio Failures===&lt;br /&gt;
There are two ways to recognize a radio failure. Either you call the aircraft and don't get an answer or the pilot notices the failure and sets Squawk 7600. In the second case you will get an indication on your screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First thing to do, is to find out if the pilot can still hear you:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read me Squawk Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
 or&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, if you read me turn right by 30° for 30 seconds.&lt;br /&gt;
If he does you can give him instructions as usual. It is a good idea to let the pilot acknowledge each of the instructions:&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;quot;RDR: FLT1, Acknowledge all further instructions by Squawking Ident&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
Inform the other controllers involved of the situation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the pilot is not able to hear you, he will continue his flight according to his flightplan until he reaches his clearance limit. There he will enter the associated holding pattern, stay there 5 minutes and then conduct the approach to the active runway. In this case keep the other aircraft out of his way and again inform the other controllers involved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information Positions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Traffic Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Weather Information&lt;br /&gt;
* Special Requests&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
LOWW_I_APP (118.520) and LOVV_I_CTR (124.400) are the 2 FIS Positions within Austrian airspace. They are responsible for the VFR Flights. They allocate Squawks, provide Traffic Information and offer Weather Information (worldwide) and coordinate with other controllers requests from pilots.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Study Guides]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Controller]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Example_Flight&amp;diff=2611</id>
		<title>Example Flight</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Example_Flight&amp;diff=2611"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:50:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* VATSIM ID / VATSIM Passwort */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Beispielflug für neue Piloten ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Einleitung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Dieser Flug, den wir Schritt für Schritt gemeinsam durchgehen wollen, soll dir einen ersten Auszug aus der Faszination der virtuellen Fliegerei&lt;br /&gt;
im [[VATSIM]] Netzwerk geben. Wenn du dich an diesem Tutorial orientierst kann eigentlich nichts schief gehen. Es wäre sehr&lt;br /&gt;
empfehlenswert dir einen&lt;br /&gt;
Termin mit deinem Mentor zu vereinbaren, damit ihr dieses Tutorial gemeinsam durcharbeiten könnt (z.B. über [[TeamSpeak]],&lt;br /&gt;
[[Skype]], etc.). Falls du&lt;br /&gt;
der Meinung bist, dass du das auch alleine packst können wir jetzt beginnen. Dein erster Flug wird von Wien nach Salzburg&lt;br /&gt;
führen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Benötigte Software ===&lt;br /&gt;
Bevor es an die eigentliche Flugvorbereitung geht, sollten wir besprechen welche Software du verwendest bzw. welche Programme du benötigst.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Flugsimulator ====&lt;br /&gt;
Ich gehe davon aus, dass du bereits einen Flugsimulator installiert hast. Folgende Simulatoren laufen mit der [[VATSIM]] spezifischen Software&lt;br /&gt;
(Squawkbox, FsInn, XSquawkbox) problemlos:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Microsoft Flight Simulator 2004 ([[Squawkbox]], [[FsInn]])&lt;br /&gt;
*X-Plane 8.xx ([[XSquawkbox]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Sonstige Software ====&lt;br /&gt;
Die meisten, am Markt erhältlichen Payware Flieger, haben sehr detailierte FMCs oder ähnliche Navigationseinrichtungen. Da&lt;br /&gt;
heutzutage auch in der Realität oft&lt;br /&gt;
ein FMC/FMS zum Einsatz kommt, wollen wir bei diesem Tutorial [[vasFMC]] als Referenz verwenden.&lt;br /&gt;
Mit diesem FMC kann fast jedes Freeware-Flugzeug verwendet werden.&lt;br /&gt;
Weiters ist es von Vorteil Tools wie [[VATSpy]] zu verwenden. Tools wie diese können dir&lt;br /&gt;
dabei helfen besetzte ATC Stationen zu finden und den Verkehr in deiner Umgebung im Auge zu behalten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Beachte: Vor diesem Tutorial sollte die Dokumentation/Readme der jeweiligen Software und die Software danach konfiguriert werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flugvorbereitung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Wie in der Realität, ist es auch bei [[VATSIM]] notwendig eine möglichst genaue Flugplanung durchzuführen, um auf gesicherten&lt;br /&gt;
Routen zum Zielflughafen zu kommen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Flugplan ====&lt;br /&gt;
Beginnen wir mit dem VATSIM Flugplan. Dieser Flugplan hat im Wesentlichen zwei Aufgaben:&lt;br /&gt;
Zum einen dient er den Controllern im VATSIM Netzwerk dazu, deinen Abflug/Ankunfts - Flughafen, sowie Route und Callsign zu&lt;br /&gt;
zeigen. Er soll aber auch dazu verwendet werden, um anderen Piloten Einsicht in deine Absichten zu geben. Falls also gerade&lt;br /&gt;
kein Controller online ist, können Piloten in deiner Umgebung erkennen, ob sich eine gefährliche Annäherung zu dir entwickelt&lt;br /&gt;
oder nicht.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir müssen nun also eine gültige Route und die passende Flughöhe dazu finden. Dazu besuchen wir die Seite&lt;br /&gt;
[http://vatroute.net/ http://vatroute.net]. Du siehst auf den ersten Blick, dass du lediglich zwei Felder ausfüllen musst: den Abflugs- und&lt;br /&gt;
den Ankunftsort. Geben wir also den ICAO Code [[LOWW]] für Wien als Abflugsort und [[LOWS]] für Salzburg als Ankunftsort&lt;br /&gt;
ein. Klicke nun auf '''Go!'''. Wir sehen nun unsere Route und links daneben den Bereich aus dem wir unsere Flughöhe wählen.&lt;br /&gt;
 Achtung! Behalte diese Seite im Hintergrund in deinem Browser immer offen! Wir werden sie noch&lt;br /&gt;
 des öfteren brauchen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Jetzt werden wir den VATSIM Flugplan Schritt für Schritt ausfüllen. Besuche dazu die Seite von [http://vatsim.net VATSIM]. Unter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Pilots Resources&amp;quot; findest du den Punkt &amp;quot;File Flightplan&amp;quot;. Den Flugplan kann man auch im jeweiligen Pilotenclient&lt;br /&gt;
([[FSInn]], [[Squawkbox]], [[XSquawkbox]]) abgeben. Um aber ein einhetiliches Manual zu gewährleisten machen wir das direkt&lt;br /&gt;
über die [[VATSIM]] Seite (der aufgegebene Flugplan ist dann für 2 Stunden gültig).&lt;br /&gt;
Detailierte Informationen über den VATSIM Flugplan findest du auch&lt;br /&gt;
[http://usa-w.vatsim.net/prc/VPTPublic/122/122a/122a.htm hier]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Type =====&lt;br /&gt;
Hier geben wir an, ob wir den Flug nach Instrumentenflugregeln ([[IFR]]) oder Sichtflugregeln ([[VFR]]) durchführen wollen.&lt;br /&gt;
Wir wählen zunächst '''[[IFR]]'''. An anderer Stelle findest du einen VFR Beispielflug. Ausserdem wird dir dein Mentor sicher&lt;br /&gt;
gerne Fragen über [[IFR]] und [[VFR]] beantworten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Callsign =====&lt;br /&gt;
Das Callsign ist jener Rufame eines Flugzeuges den der Controller auf seinem Radarschrim erblickt und über den er einen&lt;br /&gt;
Piloten auf der Funkfrequenz ruft. Wählen wir hier das Callsign '''AUA9834'''.&lt;br /&gt;
Meistens bestehen die Callsigns in der Realität aus dem Operator (AUA = Austrian) und der eigentlichen Flugnummer,&lt;br /&gt;
welche aus Buchstaben und Zahlen bestehen kann. Nach welchen Regeln ein Callsign in der Realität aufgebaut wird, sei hier&lt;br /&gt;
nicht weiter erwähnt. Wie der genaue Funkrufname (z.B.: DLH = Lufthansa) eines Callsigns lautet siehst du auch&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.airlinecodes.co.uk/airlcodesearch.asp hier]. Du kannst auch gerne jedes andere Callsign verwenden, welches so&lt;br /&gt;
real wie möglich ist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Achtung: Im VATSIM Netzwerk wird es gerne gesehen, wenn möglichst reale Callsigns verwendet&lt;br /&gt;
 werden. Also das ICAO Callsign &amp;quot;AUA&amp;quot; und nicht z.B. das IATA Zeichen &amp;quot;OS&amp;quot; (welches auf&lt;br /&gt;
 Flugtickets oder Passagierinformationen zu finden ist) für Austrian Airlines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Aircraft Type =====&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle hier deinen Flugzeugtyp aus. Welche Bezeichnung eingefügt werden muss kannst du&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.icao.int/anb/ais/8643/index.cfm hier] oder [http://usa-w.vatsim.net/prc/VPTPublic/pdfs/ac.pdf hier]&lt;br /&gt;
in Erfahrung bringen.&lt;br /&gt;
Welches Special Equipment du angeben musst kannst du&lt;br /&gt;
[http://usa-w.vatsim.net/prc/VPTPublic/122/122a/122a.htm hier] einsehen.&lt;br /&gt;
Generell (vor allem bei moderneren Flugzeugen) kannst du in diesem Feld folgendes eintragen: '''T/&amp;quot;aircraft type&amp;quot;/W'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== True Airspeed =====&lt;br /&gt;
Hier gibst du an wie schnell du auf Reiseflughöhe sein wirst. Mit Flugzeugen wie der Boeing 737 oder einem Airbus wirst du&lt;br /&gt;
zwischen 420 und 470 Knoten schnell sein. Falls du den genauen Wert deines Flugzeuges kennt kannst du ihn hier eintragen,&lt;br /&gt;
falls nicht wählen wir den Wert 450 Knoten. Ein genauer Wert ist nicht notwendig, der Wert sollte aber plausibel sein.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Departure Point =====&lt;br /&gt;
Für unseren Beispielflug wählen wir Wien als Abflugort. Der ICAO Code für Wien lautet [[LOWW]]. Welche Stadt bzw. welcher&lt;br /&gt;
Flughafen welchen ICAO Code hat, siehst du [http://www.airlinecodes.co.uk/aptcodesearch.asp hier].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Departure Time =====&lt;br /&gt;
Gib hier deine geplante Abflugzeit an. Format: HHMM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Cruising Altidude =====&lt;br /&gt;
Die Reiseflughöhe wird in diesem Feld in Flightlevel angegeben. FL = Höhe in Fuß / 100 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sprich: FL320 = 32000ft&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Wir öffnen nun wieder unsere Flugplan Seite von [http://vatroute.net/ VATRoute] die noch im Hintergrund geöffnet sein sollte. Wir sehen bei 1), dass die Route die wir gefunden haben nur für eine Höhe von FL076 bis FL160 gültig ist. Die relativ geringe Höhe ist einfach zu erklären: Der Flug von Wien nach Salzburg ist sehr kurz. Höher als heir angegeben zu steigen zahlt sich daher nicht aus. Da wir aber trotzdem eine möglichst große Höhe erreichen wollen, geben wir 160 ein (= Flightlevel 160 = 16000ft).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Route of flight =====&lt;br /&gt;
Wir tragen hier unsere Route ein. In unserem Fall sehen wir im Briefing die Route '''SITNI L856 SBG'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nun, wie ist dies zu interpretieren? Der erste Navigationspunkt nach dem Abflug in Wien ist SITNI. Punkte deren Name aus 5 Buchstaben besteht werden als Intersection bezeichnet. Wenn wir SITNI erreicht haben, fliegen wir weiter auf dem Airway L856 bis zum Punkt SBG. Auf dem airway selbst passieren wir noch die Intersections BAGSI und MATIG, diese werden aber nicht mehr extra im Flugplan angegeben, passieren müssen wir sie aber schon. Punkte mit 3 Buchstaben sind VOR's bzw NDB's, wobei NDB's auch nur 2 Buchstaben im Namen haben können. Ab Salzburg sind wir spätestens im Anflug auf den Flughafen Salzburg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Destination =====&lt;br /&gt;
Unser Flugziel, der Flughafen Salzburg wird hier eingetragen, also '''LOWS'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Estimated Time Enroute =====&lt;br /&gt;
Die Flugzeit wird nicht mehr als ca. 30 Minuten dauern. Tragen wir also bei Hours '''00''' und bei Minutes '''30''' ein.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Voice Capabilities =====&lt;br /&gt;
Da du sicherlich ein Headset mit Mikrofon besitzt, wähle hier '''Full Voice'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solltest du mit FSINN unterwegs sein, dann kannst du dem Fluglotsen mit folgenden Zeichen in der Remark-Section mitteilen, dass du Voice, Text oder Read only ausgestattet bist:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''/V/''' = Der Pilot kann Flugfunk hören und auch senden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''/T/''' = Der Pilot kann Textmitteilungen empfangen und wird sie auch als Text zurücksenden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''/R/''' = Der Pilot kann Flugfunk empfangen. Die Antwort kommt jedoch auf Text zurück.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wichtig dabei ist, dass der Buchstabe V, T oder R zwischen zwei Slashes steht, da ansonsten dein Equipment nicht erkannt wird und der Fluglotse somit nicht weiß, wie er den Piloten kontaktieren soll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Remarks =====&lt;br /&gt;
Für dich als Anfänger ein sehr wichtiges Feld. Hier solltest du unbedingt '''Newbie - speak slowly and clear - be patient''' eintragen. Dadurch werden die Controller darauf aufmerksam gemacht, dass du Anfänger bist und werden deshalb ganz besonders darauf achten, dich gesichert zum Ziel zu lotsen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Fuel On Board =====&lt;br /&gt;
Hier wird die Zeit eingetragen für die der Treibstoff ausreicht. Da man immer Reserven für 1 Stunde zusätzlich tanken sollte, trage bei Hours '''01''' und bei Minutes '''30''' ein. Wenn du für diese Zeit tankst, bist du auf jeden Fall auf der sicheren Seite. Noch besser wäre Treibstoff für 2 Stunden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Alternate Airport =====&lt;br /&gt;
Gib hier deinen Ausweichflughafen an, den du anfliegen wirst falls du aus irgend einem Grund nicht in Salzburg landen kannst (schlechte Wetterbedingungen, etc). Für unseren Flug würde sich München anbieten. Trage also '''EDDM''' in das Feld ein.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Pilot's Name and Aircraft Home Base =====&lt;br /&gt;
Wie immer im VATSIM, trage hier deinen realen Vor- und Nachnamen ein, sowie den nächst gelegenen Airport deiner Heimat ein.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Z.b.: '''Max Muster LOWW'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== VATSIM ID / VATSIM Passwort =====&lt;br /&gt;
Zum Schluss noch deine VATSIM ID und das Passwort. Klicke danach auf '''File Flight Plan'''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nun ist unser Flugplan ausgefüllt und gesendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== ATIS ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Spätestens jetzt solltest du deinen Flugsimulator starten und dich in dein virtuelles Cockpit am Abflugort Wien begeben. Stell dich zum Gate 31 und log dich mit deinem Pilotenclient ein (du brauchst keine Multiplayer Session zu starten - die Squawkbox oder FSInn, je nachdem was du benutzt, machen dies in den Standardeinstellungen für dich). Gehen wir davon aus, dass du dich mit AUA123 (Austrian123) eingeloggt hast. Du kannst aber auch jedes andere realistische Callsign verwenden. Beachte, dass du das selbse Callsign, sowie deinen realen Vor- und Nachnamen verwendest, wie schon im Flugplan. Versichere dich, dass dein Transponder auf Mode Standby steht. Falls keine Controller online sind, setze die UNICOM-Frequenz 122.800, auf der du dich per Text mit anderen Piloten absprechen kannst. Damit ihr euch nicht gegenseitig behindert. Falls der Tower in Wien online ist müssen wir zuerst die ATIS Information abrufen. Diese ist entweder als Sprachaufzeichnung mit dem Callsign LOWW_ATIS vorhanden auf der Frequenz 122.950, oder als Text. Die Text-ATIS erhältst du in deinem Pilotenclient (z.B. Squawkbox) wenn du auf die Frequenz des Tower Controller wechselst.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Gehen wir davon aus, dass der Tower in Wien online und eine Voice-ATIS vorhanden ist. Hör dir zuerst die ATIS an, um die Informationen für den Abflug zu erhalten. Setze dazu die Frequenz 122.950. Du wirst nun die wichtigsten Informationen für den Abflug in Wien hören. Notiere die folgenden Punkte:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Information&lt;br /&gt;
*Wind&lt;br /&gt;
*QNH&lt;br /&gt;
*Departure Runway&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Wind''': wird in diesem Format angegeben xxx/yy&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
xxx steht für die Richtung aus der der Wind kommt. yy ist die Windgeschwindigkeit in Knoten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Anmerkung: Du solltest zum Start immer die Runway wählen, die gegen den Wind verläuft&lt;br /&gt;
 um maximalen Auftrieb zu erhalten. Beachte diesen Grundsatz, falls kein Tower online ist,&lt;br /&gt;
 der die richtige Wahl für die Runways trifft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Vorbereitung zum Abflug ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab jetzt solltest du unbedingt Charts haben. Zu finden sind diese auf der [http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=CHARTS_OVERVIEW Chart-Seite] unserer Homepage. Du benötigst die Charts von LOWW und LOWS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== SID (Standard Instrument Departure) =====&lt;br /&gt;
Nehmen wir an, dass die Departure Runway 29 ist. Suche in den Charts von LOWW die SIDS (standard instrument departure) für die Runway 29. Laut unserem Briefing haben wir als ersten Wegpunkt SITNI in unserer Route. In den Charts wirst du bei der Runway 29 die SITNI4C SID finden. Das ist die Route die uns nach dem Abheben zum Wegpunkt SITNI führen wird. Ab diesem Punkt folgen wir der Route aus dem Briefing. Noch ist allerdings nicht sicher, dass wir dieser SID folgen werden. Mehr dazu später.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== FMC (Flight Management Computer) =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starte nun das Programm vasFMC, das schon einmal angesprochen wurde. Füge zuerst LOWW ein. Du wirst gefragt welche Runway du benutzen wirst. Da wir ja die ATIS abgehört haben wissen wir, dass die Runway 29 die aktive für Starts ist, wähle also diese. Danach kopierst du die Route aus dem Briefing und gibst sie in das vasFMC Eingabefeld ein. vasFMC wird die Wegpunkte die sich auf der Route befinden, automatisch hinzu fügen. Zum Schluss gibst du noch LOWS ein. Hier wirst du wieder gefragt welche Runway benutzt wird. Da wir das noch nicht wissen, wähle irgend eine Runway.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle jetzt noch AP-Couple an. Das FMC wird dadurch mit deinem Autopilot gekoppelt. Wenn du später nach dem HDG fliegst, wird dies automatisch von vasFMC vorgegeben, um auf der Route zu bleiben.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Der Flug ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dein Flieger sollte jetzt also Startklar sein. Treibstoff ist getankt, das FMC programmiert und du hast einen kleinen Notizblock oder Zettel zur Hand.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Der erste Kontakt ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird Zeit uns erstmals zu melden. Falls Delivery online ist, melden wir uns zuerst bei Delivery, falls Ground online ist, bei Ground und wenn Ground nicht online ist beim Tower und zwar immer in dieser Reihenfolge. Du meldest dich immer bei der &amp;quot;niedrigsten&amp;quot; Station die für deinen Startflughafen verfügbar ist. Welche Frequenz du rasten musst, ist aus den Charts ersichtlich.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unser erster Funkspruch wird dazu dienen, um festzustellen ob das Headset funktioniert und der Controller dich versteht. Wir sind Austrian123 und haben dies auch im Flugplan angegeben und uns mit diesem Callsign (AUA123) eingeloggt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Delivery, Austrian 123, radio check&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Delivery: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, read you five by five&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn der Controller five by five sagt, hört er dich klar und deutlich.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Flugfreigabe ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir müssen nun unsere Flugfreigabe fordern, damit wir unser Flugzeug überhaupt bewegen dürfen und um sicher zu gehen, dass der Controller unseren Flugplan mit der Route und Höhe akzeptiert. Weiters, teilen wir mit, dass wir die aktuelle ATIS abgehört haben. Deshalb geben wir die aktuelle Information an, die wir vorhin notiert haben. Gehen wir von der Information D (Delta) aus. Mit dieser Flugfreigabe (Clearence) erhalten wir auch die SID und unseren Transponder Code, sowie den lokalen Luftdruck, das QNH.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Delivery, Austrian 123, &amp;lt;dein Flugzeugtyp&amp;gt;, (at gate/stand 31), request IFR clearence to Salzburg, Information DELTA received&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Delivery: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, cleared to destination Salzburg via SITNI4C departure, initially climb 5000 feet, squawk 4605, QNH &lt;br /&gt;
 1016, (Information DELTA correct)&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Du musst immer zurücklesen was der Controller dir sagt (=Readback). Ein simples roger, yes, no genügt nicht. Nach dem Readback, sagst du nocheinmal das Callsign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;cleared to Destination Salzburg via SITNI4C departure, intitially 5000 feet, Squawk 4605, QNH 1016, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Delivery: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, readback correct, for start-up and pushback contact Wien Ground 121.600&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot; Contact Wien Ground 121.600, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delivery hat uns also die Flugfreigabe gegeben. Du hast richtig zurückgelesen und deshalb weiß der Controller, dass du seine Anweisungen verstanden hast. Aus diesem Grund schickt er dich zu Ground. Du hast folgendes notiert:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*SID: entspricht unserer Planung, wir müssen nichts ändern&lt;br /&gt;
*initially 5000 feet: wir dürfen nach dem Abheben nur auf 5000 ft steigen, bis wir andere Anweisungen erhalten&lt;br /&gt;
*Squawk 4605: das ist der Transponder Code den wir setzen müssen.&lt;br /&gt;
*QNH 1016: Stelle dein Barometer(Altimeter) auf den Wert 1016. Das ist der Luftdruck den wir bis zur Transition Altitude (=5000ft in Wien, ersichtlich aus Charts) als Referenz für unseren Höhenmesser verwenden. Über dieser Höhe stellen wir den Weltweiten Standardluftdruck 1013 ein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pushback und Taxi ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Du hast alles eingestellt, bist auf der Frequenz von Wien Ground, hast deine Checklisten abgearbeitet und bist bereit zum start-up. Wir erbitten nun die Freigabe dafür.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Ground, servus, Austrian 123, request start-up&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, start-up approved&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;start-up approved, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn wir alle Checklisten durch haben, alles gesetzt ist und wir bereit für den pushback sind, melden wir das dem Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, request pushback&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, pushback approved&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;pushback approved, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventuell sagt der Controller noch dazu:&lt;br /&gt;
 ...''pushback approved facing east/west/south'' oder ''north''...&lt;br /&gt;
Generell solltest du aber selbst wissen was die vernünftigste Variante ist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Du bist also mit dem pushback fertig, die Triebwerke laufen. Nun fragen wir nach dem taxi. Das ist kein gelbes Taxi, sondern das Rollen zur aktiven Piste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Ground, Austrian 123, ready for taxi&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, taxi to holding point runway 29 vie EX10 and MIKE&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;taxi to holding point runway 29 via EX10 and MIKE, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sollen also über die Taxiways Exit10 und M (=MIKE) zum Rollhalt der Piste 29 rollen und dort warten. Nicht auf die Runway rollen !!!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Give way Anweisungen =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Du bist online nicht alleine unterwegs. Darum muss der Controller Flugzeuge vor dem Zusammenstoß bewahren, am Boden und in der Luft. Am Boden funktioniert das relativ einfach, indem er einem Piloten mitteilt, einen anderen vorbei zu lassen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, give way to Boeing 737, crossing from left to the right&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;giving way to Boeing 737, from left to right, Austrian123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sollen also die Boeing vorbei lassen die unseren Weg von links nach rechts kreuzt. Weiters kann der Controller sagen, dass du einem anderen Flugzeug z.B. zur aktiven Piste folgen sollst.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, follow preceeding Boeing 747 to holding point runway 29&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;follow the Boeing 747 to holding point runway 29, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es kann auch passieren, dass du einer &amp;quot;company aircraft&amp;quot; folgen oder Platz machen sollst, das heißt du sollst einem bestimmten Flugzeug aus deiner Airline Platz machen (Austrian).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kurz bevor wir den Rollhalt der Piste 29 erreichen, wird uns Ground zum Tower schicken.&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, contact Wien Tower 119.400&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Contact Tower 119.400, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Departure ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schalte nun den Transponder auf &amp;quot;Mode CHARLIE&amp;quot;. Wir melden uns beim Tower:&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Tower, Austrian 123, (approaching holding point runway 29), ready for departure&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
Falls wir Glück haben und wenig Verkehr herrscht, bekommen wir unverzüglich die Starterlaubnis.&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, wind xxx/yy, runway 29, cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
Das Wort takeoff darf erst dann verwendet werden, wenn es sich wirklich um die eigentliche Startfreigabe handelt.&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;runway 29, cleared for takeoff, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Conditional Clearence =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ein besonderes &amp;quot;Werkzeug&amp;quot; des Controllers sind conditional clearences. Diese Freigaben gelten für dich erst, wenn bestimmte Umstände eingetreten sind. Ein Beispiel:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Du stehst am Rollhalt Piste 29. Gleichzeitig anfliegender Verkehr auf die Piste 29 ist 3 Meilen entfernt. 6 Meilen dahinter ist ebenfalls anfliegender Verkehr auf die Piste 29. Bei viel Verkehr wird der Controller dich zwischen diesen Anflügen, starten lassen, um den Verkehr besser fließen zu lassen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, traffic on 3nm final runway 29, Airbus A320, report in sight&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
Der Controller fragt ob wir den anfliegenden Verkehr in Sicht haben, um eine Verwechslungsgefahr auszuschließen, gibt er noch die Entfernung und den Flugzeugtyp an. Nur wenn wir Sichtkontakt zum Flugzeug haben, darf der Controller uns die conditional clearence erteilen.&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;traffic in sight, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, behind landing Airbus A320/traffic, line up runway 29 and wait behind&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
Wir dürfen also erst nach dem landenden Airbus auf die Piste 29 rollen und sollen dann warten (=stehen bleiben). Der Controller sagt zwei mal &amp;quot;behind&amp;quot; um sicher zu stellen, dass wir auch wirklich erst nach dem Airbus aufrollen. Wenn der Airbus passiert hat, sollten wir allerdings unverzüglich aufrollen um bereit für einen schnellen Start zu sein, schließlich ist der nächste Anflug bereits ca. 5-6 Meilen entfernt. Sobald der Airbus die Piste verlassen hat, werden wir die Starterlaubnis bekommen (siehe oben).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Intersection Departure =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oft kommt es vor, dass der Ground oder Tower Lotse dich fragen wird, ob du auch von einer Intersection starten kannst. Eine Intersection ist eine Kreuzung zwischen Runway und Taxiway. Dies kann passieren falls der Verkehr es erfordert, oder der Controller möchte dir einfach nur den langen Weg bis zum Holding Point ersparen. Eine Möglichkeit ist die Intersection A3 (siehe Charts). In diesem Fall würde die Phraseologie so aussehen:&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground/Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, ready/able for intersection departure from A3?&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
Falls wir nichts dagegen haben und auch aus technischer Sicht nichts dagegen spricht, teilen wir das dem Controller mit.&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;affirmative, (ready for intersection A3), Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground/Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, taxi to holding point runway 29, Intersection A3 via M&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn wir nicht von einer Intersection starten können:&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;negative/unable, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Die Starterlaubnis ist wieder gleich:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, wind xxx/yy, runway 29, cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;runway 29, cleared for takeoff, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Immediate Departure =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Was vor allem bei viel Verkehr passieren kann, ist folgende Situation: Du bist auf dem Weg zum Holding Point Runway 29 und erreichst diesen gerade. Gleichzeitig ist eine Maschine im Anflug auf die Runway 29 und ist noch 6 Meilen entfernt. Der Controller wird dich fragen ob du in der Lage bist unverzüglich auf die Runway zu rollen und zu starten, damit du noch vor dem anfliegenden Verkehr abgehoben bist. Falls dies zutrifft und du tatsächlich ohne Verzögerung und stehen bleiben starten kannst, teile dem Controller das mit (natürlich sollte das Funken in so einer Situation ohne Stottern, schnell und deutlich passieren):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, are you ready for immediate departure runway 29?&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;affirmative, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, wind xxx/yy, runway 29, cleared for immediate takeoff&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Cleared for immediate takeoff, runway 29, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mit dem Wort ''immediate'' macht dir der Controller noch einmal klar, dass du dir keine Zeit lassen darfst. Um es verständlicher auszudrücken: Er meint damit ''Gib Gas!!''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kurz nach dem Abheben, verweist uns Tower auf Approach oder Center (beide heißen Wien Radar), je nachdem wer online ist.&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, contact Wien Radar 128.200&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Radar 128.200, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reiseflug / Enroute ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir melden uns bei Radar, und der Controller wird uns unverzüglich eine größere Höhe (wahrscheinlich unsere Reiseflughöhe) anordnen, unter der Vorraussetzung, dass er uns korrekt identifiziert hat. Dazu müssen wir ihm folgende Punkte mitteilen:&lt;br /&gt;
*Callsign&lt;br /&gt;
*aktuelle Höhe&lt;br /&gt;
*freigegebene Höhe&lt;br /&gt;
*SID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Außerdem muss der Transponder auf Mode &amp;quot;CHARLIE&amp;quot; stehen, also aktiv sein.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Radar, Austrian 123, 3000 feet, climbing 5000 feet, SITNI4C departure&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Radar: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, identified, climb FL160&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;climb FL160, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jetzt können wir uns erstmal zurücklehnen, auch wenn es nicht lange dauert bis wir Salzburg erreichen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Descent / Top of Descent (ToD) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nach einiger Zeit sollten wir langsam aber sicher in den Sinkflug übergehen. Der Punkt an dem der Sinkflug begonnen wird, nennt sich Top of Descent. Um diesen Punkt zu errechnen gibt es einige Faustformeln. Generell kann man sagen, dass die abzubauende Höhe in Flightlevel dividiert durch 3 die Distanz zum Zielort ergibt, ab der man sinken sollte.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unser Beispiel:&lt;br /&gt;
 FL160 auf ca. 1000ft (Höhe des Airports über dem Meer) -&amp;gt; FL150 : 3 = 50nm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn man also 40-50nm vor Salzburg bei einem Groundspeed zwischen 400 und 450 Knoten bei ca. 1700-2000 ft / min sinkt ist man auf der sicheren Seite. Falls dieser Punkt erreicht wird und der Controller dir noch keine Anweisungen zum Sinken gegeben hat, weise ihn darauf hin, dass du sinken willst, da du selbst dafür verantwortlich bist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, request (ready for) descent&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Meistens wird dir der Controller dann eine Anweisung zum Sinken geben, die du selbstverständlich wieder zurücklesen musst.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Radar: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, descend FL120, contact Salzburg Radar 123.720&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;descend FL120, contact Salzburg Radar 123.720, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Vectoring und Approach ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ein wesentlicher Teil des Fluges, der vom Piloten besondere Aufmerksamkeit fordert, ist der Anflug. Hier wird einem Piloten in der Regel ein sogenanntes Vectoring gegeben. Das heißt, dass der Controller (in diesem Fall Salzburg Radar) dir zusätzlich zu den Höhenanweisungen auch Richtungsanweisungen gibt. Du musst dann diese Richtung (Heading) fliegen und wie immer die Anweisungen zurücklesen, damit der Controller sicher gehen kann, dass du seine Anweisungen erhalten hast. Das Vectoring führt dich direkt bis zum Endanflug in den du dann freigegeben wirst. Der Anflug ist im Normalfall ein [[ILS]]-Approach. Der Controller wird dir auch mitteilen welchen Anflug auf welche Piste du erwarten kannst, damit du rechtzeitig deine NAV-Frequenzen setzen und dich auf den Anflug vorbereiten kannst.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Salzburg Radar, Austrian 123, FL120, Information B, inbound SBG VOR&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Radar: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, servus, Information B correct, expect radar vectors ILS approach runway 16, descend FL80, turn right/left heading 260&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''descend FL80, right/left heading 260, expect radar vectors ILS approach runway 16&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sollen also auf FL80 sinken und nach rechts/links auf Kurs 260 drehen. Ausserdem teilt uns der Controller mit, dass in Salzburg die ATIS Information BRAVO gültig ist, damit wir überprüfen können ob wir diese abgehört haben. Setze das Heading 260 in deinem Autopiloten bzw. fliege den Kurs per Hand wenn du ein geübter Pilot bist.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 '''Achtung''': Wenn du vasFMC verwendest musst du unbedingt vor dem ersten Einstellen eines Headings AP-Couple deaktivieren, da&lt;br /&gt;
 sonst deine Eingaben von vasFMC immer wieder überschrieben werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Du wirst eventuell noch weitere Headings und Höhenanweisungen bekommen. Zwischendurch wird dir der Controller auch den zu erwartenden Anflug mitteilen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Radar: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, descend FL60&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;descend FL60, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Langsam wird es spannend. Der Controller wird uns jeden Moment mitteilen, dass wir für den Anflug freigegeben sind. Setze noch schnell die NAV-Frequenz 109.90 für den ILS Anflug auf die Piste 16 in Salzburg. Zufinden sind alle wichtigen Informationen wie immer in den Charts, die bei keinem Flug fehlen dürfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Radar: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, descend altitude 4000 ft, QNH 1015, turn left heading 190, cleared ILS approach runway 16&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;descend 4000 ft, QNH 1015, turn left heading 190, cleared ILS approach runway 16, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vielleicht relativ viel Information auf einmal. Deshalb sollte auch hier der Notizzettel greifbar sein. Wir müssen also auf die Höhe (nicht Flightlevel!!) 4000ft sinken. Sobald wir auf oder unter die Transition Altitude friegegeben werden, ist automatisch vom lokalen QNH als Referenz auszugehen, das uns der Controller auch mitteilt, bei diesem Beispiel 1015. Weiters müssen wir auf Kurs 190 drehen um das ILS einzufangen. Stelle also die Höhe, das QNH sowie das Heading so schnell wie möglich ein. Achte nun darauf den [[Localizer]] und in weiterer Folge den [[Glideslope]] einzufangen. Sobald sich die Anzeige in Richtung Mitte bewegt, drücke den LOC bzw später den APP-Button (abhängig vom Flugzeug). Wenn der Controller am Radarschirm erkennt, dass wir am ILS sind wird er uns an den Tower übergeben. Es kann aber auch sein, dass er uns die Anweisung gibt ihm zu melden, dass wir uns am ILS befinden. In diesem Fall würde die Phrase oben ergänzt werde durch:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ''&amp;quot;...report established&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn wir also &amp;quot;established&amp;quot; sind schickt uns Salzburg Radar zum Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Radar: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, contact Salzburg Tower 118.100 &amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Contact Salzburg Tower 118.100, Austrian 123 &amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landung ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir wechseln auf die Tower Frequenz und melden uns so bald als möglich, damit wir noch genug Zeit im Endanflug haben.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Salzburg Tower, servus, Austrian 123, established ILS runway 16&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, Wind xxx/yy runway 16, cleared to land&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;runway 16, cleared to land, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Glück gehabt, kein Verkehr auf der 16 und somit erhalten wir unverzüglich die Freigabe zur Landung. Wäre jemand vor uns bei der Landung, würde der Tower-Controller in etwas das sagen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ''&amp;quot;...wind xxx/yy, continue approach number 2&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fast geschafft. Das Fahrwerk ist draußen, alles ist gechecked und wir setzen sanft auf. Wir verlassen die Runway und halten dann, da wir noch keine weiteren Freigaben erhalten haben. Vergiss nicht den Transponder wieder auf Mode &amp;quot;Standby&amp;quot; zu schalten, sobald du am Boden bist und die Runway verlassen hast. Entweder schickt uns der Tower jetzt zu Ground (wenn online) oder er gibt uns selbst die Anweisungen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Angenommen die Bahn wurde über ECHO (E) verlassen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, taxi to stand W4 via L(LIMA)and Exit 4&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;taxi to stand W4 via LIMA and Exit 4&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir rollen also zur Parkposition W4. Dort melden wir uns ein letztes Mal beim Controller&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123 at stand W4, shutting down&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, danke für den Flug, servus!&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;request leaving&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;request frequency change&amp;quot; oder andere Phrasen, sind nicht notwendig.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, das war's! Der erste Online Flug ist vorrüber. Ab jetzt heißt es üben, üben, üben! Der Rest kommt im Laufe der Zeit von ganz alleine. Je mehr Flüge du absolviert hast, desto mehr Erfahrung wirst du haben und du wirst die Prozeduren irgendwann im Schlaf beherrschen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tipps und Hinweise ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Die ersten Schritte ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nachdem du dich bei VATSIM und auch auf der [http://www.vacc-austria.org VACC Austria Homepage] registriert hast, kannst du im [http://forum.vacc-austria.org/index.php Forum] nach Hilfe fragen. Du solltest auch hier im Wiki diverse Dokumente durchlesen. Danach stellst du dich mit deinem Flieger nach Wien, loggst dich ein und hörst für den Anfang einfach nur zu. Notiere dir Dinge die unklar sind und frage im Forum nach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Grundlegende VATSIM Regeln. ====&lt;br /&gt;
*Niemals auf einer Piste einloggen&lt;br /&gt;
*Keine Pause-Taste im Flugsimulator verwenden&lt;br /&gt;
*Realistische Callsigns verwenden&lt;br /&gt;
*immer den realen Vor- und Nachnamen verwenden&lt;br /&gt;
*immer den Anweisungen von Controllern folge leisten&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lies dir unbedingt folgende VATSIM-Dokumente durch:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.vatsim.net/library/codeofconduct.pdf Code of Conduct]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.vatsim.net/library/codeofregs.pdf Code of Regulations]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tipps für den Flug ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Am Funk: Denken, drücken, sprechen!&lt;br /&gt;
*Notizen: schreibe dir alles auf was der Controller dir sagt!&lt;br /&gt;
*Wenn du etwas nicht verstehst, nachfragen statt falsch machen!&lt;br /&gt;
*Fliege niemals ohne Charts und wirf einen kurzen Blick auf diese bevor du fliegst!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Wo finde ich Hilfe? ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.vatsim.net/prc/ Pilot Ressource Center]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://forum.vacc-austria.org/index.php VACC Austria Forum]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php VACC Austria Wiki]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Pilots]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Example_Flight&amp;diff=2610</id>
		<title>Example Flight</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Example_Flight&amp;diff=2610"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:50:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Callsign */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Beispielflug für neue Piloten ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Einleitung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Dieser Flug, den wir Schritt für Schritt gemeinsam durchgehen wollen, soll dir einen ersten Auszug aus der Faszination der virtuellen Fliegerei&lt;br /&gt;
im [[VATSIM]] Netzwerk geben. Wenn du dich an diesem Tutorial orientierst kann eigentlich nichts schief gehen. Es wäre sehr&lt;br /&gt;
empfehlenswert dir einen&lt;br /&gt;
Termin mit deinem Mentor zu vereinbaren, damit ihr dieses Tutorial gemeinsam durcharbeiten könnt (z.B. über [[TeamSpeak]],&lt;br /&gt;
[[Skype]], etc.). Falls du&lt;br /&gt;
der Meinung bist, dass du das auch alleine packst können wir jetzt beginnen. Dein erster Flug wird von Wien nach Salzburg&lt;br /&gt;
führen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Benötigte Software ===&lt;br /&gt;
Bevor es an die eigentliche Flugvorbereitung geht, sollten wir besprechen welche Software du verwendest bzw. welche Programme du benötigst.&lt;br /&gt;
==== Flugsimulator ====&lt;br /&gt;
Ich gehe davon aus, dass du bereits einen Flugsimulator installiert hast. Folgende Simulatoren laufen mit der [[VATSIM]] spezifischen Software&lt;br /&gt;
(Squawkbox, FsInn, XSquawkbox) problemlos:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Microsoft Flight Simulator 2004 ([[Squawkbox]], [[FsInn]])&lt;br /&gt;
*X-Plane 8.xx ([[XSquawkbox]])&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Sonstige Software ====&lt;br /&gt;
Die meisten, am Markt erhältlichen Payware Flieger, haben sehr detailierte FMCs oder ähnliche Navigationseinrichtungen. Da&lt;br /&gt;
heutzutage auch in der Realität oft&lt;br /&gt;
ein FMC/FMS zum Einsatz kommt, wollen wir bei diesem Tutorial [[vasFMC]] als Referenz verwenden.&lt;br /&gt;
Mit diesem FMC kann fast jedes Freeware-Flugzeug verwendet werden.&lt;br /&gt;
Weiters ist es von Vorteil Tools wie [[VATSpy]] zu verwenden. Tools wie diese können dir&lt;br /&gt;
dabei helfen besetzte ATC Stationen zu finden und den Verkehr in deiner Umgebung im Auge zu behalten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Beachte: Vor diesem Tutorial sollte die Dokumentation/Readme der jeweiligen Software und die Software danach konfiguriert werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Flugvorbereitung ===&lt;br /&gt;
Wie in der Realität, ist es auch bei [[VATSIM]] notwendig eine möglichst genaue Flugplanung durchzuführen, um auf gesicherten&lt;br /&gt;
Routen zum Zielflughafen zu kommen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Flugplan ====&lt;br /&gt;
Beginnen wir mit dem VATSIM Flugplan. Dieser Flugplan hat im Wesentlichen zwei Aufgaben:&lt;br /&gt;
Zum einen dient er den Controllern im VATSIM Netzwerk dazu, deinen Abflug/Ankunfts - Flughafen, sowie Route und Callsign zu&lt;br /&gt;
zeigen. Er soll aber auch dazu verwendet werden, um anderen Piloten Einsicht in deine Absichten zu geben. Falls also gerade&lt;br /&gt;
kein Controller online ist, können Piloten in deiner Umgebung erkennen, ob sich eine gefährliche Annäherung zu dir entwickelt&lt;br /&gt;
oder nicht.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir müssen nun also eine gültige Route und die passende Flughöhe dazu finden. Dazu besuchen wir die Seite&lt;br /&gt;
[http://vatroute.net/ http://vatroute.net]. Du siehst auf den ersten Blick, dass du lediglich zwei Felder ausfüllen musst: den Abflugs- und&lt;br /&gt;
den Ankunftsort. Geben wir also den ICAO Code [[LOWW]] für Wien als Abflugsort und [[LOWS]] für Salzburg als Ankunftsort&lt;br /&gt;
ein. Klicke nun auf '''Go!'''. Wir sehen nun unsere Route und links daneben den Bereich aus dem wir unsere Flughöhe wählen.&lt;br /&gt;
 Achtung! Behalte diese Seite im Hintergrund in deinem Browser immer offen! Wir werden sie noch&lt;br /&gt;
 des öfteren brauchen.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Jetzt werden wir den VATSIM Flugplan Schritt für Schritt ausfüllen. Besuche dazu die Seite von [http://vatsim.net VATSIM]. Unter&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Pilots Resources&amp;quot; findest du den Punkt &amp;quot;File Flightplan&amp;quot;. Den Flugplan kann man auch im jeweiligen Pilotenclient&lt;br /&gt;
([[FSInn]], [[Squawkbox]], [[XSquawkbox]]) abgeben. Um aber ein einhetiliches Manual zu gewährleisten machen wir das direkt&lt;br /&gt;
über die [[VATSIM]] Seite (der aufgegebene Flugplan ist dann für 2 Stunden gültig).&lt;br /&gt;
Detailierte Informationen über den VATSIM Flugplan findest du auch&lt;br /&gt;
[http://usa-w.vatsim.net/prc/VPTPublic/122/122a/122a.htm hier]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Type =====&lt;br /&gt;
Hier geben wir an, ob wir den Flug nach Instrumentenflugregeln ([[IFR]]) oder Sichtflugregeln ([[VFR]]) durchführen wollen.&lt;br /&gt;
Wir wählen zunächst '''[[IFR]]'''. An anderer Stelle findest du einen VFR Beispielflug. Ausserdem wird dir dein Mentor sicher&lt;br /&gt;
gerne Fragen über [[IFR]] und [[VFR]] beantworten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Callsign =====&lt;br /&gt;
Das Callsign ist jener Rufame eines Flugzeuges den der Controller auf seinem Radarschrim erblickt und über den er einen&lt;br /&gt;
Piloten auf der Funkfrequenz ruft. Wählen wir hier das Callsign '''AUA9834'''.&lt;br /&gt;
Meistens bestehen die Callsigns in der Realität aus dem Operator (AUA = Austrian) und der eigentlichen Flugnummer,&lt;br /&gt;
welche aus Buchstaben und Zahlen bestehen kann. Nach welchen Regeln ein Callsign in der Realität aufgebaut wird, sei hier&lt;br /&gt;
nicht weiter erwähnt. Wie der genaue Funkrufname (z.B.: DLH = Lufthansa) eines Callsigns lautet siehst du auch&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.airlinecodes.co.uk/airlcodesearch.asp hier]. Du kannst auch gerne jedes andere Callsign verwenden, welches so&lt;br /&gt;
real wie möglich ist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Achtung: Im VATSIM Netzwerk wird es gerne gesehen, wenn möglichst reale Callsigns verwendet&lt;br /&gt;
 werden. Also das ICAO Callsign &amp;quot;AUA&amp;quot; und nicht z.B. das IATA Zeichen &amp;quot;OS&amp;quot; (welches auf&lt;br /&gt;
 Flugtickets oder Passagierinformationen zu finden ist) für Austrian Airlines.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Aircraft Type =====&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle hier deinen Flugzeugtyp aus. Welche Bezeichnung eingefügt werden muss kannst du&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.icao.int/anb/ais/8643/index.cfm hier] oder [http://usa-w.vatsim.net/prc/VPTPublic/pdfs/ac.pdf hier]&lt;br /&gt;
in Erfahrung bringen.&lt;br /&gt;
Welches Special Equipment du angeben musst kannst du&lt;br /&gt;
[http://usa-w.vatsim.net/prc/VPTPublic/122/122a/122a.htm hier] einsehen.&lt;br /&gt;
Generell (vor allem bei moderneren Flugzeugen) kannst du in diesem Feld folgendes eintragen: '''T/&amp;quot;aircraft type&amp;quot;/W'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== True Airspeed =====&lt;br /&gt;
Hier gibst du an wie schnell du auf Reiseflughöhe sein wirst. Mit Flugzeugen wie der Boeing 737 oder einem Airbus wirst du&lt;br /&gt;
zwischen 420 und 470 Knoten schnell sein. Falls du den genauen Wert deines Flugzeuges kennt kannst du ihn hier eintragen,&lt;br /&gt;
falls nicht wählen wir den Wert 450 Knoten. Ein genauer Wert ist nicht notwendig, der Wert sollte aber plausibel sein.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Departure Point =====&lt;br /&gt;
Für unseren Beispielflug wählen wir Wien als Abflugort. Der ICAO Code für Wien lautet [[LOWW]]. Welche Stadt bzw. welcher&lt;br /&gt;
Flughafen welchen ICAO Code hat, siehst du [http://www.airlinecodes.co.uk/aptcodesearch.asp hier].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Departure Time =====&lt;br /&gt;
Gib hier deine geplante Abflugzeit an. Format: HHMM&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Cruising Altidude =====&lt;br /&gt;
Die Reiseflughöhe wird in diesem Feld in Flightlevel angegeben. FL = Höhe in Fuß / 100 &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Sprich: FL320 = 32000ft&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Wir öffnen nun wieder unsere Flugplan Seite von [http://vatroute.net/ VATRoute] die noch im Hintergrund geöffnet sein sollte. Wir sehen bei 1), dass die Route die wir gefunden haben nur für eine Höhe von FL076 bis FL160 gültig ist. Die relativ geringe Höhe ist einfach zu erklären: Der Flug von Wien nach Salzburg ist sehr kurz. Höher als heir angegeben zu steigen zahlt sich daher nicht aus. Da wir aber trotzdem eine möglichst große Höhe erreichen wollen, geben wir 160 ein (= Flightlevel 160 = 16000ft).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Route of flight =====&lt;br /&gt;
Wir tragen hier unsere Route ein. In unserem Fall sehen wir im Briefing die Route '''SITNI L856 SBG'''.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nun, wie ist dies zu interpretieren? Der erste Navigationspunkt nach dem Abflug in Wien ist SITNI. Punkte deren Name aus 5 Buchstaben besteht werden als Intersection bezeichnet. Wenn wir SITNI erreicht haben, fliegen wir weiter auf dem Airway L856 bis zum Punkt SBG. Auf dem airway selbst passieren wir noch die Intersections BAGSI und MATIG, diese werden aber nicht mehr extra im Flugplan angegeben, passieren müssen wir sie aber schon. Punkte mit 3 Buchstaben sind VOR's bzw NDB's, wobei NDB's auch nur 2 Buchstaben im Namen haben können. Ab Salzburg sind wir spätestens im Anflug auf den Flughafen Salzburg.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Destination =====&lt;br /&gt;
Unser Flugziel, der Flughafen Salzburg wird hier eingetragen, also '''LOWS'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Estimated Time Enroute =====&lt;br /&gt;
Die Flugzeit wird nicht mehr als ca. 30 Minuten dauern. Tragen wir also bei Hours '''00''' und bei Minutes '''30''' ein.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Voice Capabilities =====&lt;br /&gt;
Da du sicherlich ein Headset mit Mikrofon besitzt, wähle hier '''Full Voice'''.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Solltest du mit FSINN unterwegs sein, dann kannst du dem Fluglotsen mit folgenden Zeichen in der Remark-Section mitteilen, dass du Voice, Text oder Read only ausgestattet bist:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''/V/''' = Der Pilot kann Flugfunk hören und auch senden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''/T/''' = Der Pilot kann Textmitteilungen empfangen und wird sie auch als Text zurücksenden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''/R/''' = Der Pilot kann Flugfunk empfangen. Die Antwort kommt jedoch auf Text zurück.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wichtig dabei ist, dass der Buchstabe V, T oder R zwischen zwei Slashes steht, da ansonsten dein Equipment nicht erkannt wird und der Fluglotse somit nicht weiß, wie er den Piloten kontaktieren soll.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Remarks =====&lt;br /&gt;
Für dich als Anfänger ein sehr wichtiges Feld. Hier solltest du unbedingt '''Newbie - speak slowly and clear - be patient''' eintragen. Dadurch werden die Controller darauf aufmerksam gemacht, dass du Anfänger bist und werden deshalb ganz besonders darauf achten, dich gesichert zum Ziel zu lotsen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Fuel On Board =====&lt;br /&gt;
Hier wird die Zeit eingetragen für die der Treibstoff ausreicht. Da man immer Reserven für 1 Stunde zusätzlich tanken sollte, trage bei Hours '''01''' und bei Minutes '''30''' ein. Wenn du für diese Zeit tankst, bist du auf jeden Fall auf der sicheren Seite. Noch besser wäre Treibstoff für 2 Stunden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Alternate Airport =====&lt;br /&gt;
Gib hier deinen Ausweichflughafen an, den du anfliegen wirst falls du aus irgend einem Grund nicht in Salzburg landen kannst (schlechte Wetterbedingungen, etc). Für unseren Flug würde sich München anbieten. Trage also '''EDDM''' in das Feld ein.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Pilot's Name and Aircraft Home Base =====&lt;br /&gt;
Wie immer im VATSIM, trage hier deinen realen Vor- und Nachnamen ein, sowie den nächst gelegenen Airport deiner Heimat ein.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Z.b.: '''Max Muster LOWW'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== VATSIM ID / VATSIM Passwort =====&lt;br /&gt;
Zum Schluss noch deine VATSIM ID und das Passwort. Klicke danach auf '''File Flight Plan'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Nun ist unser Flugplan ausgefüllt und gesendet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== ATIS ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Spätestens jetzt solltest du deinen Flugsimulator starten und dich in dein virtuelles Cockpit am Abflugort Wien begeben. Stell dich zum Gate 31 und log dich mit deinem Pilotenclient ein (du brauchst keine Multiplayer Session zu starten - die Squawkbox oder FSInn, je nachdem was du benutzt, machen dies in den Standardeinstellungen für dich). Gehen wir davon aus, dass du dich mit AUA123 (Austrian123) eingeloggt hast. Du kannst aber auch jedes andere realistische Callsign verwenden. Beachte, dass du das selbse Callsign, sowie deinen realen Vor- und Nachnamen verwendest, wie schon im Flugplan. Versichere dich, dass dein Transponder auf Mode Standby steht. Falls keine Controller online sind, setze die UNICOM-Frequenz 122.800, auf der du dich per Text mit anderen Piloten absprechen kannst. Damit ihr euch nicht gegenseitig behindert. Falls der Tower in Wien online ist müssen wir zuerst die ATIS Information abrufen. Diese ist entweder als Sprachaufzeichnung mit dem Callsign LOWW_ATIS vorhanden auf der Frequenz 122.950, oder als Text. Die Text-ATIS erhältst du in deinem Pilotenclient (z.B. Squawkbox) wenn du auf die Frequenz des Tower Controller wechselst.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Gehen wir davon aus, dass der Tower in Wien online und eine Voice-ATIS vorhanden ist. Hör dir zuerst die ATIS an, um die Informationen für den Abflug zu erhalten. Setze dazu die Frequenz 122.950. Du wirst nun die wichtigsten Informationen für den Abflug in Wien hören. Notiere die folgenden Punkte:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Information&lt;br /&gt;
*Wind&lt;br /&gt;
*QNH&lt;br /&gt;
*Departure Runway&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Wind''': wird in diesem Format angegeben xxx/yy&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
xxx steht für die Richtung aus der der Wind kommt. yy ist die Windgeschwindigkeit in Knoten.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Anmerkung: Du solltest zum Start immer die Runway wählen, die gegen den Wind verläuft&lt;br /&gt;
 um maximalen Auftrieb zu erhalten. Beachte diesen Grundsatz, falls kein Tower online ist,&lt;br /&gt;
 der die richtige Wahl für die Runways trifft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Vorbereitung zum Abflug ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ab jetzt solltest du unbedingt Charts haben. Zu finden sind diese auf der [http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=CHARTS_OVERVIEW Chart-Seite] unserer Homepage. Du benötigst die Charts von LOWW und LOWS.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== SID (Standard Instrument Departure) =====&lt;br /&gt;
Nehmen wir an, dass die Departure Runway 29 ist. Suche in den Charts von LOWW die SIDS (standard instrument departure) für die Runway 29. Laut unserem Briefing haben wir als ersten Wegpunkt SITNI in unserer Route. In den Charts wirst du bei der Runway 29 die SITNI4C SID finden. Das ist die Route die uns nach dem Abheben zum Wegpunkt SITNI führen wird. Ab diesem Punkt folgen wir der Route aus dem Briefing. Noch ist allerdings nicht sicher, dass wir dieser SID folgen werden. Mehr dazu später.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== FMC (Flight Management Computer) =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Starte nun das Programm vasFMC, das schon einmal angesprochen wurde. Füge zuerst LOWW ein. Du wirst gefragt welche Runway du benutzen wirst. Da wir ja die ATIS abgehört haben wissen wir, dass die Runway 29 die aktive für Starts ist, wähle also diese. Danach kopierst du die Route aus dem Briefing und gibst sie in das vasFMC Eingabefeld ein. vasFMC wird die Wegpunkte die sich auf der Route befinden, automatisch hinzu fügen. Zum Schluss gibst du noch LOWS ein. Hier wirst du wieder gefragt welche Runway benutzt wird. Da wir das noch nicht wissen, wähle irgend eine Runway.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wähle jetzt noch AP-Couple an. Das FMC wird dadurch mit deinem Autopilot gekoppelt. Wenn du später nach dem HDG fliegst, wird dies automatisch von vasFMC vorgegeben, um auf der Route zu bleiben.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Der Flug ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Dein Flieger sollte jetzt also Startklar sein. Treibstoff ist getankt, das FMC programmiert und du hast einen kleinen Notizblock oder Zettel zur Hand.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Der erste Kontakt ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es wird Zeit uns erstmals zu melden. Falls Delivery online ist, melden wir uns zuerst bei Delivery, falls Ground online ist, bei Ground und wenn Ground nicht online ist beim Tower und zwar immer in dieser Reihenfolge. Du meldest dich immer bei der &amp;quot;niedrigsten&amp;quot; Station die für deinen Startflughafen verfügbar ist. Welche Frequenz du rasten musst, ist aus den Charts ersichtlich.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unser erster Funkspruch wird dazu dienen, um festzustellen ob das Headset funktioniert und der Controller dich versteht. Wir sind Austrian123 und haben dies auch im Flugplan angegeben und uns mit diesem Callsign (AUA123) eingeloggt.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Delivery, Austrian 123, radio check&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Delivery: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, read you five by five&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn der Controller five by five sagt, hört er dich klar und deutlich.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Flugfreigabe ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir müssen nun unsere Flugfreigabe fordern, damit wir unser Flugzeug überhaupt bewegen dürfen und um sicher zu gehen, dass der Controller unseren Flugplan mit der Route und Höhe akzeptiert. Weiters, teilen wir mit, dass wir die aktuelle ATIS abgehört haben. Deshalb geben wir die aktuelle Information an, die wir vorhin notiert haben. Gehen wir von der Information D (Delta) aus. Mit dieser Flugfreigabe (Clearence) erhalten wir auch die SID und unseren Transponder Code, sowie den lokalen Luftdruck, das QNH.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Delivery, Austrian 123, &amp;lt;dein Flugzeugtyp&amp;gt;, (at gate/stand 31), request IFR clearence to Salzburg, Information DELTA received&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Delivery: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, cleared to destination Salzburg via SITNI4C departure, initially climb 5000 feet, squawk 4605, QNH &lt;br /&gt;
 1016, (Information DELTA correct)&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Du musst immer zurücklesen was der Controller dir sagt (=Readback). Ein simples roger, yes, no genügt nicht. Nach dem Readback, sagst du nocheinmal das Callsign.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;cleared to Destination Salzburg via SITNI4C departure, intitially 5000 feet, Squawk 4605, QNH 1016, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Delivery: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, readback correct, for start-up and pushback contact Wien Ground 121.600&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot; Contact Wien Ground 121.600, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Delivery hat uns also die Flugfreigabe gegeben. Du hast richtig zurückgelesen und deshalb weiß der Controller, dass du seine Anweisungen verstanden hast. Aus diesem Grund schickt er dich zu Ground. Du hast folgendes notiert:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*SID: entspricht unserer Planung, wir müssen nichts ändern&lt;br /&gt;
*initially 5000 feet: wir dürfen nach dem Abheben nur auf 5000 ft steigen, bis wir andere Anweisungen erhalten&lt;br /&gt;
*Squawk 4605: das ist der Transponder Code den wir setzen müssen.&lt;br /&gt;
*QNH 1016: Stelle dein Barometer(Altimeter) auf den Wert 1016. Das ist der Luftdruck den wir bis zur Transition Altitude (=5000ft in Wien, ersichtlich aus Charts) als Referenz für unseren Höhenmesser verwenden. Über dieser Höhe stellen wir den Weltweiten Standardluftdruck 1013 ein&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Pushback und Taxi ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Du hast alles eingestellt, bist auf der Frequenz von Wien Ground, hast deine Checklisten abgearbeitet und bist bereit zum start-up. Wir erbitten nun die Freigabe dafür.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Ground, servus, Austrian 123, request start-up&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, start-up approved&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;start-up approved, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn wir alle Checklisten durch haben, alles gesetzt ist und wir bereit für den pushback sind, melden wir das dem Controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, request pushback&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, pushback approved&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;pushback approved, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Eventuell sagt der Controller noch dazu:&lt;br /&gt;
 ...''pushback approved facing east/west/south'' oder ''north''...&lt;br /&gt;
Generell solltest du aber selbst wissen was die vernünftigste Variante ist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Du bist also mit dem pushback fertig, die Triebwerke laufen. Nun fragen wir nach dem taxi. Das ist kein gelbes Taxi, sondern das Rollen zur aktiven Piste.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Ground, Austrian 123, ready for taxi&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, taxi to holding point runway 29 vie EX10 and MIKE&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;taxi to holding point runway 29 via EX10 and MIKE, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sollen also über die Taxiways Exit10 und M (=MIKE) zum Rollhalt der Piste 29 rollen und dort warten. Nicht auf die Runway rollen !!!&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Give way Anweisungen =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Du bist online nicht alleine unterwegs. Darum muss der Controller Flugzeuge vor dem Zusammenstoß bewahren, am Boden und in der Luft. Am Boden funktioniert das relativ einfach, indem er einem Piloten mitteilt, einen anderen vorbei zu lassen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, give way to Boeing 737, crossing from left to the right&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;giving way to Boeing 737, from left to right, Austrian123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sollen also die Boeing vorbei lassen die unseren Weg von links nach rechts kreuzt. Weiters kann der Controller sagen, dass du einem anderen Flugzeug z.B. zur aktiven Piste folgen sollst.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, follow preceeding Boeing 747 to holding point runway 29&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;follow the Boeing 747 to holding point runway 29, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Es kann auch passieren, dass du einer &amp;quot;company aircraft&amp;quot; folgen oder Platz machen sollst, das heißt du sollst einem bestimmten Flugzeug aus deiner Airline Platz machen (Austrian).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kurz bevor wir den Rollhalt der Piste 29 erreichen, wird uns Ground zum Tower schicken.&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, contact Wien Tower 119.400&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Contact Tower 119.400, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Departure ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Schalte nun den Transponder auf &amp;quot;Mode CHARLIE&amp;quot;. Wir melden uns beim Tower:&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Tower, Austrian 123, (approaching holding point runway 29), ready for departure&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
Falls wir Glück haben und wenig Verkehr herrscht, bekommen wir unverzüglich die Starterlaubnis.&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, wind xxx/yy, runway 29, cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
Das Wort takeoff darf erst dann verwendet werden, wenn es sich wirklich um die eigentliche Startfreigabe handelt.&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;runway 29, cleared for takeoff, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Conditional Clearence =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ein besonderes &amp;quot;Werkzeug&amp;quot; des Controllers sind conditional clearences. Diese Freigaben gelten für dich erst, wenn bestimmte Umstände eingetreten sind. Ein Beispiel:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Du stehst am Rollhalt Piste 29. Gleichzeitig anfliegender Verkehr auf die Piste 29 ist 3 Meilen entfernt. 6 Meilen dahinter ist ebenfalls anfliegender Verkehr auf die Piste 29. Bei viel Verkehr wird der Controller dich zwischen diesen Anflügen, starten lassen, um den Verkehr besser fließen zu lassen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, traffic on 3nm final runway 29, Airbus A320, report in sight&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
Der Controller fragt ob wir den anfliegenden Verkehr in Sicht haben, um eine Verwechslungsgefahr auszuschließen, gibt er noch die Entfernung und den Flugzeugtyp an. Nur wenn wir Sichtkontakt zum Flugzeug haben, darf der Controller uns die conditional clearence erteilen.&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;traffic in sight, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, behind landing Airbus A320/traffic, line up runway 29 and wait behind&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
Wir dürfen also erst nach dem landenden Airbus auf die Piste 29 rollen und sollen dann warten (=stehen bleiben). Der Controller sagt zwei mal &amp;quot;behind&amp;quot; um sicher zu stellen, dass wir auch wirklich erst nach dem Airbus aufrollen. Wenn der Airbus passiert hat, sollten wir allerdings unverzüglich aufrollen um bereit für einen schnellen Start zu sein, schließlich ist der nächste Anflug bereits ca. 5-6 Meilen entfernt. Sobald der Airbus die Piste verlassen hat, werden wir die Starterlaubnis bekommen (siehe oben).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Intersection Departure =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Oft kommt es vor, dass der Ground oder Tower Lotse dich fragen wird, ob du auch von einer Intersection starten kannst. Eine Intersection ist eine Kreuzung zwischen Runway und Taxiway. Dies kann passieren falls der Verkehr es erfordert, oder der Controller möchte dir einfach nur den langen Weg bis zum Holding Point ersparen. Eine Möglichkeit ist die Intersection A3 (siehe Charts). In diesem Fall würde die Phraseologie so aussehen:&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground/Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, ready/able for intersection departure from A3?&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
Falls wir nichts dagegen haben und auch aus technischer Sicht nichts dagegen spricht, teilen wir das dem Controller mit.&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;affirmative, (ready for intersection A3), Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Ground/Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, taxi to holding point runway 29, Intersection A3 via M&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn wir nicht von einer Intersection starten können:&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;negative/unable, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Die Starterlaubnis ist wieder gleich:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, wind xxx/yy, runway 29, cleared for takeoff&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;runway 29, cleared for takeoff, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Immediate Departure =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Was vor allem bei viel Verkehr passieren kann, ist folgende Situation: Du bist auf dem Weg zum Holding Point Runway 29 und erreichst diesen gerade. Gleichzeitig ist eine Maschine im Anflug auf die Runway 29 und ist noch 6 Meilen entfernt. Der Controller wird dich fragen ob du in der Lage bist unverzüglich auf die Runway zu rollen und zu starten, damit du noch vor dem anfliegenden Verkehr abgehoben bist. Falls dies zutrifft und du tatsächlich ohne Verzögerung und stehen bleiben starten kannst, teile dem Controller das mit (natürlich sollte das Funken in so einer Situation ohne Stottern, schnell und deutlich passieren):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, are you ready for immediate departure runway 29?&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;affirmative, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, wind xxx/yy, runway 29, cleared for immediate takeoff&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Cleared for immediate takeoff, runway 29, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Mit dem Wort ''immediate'' macht dir der Controller noch einmal klar, dass du dir keine Zeit lassen darfst. Um es verständlicher auszudrücken: Er meint damit ''Gib Gas!!''&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Kurz nach dem Abheben, verweist uns Tower auf Approach oder Center (beide heißen Wien Radar), je nachdem wer online ist.&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, contact Wien Radar 128.200&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Radar 128.200, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reiseflug / Enroute ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir melden uns bei Radar, und der Controller wird uns unverzüglich eine größere Höhe (wahrscheinlich unsere Reiseflughöhe) anordnen, unter der Vorraussetzung, dass er uns korrekt identifiziert hat. Dazu müssen wir ihm folgende Punkte mitteilen:&lt;br /&gt;
*Callsign&lt;br /&gt;
*aktuelle Höhe&lt;br /&gt;
*freigegebene Höhe&lt;br /&gt;
*SID&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Außerdem muss der Transponder auf Mode &amp;quot;CHARLIE&amp;quot; stehen, also aktiv sein.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Wien Radar, Austrian 123, 3000 feet, climbing 5000 feet, SITNI4C departure&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Radar: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, identified, climb FL160&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;climb FL160, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jetzt können wir uns erstmal zurücklehnen, auch wenn es nicht lange dauert bis wir Salzburg erreichen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Descent / Top of Descent (ToD) ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nach einiger Zeit sollten wir langsam aber sicher in den Sinkflug übergehen. Der Punkt an dem der Sinkflug begonnen wird, nennt sich Top of Descent. Um diesen Punkt zu errechnen gibt es einige Faustformeln. Generell kann man sagen, dass die abzubauende Höhe in Flightlevel dividiert durch 3 die Distanz zum Zielort ergibt, ab der man sinken sollte.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unser Beispiel:&lt;br /&gt;
 FL160 auf ca. 1000ft (Höhe des Airports über dem Meer) -&amp;gt; FL150 : 3 = 50nm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn man also 40-50nm vor Salzburg bei einem Groundspeed zwischen 400 und 450 Knoten bei ca. 1700-2000 ft / min sinkt ist man auf der sicheren Seite. Falls dieser Punkt erreicht wird und der Controller dir noch keine Anweisungen zum Sinken gegeben hat, weise ihn darauf hin, dass du sinken willst, da du selbst dafür verantwortlich bist.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, request (ready for) descent&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Meistens wird dir der Controller dann eine Anweisung zum Sinken geben, die du selbstverständlich wieder zurücklesen musst.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wien Radar: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, descend FL120, contact Salzburg Radar 123.720&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;descend FL120, contact Salzburg Radar 123.720, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Vectoring und Approach ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ein wesentlicher Teil des Fluges, der vom Piloten besondere Aufmerksamkeit fordert, ist der Anflug. Hier wird einem Piloten in der Regel ein sogenanntes Vectoring gegeben. Das heißt, dass der Controller (in diesem Fall Salzburg Radar) dir zusätzlich zu den Höhenanweisungen auch Richtungsanweisungen gibt. Du musst dann diese Richtung (Heading) fliegen und wie immer die Anweisungen zurücklesen, damit der Controller sicher gehen kann, dass du seine Anweisungen erhalten hast. Das Vectoring führt dich direkt bis zum Endanflug in den du dann freigegeben wirst. Der Anflug ist im Normalfall ein [[ILS]]-Approach. Der Controller wird dir auch mitteilen welchen Anflug auf welche Piste du erwarten kannst, damit du rechtzeitig deine NAV-Frequenzen setzen und dich auf den Anflug vorbereiten kannst.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Salzburg Radar, Austrian 123, FL120, Information B, inbound SBG VOR&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Radar: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, servus, Information B correct, expect radar vectors ILS approach runway 16, descend FL80, turn right/left heading 260&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''descend FL80, right/left heading 260, expect radar vectors ILS approach runway 16&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir sollen also auf FL80 sinken und nach rechts/links auf Kurs 260 drehen. Ausserdem teilt uns der Controller mit, dass in Salzburg die ATIS Information BRAVO gültig ist, damit wir überprüfen können ob wir diese abgehört haben. Setze das Heading 260 in deinem Autopiloten bzw. fliege den Kurs per Hand wenn du ein geübter Pilot bist.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 '''Achtung''': Wenn du vasFMC verwendest musst du unbedingt vor dem ersten Einstellen eines Headings AP-Couple deaktivieren, da&lt;br /&gt;
 sonst deine Eingaben von vasFMC immer wieder überschrieben werden.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Du wirst eventuell noch weitere Headings und Höhenanweisungen bekommen. Zwischendurch wird dir der Controller auch den zu erwartenden Anflug mitteilen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Radar: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, descend FL60&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;descend FL60, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Langsam wird es spannend. Der Controller wird uns jeden Moment mitteilen, dass wir für den Anflug freigegeben sind. Setze noch schnell die NAV-Frequenz 109.90 für den ILS Anflug auf die Piste 16 in Salzburg. Zufinden sind alle wichtigen Informationen wie immer in den Charts, die bei keinem Flug fehlen dürfen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Radar: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, descend altitude 4000 ft, QNH 1015, turn left heading 190, cleared ILS approach runway 16&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;descend 4000 ft, QNH 1015, turn left heading 190, cleared ILS approach runway 16, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vielleicht relativ viel Information auf einmal. Deshalb sollte auch hier der Notizzettel greifbar sein. Wir müssen also auf die Höhe (nicht Flightlevel!!) 4000ft sinken. Sobald wir auf oder unter die Transition Altitude friegegeben werden, ist automatisch vom lokalen QNH als Referenz auszugehen, das uns der Controller auch mitteilt, bei diesem Beispiel 1015. Weiters müssen wir auf Kurs 190 drehen um das ILS einzufangen. Stelle also die Höhe, das QNH sowie das Heading so schnell wie möglich ein. Achte nun darauf den [[Localizer]] und in weiterer Folge den [[Glideslope]] einzufangen. Sobald sich die Anzeige in Richtung Mitte bewegt, drücke den LOC bzw später den APP-Button (abhängig vom Flugzeug). Wenn der Controller am Radarschirm erkennt, dass wir am ILS sind wird er uns an den Tower übergeben. Es kann aber auch sein, dass er uns die Anweisung gibt ihm zu melden, dass wir uns am ILS befinden. In diesem Fall würde die Phrase oben ergänzt werde durch:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ''&amp;quot;...report established&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wenn wir also &amp;quot;established&amp;quot; sind schickt uns Salzburg Radar zum Tower.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Radar: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, contact Salzburg Tower 118.100 &amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Contact Salzburg Tower 118.100, Austrian 123 &amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Landung ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir wechseln auf die Tower Frequenz und melden uns so bald als möglich, damit wir noch genug Zeit im Endanflug haben.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Salzburg Tower, servus, Austrian 123, established ILS runway 16&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, Wind xxx/yy runway 16, cleared to land&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;runway 16, cleared to land, Austrian 123&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Glück gehabt, kein Verkehr auf der 16 und somit erhalten wir unverzüglich die Freigabe zur Landung. Wäre jemand vor uns bei der Landung, würde der Tower-Controller in etwas das sagen:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ''&amp;quot;...wind xxx/yy, continue approach number 2&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fast geschafft. Das Fahrwerk ist draußen, alles ist gechecked und wir setzen sanft auf. Wir verlassen die Runway und halten dann, da wir noch keine weiteren Freigaben erhalten haben. Vergiss nicht den Transponder wieder auf Mode &amp;quot;Standby&amp;quot; zu schalten, sobald du am Boden bist und die Runway verlassen hast. Entweder schickt uns der Tower jetzt zu Ground (wenn online) oder er gibt uns selbst die Anweisungen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Angenommen die Bahn wurde über ECHO (E) verlassen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, taxi to stand W4 via L(LIMA)and Exit 4&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;taxi to stand W4 via LIMA and Exit 4&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Wir rollen also zur Parkposition W4. Dort melden wir uns ein letztes Mal beim Controller&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 Wir: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123 at stand W4, shutting down&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
 Salzburg Tower: ''&amp;quot;Austrian 123, danke für den Flug, servus!&amp;quot;''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;request leaving&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;request frequency change&amp;quot; oder andere Phrasen, sind nicht notwendig.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So, das war's! Der erste Online Flug ist vorrüber. Ab jetzt heißt es üben, üben, üben! Der Rest kommt im Laufe der Zeit von ganz alleine. Je mehr Flüge du absolviert hast, desto mehr Erfahrung wirst du haben und du wirst die Prozeduren irgendwann im Schlaf beherrschen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Tipps und Hinweise ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Die ersten Schritte ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Nachdem du dich bei VATSIM und auch auf der [http://www.vacc-austria.org VACC Austria Homepage] registriert hast, kannst du im [http://forum.vacc-austria.org/index.php Forum] nach Hilfe fragen. Du solltest auch hier im Wiki diverse Dokumente durchlesen. Danach stellst du dich mit deinem Flieger nach Wien, loggst dich ein und hörst für den Anfang einfach nur zu. Notiere dir Dinge die unklar sind und frage im Forum nach.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Grundlegende VATSIM Regeln. ====&lt;br /&gt;
*Niemals auf einer Piste einloggen&lt;br /&gt;
*Keine Pause-Taste im Flugsimulator verwenden&lt;br /&gt;
*Realistische Callsigns verwenden&lt;br /&gt;
*immer den realen Vor- und Nachnamen verwenden&lt;br /&gt;
*immer den Anweisungen von Controllern folge leisten&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lies dir unbedingt folgende VATSIM-Dokumente durch:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.vatsim.net/library/codeofconduct.pdf Code of Conduct]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.vatsim.net/library/codeofregs.pdf Code of Regulations]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Tipps für den Flug ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Am Funk: Denken, drücken, sprechen!&lt;br /&gt;
*Notizen: schreibe dir alles auf was der Controller dir sagt!&lt;br /&gt;
*Wenn du etwas nicht verstehst, nachfragen statt falsch machen!&lt;br /&gt;
*Fliege niemals ohne Charts und wirf einen kurzen Blick auf diese bevor du fliegst!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Wo finde ich Hilfe? ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.vatsim.net/prc/ Pilot Ressource Center]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://forum.vacc-austria.org/index.php VACC Austria Forum]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php VACC Austria Wiki]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Documents]][[Category:Training]][[Category:Pilots]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide&amp;diff=2609</id>
		<title>Study Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide&amp;diff=2609"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:50:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Currently we provide following training documents: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==== Currently we provide following training documents:  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:OBS]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Delivery]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Ground]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Tower]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide: Approach]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Radar]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Airport Details]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Low Visibility Procedures]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Special Procedures]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony&amp;diff=2608</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Radio Telephony</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony&amp;diff=2608"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:49:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Think before you talk */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= About this Document =&lt;br /&gt;
This document ist part of the VACC Austria [[Study Guide]], intended to assist VACC controllers in learning their &amp;quot;hob&amp;quot; (actually: their hobby). This page is an addition to the [[Study Guide:OBS]] and covers the rules and procedures on '''how to speak on the radio'''. We assume that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before. The information is based on the [[http://www.caa.co.uk/docs/33/CAP413.PDF CAP413 Radio Telephony Manual]] of the British CAA, which is a very thorough (260pages!) document. This page is more like a tutorial: step-by-step, and only covers the basics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Why is this? =&lt;br /&gt;
Talking on the air is (sometimes) stressy. Voice quality may be bad or broken, but yet: it is the '''only link''' between ATC and aircraft, and therefore: '''highly security sensitive'''. You want to make sure that...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Communication is short&lt;br /&gt;
* Communication is unambiguous ''(&amp;quot;what did he mean?&amp;quot;)''&lt;br /&gt;
* Communication is fail-proof in three respects: right person, right message, right meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve this, there are some rules which you should follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Talking on the air is (sometimes) stressy. Voice quality may be bad or broken, but yet: it is the '''only link''' between ATC and aircraft, and therefore: '''highly security sensitive'''. If it does not work, [[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iX--6ee7nsA this]] could happen again. You want to make sure that...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Communication is short&lt;br /&gt;
* Communication is unambiguous ''(&amp;quot;what did he mean?&amp;quot;)''&lt;br /&gt;
* Communication is fail-proof (lost and misunderstood messages are detected and corrected).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve this, people have invented something, called '''phraseology'''. Almost 99% of all radio communication is standard messages. If all the standard messages are predefined, then both sides instantly know, what they are talking about, and the non-standard communication (in &amp;quot;normal words&amp;quot;) is down to an absolute minimum. Therefore, we learn this phraseology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''(Example: ATC orders &amp;quot;Austrian 251, turn left 40 degrees&amp;quot;. Then it is vital that...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* the person is right: Austrian 251 turns, not Austrian 215.&lt;br /&gt;
* the message is right: It's 40 degrees, not 14.&lt;br /&gt;
* the meaning is right: It's the compass degree (abouth northwest), not the relative angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Rules  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to achieve the goals set above the following rules important: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Listen before you talk ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If two people talk on the radio at the same time, they don't hear each other, and all others only hear a nasty squeak. Therefore it's important that every station monitors the frequency for about 5 seconds before transmitting, to make sure there’s no ongoing radio traffic. If you hear an ongoing conversation, wait until the conversation is over before you begin to transmit. Don’t start your communication if there is a read-back expected on the last transmission even if there is a short pause. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Think before you talk ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The radio traffic flow should be as smooth as possible. To achieve this it's vital to &amp;quot;think first&amp;quot; before transmitting so that a clear, concise and uninterrupted message can be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Letters and numbers are spelled ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* On the Radio, it is impossible to distinguish a &amp;quot;B&amp;quot; from a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;. Therefore, letter combinations (like callsigns, see below) are spelled. In the air, we use the NATO alphabet: [[Buchstabiertabelle]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Same is with numbers. It is difficult to distinguish &amp;quot;60&amp;quot; from &amp;quot;16&amp;quot;, so numbers are read out as single digits: &amp;quot;six-zero&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;one-six&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*: &amp;quot;9&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;niner&amp;quot; to distinguish it from &amp;quot;five&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*: Decimal reads &amp;quot;decimal&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*: For &amp;quot;00&amp;quot; you should say &amp;quot;hundred&amp;quot; (but not for compass headings: you spell out &amp;quot;zero-zero&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*: For &amp;quot;000&amp;quot; you say &amp;quot;thousand&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*: There are very few exceptions for abbreviations which are used frequently, like VFR, IFR, VOR, NDB, ILS, RVR or VMC. An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ATC to A-HBU: Alpha Hotel Bravo Uniform, Radar identified at five thousand feet. Climb and maintain flight level one two zero. &lt;br /&gt;
 ATC to A-HBU: Alpha Hotel Bravo Uniform, direct Lima November Zulu NDB, contact Wien Radar one three four decimal three five, bye!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stations have callsigns ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You want to make sure everyone is well identified. Therefore, every participant on the network has his own Callsign. Controller Positions are identified by their location and their Function (e.g. Wien Radar, Graz Tower), Aircraft either ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* by their Registration (e.g. OE-ALB) &lt;br /&gt;
* or an Airline Callsign followed by a combination of numbers and letters (e.g. AUA25LM, SWR387). The airline is called by its real name (i.e. &amp;quot;Austrian&amp;quot; for AUA).&lt;br /&gt;
* Some letters at the end of an airline callsign mean something: &amp;quot;H&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;heavy&amp;quot; - an airplane from the &amp;quot;H&amp;quot; class, like the B747 or the MD81. &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; means for &amp;quot;super&amp;quot;: currently only the A380. You read this class out: AUA251H is &amp;quot;Austrian two five one heavy&amp;quot;. You can crosscheck these codes in the Euroscope tag, where a &amp;quot;/H&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;/S&amp;quot; is added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Callsigns are vital, because you have to say them every time you transmit something to make sure, it is '''from''' and '''for''' the right guy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Readback ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a controller (or aircraft) transmits a message to a station it is crucial that the receiving station acknowledge the message. But saying &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot; is only in movies - what are you &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot;ing? The called station understood something, but what? The solution is simple: The called station ''reads back the information in relevant parts''. If the receiving station does not read back, the transmitting station must transmit again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Items that '''must always be read back''' in full are all clearances (including altitudes, headings, speeds, radials etc), runway in use, altimeter setting (QNH or QFE) and transition level, and all frequencies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*There are also items that '''should not be read''' back to reduce unnesessary radio transmissions. In short, this includes everything not mentioned above, but a few examples are: wind, temperature and other weather information (except altimeter settings) and traffic information in detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_APP:''' AUA251, turn left heading 290, descend Altitude 5000 feet, QNH 1019.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Turn left heading 290, descending altitude 5000 feet QNH 1019, AUA251 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_TWR:''' AUA251, traffic information: Cessna on rwy 16 downwind, report in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Traffic in sight, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_GND:''' OE-DLT, taxi to Holding Point Runway 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, QNH 1019, give way&lt;br /&gt;
 to Speedbird Airbus A320 crossing you right to left on M.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''OE-DLT:''' Taxiing to H/P Rwy 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, giving way on M, QNH 1019, OE-DLT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A note on being polite ==&lt;br /&gt;
In real life, ATC conversation is as dry as it could be - manuals say &amp;quot;avoid excessive courtesy&amp;quot;. However, VATSIM is a hobby - it really depends on the circumstances. These are some guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* It is always nice to be polite. You might say &amp;quot;hello&amp;quot; on contact and &amp;quot;bye&amp;quot; on handover. You might say &amp;quot;thanks for cooperation&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;sorry for the delay&amp;quot; if a pilot has to wait or hold or something. Some experienced controllers have found their way to be funny and make jokes in a very short manner, even if it is not VATSIM standard and should not be - VATSIM is as-real-as-it-gets compared to IVAO ''(xxx_APP: Lepizig Air 2134, direct UNKUL, sorry, the name was not my idea&amp;quot;)''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Adapt to the traffic. If you have 20 aircraft to track and the radio is full of messages, be short.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't just swallow it, if a pilot swears on you - under no circumstances he/she should. Instead of swearing back, remind him to stop and be polite, and ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't be angry on the radio - it's not the right medium to swear, whatever a pilot (or a controller) screws up. If you really have a problem, then post a .wallop note to call for a supervisor. If you want to tell something to a pilot to explain a situation, then do so after the storm is cleared, in a private note. Even there, stay polite - you don't know why the pilot did it - maybe he can't, maybe his kid hammered on his keyboard, the joystick is faulty, the cat grabbed the chart, whatever.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact - messages - handover ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All conversation follows the following pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
# Contact&lt;br /&gt;
# ... messages (there may be pauses, and other messages to other stations)&lt;br /&gt;
# handoff/handover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contact ===&lt;br /&gt;
Radio communication is like talking to each other in a dark room: You have to say hello, who you are, and that you are here now. As ATC is always there, but pilots fly in and out, it is pilots who say hello. To initiate the contact between two stations an initial call has to be made. Example - Austrian 251 is calling Wien Tower:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Wien Delivery, Austrian 251, Radiocheck .&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL:''' Austrian 251, Wien Delivery, read you 5 by 5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the syntax for contact is:&lt;br /&gt;
 Syntax = Pilot: &amp;lt;ATC station&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;myself&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;message&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Syntax = ATC station: &amp;lt;pilot&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;myself&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;message&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contact has standard phraseology depending on the circumstances - see the sections of the controller positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Messages===&lt;br /&gt;
Once contact is established, you stay in contact, even if you don't talk to each other. This means: You know that the other station listens and will pick up conversation any time. Contact is not one-to-one: ATC has contact with all aircraft in his area, whether he talks to them or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ongoing conversation, three rules apply:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Pilots who address ATC, say their callsign first, then the message (ATC knows: if a callsign comes up, he is meant and he knows, by whom.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Austrian251 requesting descent.&lt;br /&gt;
 Syntax = Pilot: &amp;lt;myself&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;message&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ATC always addresses the called station first, and then the message (ATC only talks to pilots, so whenever an aircraft's callsign comes up, there is only one guy who could be meant).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ATC: Austrian 251, descend FL 120.&lt;br /&gt;
 Syntax = Controller: &amp;lt;pilot&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;message&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Pilots who read back an ATC instruction, put their callsign at the end. This makes sure that the right person has understood the instruction. ATC knows: if the callsign is at the end, it was a readback - he/she just checks if it is correct and the reader is correct (imagine the wrong plane descends!). ATC interferes, if it is faulty, and a new readback should follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Descending FL 130, Austrian 251.&lt;br /&gt;
 ATC: Negative, Austrian 251, descend flight level 120.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Descending FL 120, Austrian 251.&lt;br /&gt;
 Syntax = Pilot: &amp;lt;message&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;myself&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Handover / Handoff ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As said before, radio conversation is like a dark room. Like pilots enter the room and say hello, it is ATC's responsibility to let him/her go. When an aircraft leaves an ATC station's responsibility, it is handed over - noone just fades away. This is vital to ensure that no plane gets lost. It's like saying goodbye and telling the pilot, where to go next. This is called &amp;quot;handover&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_TWR: Austrian 251, contact Wien Radar 128.2, bye&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Contacting Wien Radar 128.2, bye.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both partners to the conversation do something after handover: ATC klicks a flag to transfer the plane in Euroscope - the next controller sees the plane popping up in his/her responsibility. The pilot switches frequency and makes the next contact to the next controller (don't worry about the details they talk about - it comes later in the tutorial. Look, if you find the syntax):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Wien Radar, AUA251, SITNI4C, 4000ft climbing 5000ft&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_APP: AUA251, Wien Radar, identified, climb flight level 125.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Climbing flight level 125, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes at VATSIM, there is no controller online. Then the pilot is not handed over, but '''handed off''' - released in his/her own responsibility:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_TWR: Austrian 251, radar service terminated, monitor UNICOM 122.8, bye!&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Unicom 122.8, [thanks for the service], bye!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is pilots' responsibility to look out for ATC while they fly. Sometimes, they forget, and controllers send them a &amp;quot;contactme&amp;quot; message via Euroscope on private message (there is a command for this). In real life, this won't happen - pilots who forget to register, are fined!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reserved words ==&lt;br /&gt;
Some words are reserved and should only be used, if they are meant (and NOT, if they are not):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''mayday''' and '''Pan-pan''': Only use it, when you declare it.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''takeoff''' and '''landing''': Only use it, when you clear (or read back) for takeoff or to land. If you inform a pilot to wait &amp;quot;two minutes to t... no: you  tell him/her &amp;quot;two minutes to departure&amp;quot;. If you inform a pilot about &amp;quot;late l...&amp;quot;, no: You inform him about &amp;quot;late clearance&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Affirm(ative)''' means &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;. '''Negative''' means &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. '''Unable''' means that the pilot can't do what the ATC just instructed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What?? Who?? Aaahm?? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Say again''' is the only message you can pass all the time - if you did not understand, or if you did not understand if it was for you or not (and you MUST say it if you missed something!) For ATC there are three variants: Did you miss, WHO? Did you miss WHAT? Did you miss BOTH?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ATC: Last station, callsign? (WHO?)&lt;br /&gt;
 ATC: Austrian 251, say again? (WHAT?)&lt;br /&gt;
 ATC: Last station, say again? (WHO AND WHAT?)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phraseology at different stations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(work in progress - stay tuned!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology is vast. To learn them step by step, the most frequently used phraseology is collected here, grouped to stations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Study Guide:Radio Telephony:DEL]] is for delivery stations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Study Guide:Radio Telephony:GND]] is for Ground stations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Study Guide:Radio Telephony:TWR]] is for Tower stations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony&amp;diff=2607</id>
		<title>Study Guide:Radio Telephony</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:Radio_Telephony&amp;diff=2607"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:49:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Contact */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;= About this Document =&lt;br /&gt;
This document ist part of the VACC Austria [[Study Guide]], intended to assist VACC controllers in learning their &amp;quot;hob&amp;quot; (actually: their hobby). This page is an addition to the [[Study Guide:OBS]] and covers the rules and procedures on '''how to speak on the radio'''. We assume that you have read and understood the [[Study Guide:OBS]] before. The information is based on the [[http://www.caa.co.uk/docs/33/CAP413.PDF CAP413 Radio Telephony Manual]] of the British CAA, which is a very thorough (260pages!) document. This page is more like a tutorial: step-by-step, and only covers the basics.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Why is this? =&lt;br /&gt;
Talking on the air is (sometimes) stressy. Voice quality may be bad or broken, but yet: it is the '''only link''' between ATC and aircraft, and therefore: '''highly security sensitive'''. You want to make sure that...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Communication is short&lt;br /&gt;
* Communication is unambiguous ''(&amp;quot;what did he mean?&amp;quot;)''&lt;br /&gt;
* Communication is fail-proof in three respects: right person, right message, right meaning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve this, there are some rules which you should follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Talking on the air is (sometimes) stressy. Voice quality may be bad or broken, but yet: it is the '''only link''' between ATC and aircraft, and therefore: '''highly security sensitive'''. If it does not work, [[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iX--6ee7nsA this]] could happen again. You want to make sure that...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Communication is short&lt;br /&gt;
* Communication is unambiguous ''(&amp;quot;what did he mean?&amp;quot;)''&lt;br /&gt;
* Communication is fail-proof (lost and misunderstood messages are detected and corrected).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To achieve this, people have invented something, called '''phraseology'''. Almost 99% of all radio communication is standard messages. If all the standard messages are predefined, then both sides instantly know, what they are talking about, and the non-standard communication (in &amp;quot;normal words&amp;quot;) is down to an absolute minimum. Therefore, we learn this phraseology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''(Example: ATC orders &amp;quot;Austrian 251, turn left 40 degrees&amp;quot;. Then it is vital that...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* the person is right: Austrian 251 turns, not Austrian 215.&lt;br /&gt;
* the message is right: It's 40 degrees, not 14.&lt;br /&gt;
* the meaning is right: It's the compass degree (abouth northwest), not the relative angle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Basic Rules  =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to achieve the goals set above the following rules important: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Listen before you talk ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If two people talk on the radio at the same time, they don't hear each other, and all others only hear a nasty squeak. Therefore it's important that every station monitors the frequency for about 5 seconds before transmitting, to make sure there’s no ongoing radio traffic. If you hear an ongoing conversation, wait until the conversation is over before you begin to transmit. Don’t start your communication if there is a read-back expected on the last transmission even if there is a short pause. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Think before you talk ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The radio traffic flow should be as smooth as possible. To achieve this it's vital to &amp;quot;think first&amp;quot; before transmitting so that a clear, concise and uninterrupted message can be sent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Standard phraseology looks like this - in a dotted box (no, this is not standard phraseology, this is just how it looks like in this wiki!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Letters and numbers are spelled ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* On the Radio, it is impossible to distinguish a &amp;quot;B&amp;quot; from a &amp;quot;D&amp;quot;. Therefore, letter combinations (like callsigns, see below) are spelled. In the air, we use the NATO alphabet: [[Buchstabiertabelle]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Same is with numbers. It is difficult to distinguish &amp;quot;60&amp;quot; from &amp;quot;16&amp;quot;, so numbers are read out as single digits: &amp;quot;six-zero&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;one-six&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*: &amp;quot;9&amp;quot; is &amp;quot;niner&amp;quot; to distinguish it from &amp;quot;five&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*: Decimal reads &amp;quot;decimal&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*: For &amp;quot;00&amp;quot; you should say &amp;quot;hundred&amp;quot; (but not for compass headings: you spell out &amp;quot;zero-zero&amp;quot;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*: For &amp;quot;000&amp;quot; you say &amp;quot;thousand&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*: There are very few exceptions for abbreviations which are used frequently, like VFR, IFR, VOR, NDB, ILS, RVR or VMC. An example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ATC to A-HBU: Alpha Hotel Bravo Uniform, Radar identified at five thousand feet. Climb and maintain flight level one two zero. &lt;br /&gt;
 ATC to A-HBU: Alpha Hotel Bravo Uniform, direct Lima November Zulu NDB, contact Wien Radar one three four decimal three five, bye!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Stations have callsigns ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You want to make sure everyone is well identified. Therefore, every participant on the network has his own Callsign. Controller Positions are identified by their location and their Function (e.g. Wien Radar, Graz Tower), Aircraft either ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* by their Registration (e.g. OE-ALB) &lt;br /&gt;
* or an Airline Callsign followed by a combination of numbers and letters (e.g. AUA25LM, SWR387). The airline is called by its real name (i.e. &amp;quot;Austrian&amp;quot; for AUA).&lt;br /&gt;
* Some letters at the end of an airline callsign mean something: &amp;quot;H&amp;quot; stands for &amp;quot;heavy&amp;quot; - an airplane from the &amp;quot;H&amp;quot; class, like the B747 or the MD81. &amp;quot;S&amp;quot; means for &amp;quot;super&amp;quot;: currently only the A380. You read this class out: AUA251H is &amp;quot;Austrian two five one heavy&amp;quot;. You can crosscheck these codes in the Euroscope tag, where a &amp;quot;/H&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;/S&amp;quot; is added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Callsigns are vital, because you have to say them every time you transmit something to make sure, it is '''from''' and '''for''' the right guy.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Readback ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a controller (or aircraft) transmits a message to a station it is crucial that the receiving station acknowledge the message. But saying &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot; is only in movies - what are you &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot;ing? The called station understood something, but what? The solution is simple: The called station ''reads back the information in relevant parts''. If the receiving station does not read back, the transmitting station must transmit again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Items that '''must always be read back''' in full are all clearances (including altitudes, headings, speeds, radials etc), runway in use, altimeter setting (QNH or QFE) and transition level, and all frequencies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*There are also items that '''should not be read''' back to reduce unnesessary radio transmissions. In short, this includes everything not mentioned above, but a few examples are: wind, temperature and other weather information (except altimeter settings) and traffic information in detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_APP:''' AUA251, turn left heading 290, descend Altitude 5000 feet, QNH 1019.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Turn left heading 290, descending altitude 5000 feet QNH 1019, AUA251 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_TWR:''' AUA251, traffic information: Cessna on rwy 16 downwind, report in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Traffic in sight, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_GND:''' OE-DLT, taxi to Holding Point Runway 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, QNH 1019, give way&lt;br /&gt;
 to Speedbird Airbus A320 crossing you right to left on M.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''OE-DLT:''' Taxiing to H/P Rwy 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, giving way on M, QNH 1019, OE-DLT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== A note on being polite ==&lt;br /&gt;
In real life, ATC conversation is as dry as it could be - manuals say &amp;quot;avoid excessive courtesy&amp;quot;. However, VATSIM is a hobby - it really depends on the circumstances. These are some guidelines:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* It is always nice to be polite. You might say &amp;quot;hello&amp;quot; on contact and &amp;quot;bye&amp;quot; on handover. You might say &amp;quot;thanks for cooperation&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;sorry for the delay&amp;quot; if a pilot has to wait or hold or something. Some experienced controllers have found their way to be funny and make jokes in a very short manner, even if it is not VATSIM standard and should not be - VATSIM is as-real-as-it-gets compared to IVAO ''(xxx_APP: Lepizig Air 2134, direct UNKUL, sorry, the name was not my idea&amp;quot;)''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Adapt to the traffic. If you have 20 aircraft to track and the radio is full of messages, be short.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't just swallow it, if a pilot swears on you - under no circumstances he/she should. Instead of swearing back, remind him to stop and be polite, and ...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Don't be angry on the radio - it's not the right medium to swear, whatever a pilot (or a controller) screws up. If you really have a problem, then post a .wallop note to call for a supervisor. If you want to tell something to a pilot to explain a situation, then do so after the storm is cleared, in a private note. Even there, stay polite - you don't know why the pilot did it - maybe he can't, maybe his kid hammered on his keyboard, the joystick is faulty, the cat grabbed the chart, whatever.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contact - messages - handover ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All conversation follows the following pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
# Contact&lt;br /&gt;
# ... messages (there may be pauses, and other messages to other stations)&lt;br /&gt;
# handoff/handover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contact ===&lt;br /&gt;
Radio communication is like talking to each other in a dark room: You have to say hello, who you are, and that you are here now. As ATC is always there, but pilots fly in and out, it is pilots who say hello. To initiate the contact between two stations an initial call has to be made. Example - Austrian 251 is calling Wien Tower:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Wien Delivery, Austrian 251, Radiocheck .&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL:''' Austrian 251, Wien Delivery, read you 5 by 5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the syntax for contact is:&lt;br /&gt;
 Syntax = Pilot: &amp;lt;ATC station&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;myself&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;message&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 Syntax = ATC station: &amp;lt;pilot&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;myself&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;message&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Contact has standard phraseology depending on the circumstances - see the sections of the controller positions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Messages===&lt;br /&gt;
Once contact is established, you stay in contact, even if you don't talk to each other. This means: You know that the other station listens and will pick up conversation any time. Contact is not one-to-one: ATC has contact with all aircraft in his area, whether he talks to them or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ongoing conversation, three rules apply:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Pilots who address ATC, say their callsign first, then the message (ATC knows: if a callsign comes up, he is meant and he knows, by whom.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Austrian251 requesting descent.&lt;br /&gt;
 Syntax = Pilot: &amp;lt;myself&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;message&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* ATC always addresses the called station first, and then the message (ATC only talks to pilots, so whenever an aircraft's callsign comes up, there is only one guy who could be meant).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ATC: Austrian 251, descend FL 120.&lt;br /&gt;
 Syntax = Controller: &amp;lt;pilot&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;message&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Pilots who read back an ATC instruction, put their callsign at the end. This makes sure that the right person has understood the instruction. ATC knows: if the callsign is at the end, it was a readback - he/she just checks if it is correct and the reader is correct (imagine the wrong plane descends!). ATC interferes, if it is faulty, and a new readback should follow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Descending FL 130, Austrian 251.&lt;br /&gt;
 ATC: Negative, Austrian 251, descend flight level 120.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Descending FL 120, Austrian 251.&lt;br /&gt;
 Syntax = Pilot: &amp;lt;message&amp;gt;, &amp;lt;myself&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Handover / Handoff ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As said before, radio conversation is like a dark room. Like pilots enter the room and say hello, it is ATC's responsibility to let him/her go. When an aircraft leaves an ATC station's responsibility, it is handed over - noone just fades away. This is vital to ensure that no plane gets lost. It's like saying goodbye and telling the pilot, where to go next. This is called &amp;quot;handover&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_TWR: Austrian 251, contact Wien Radar 128.2, bye&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Contacting Wien Radar 128.2, bye.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Both partners to the conversation do something after handover: ATC klicks a flag to transfer the plane in Euroscope - the next controller sees the plane popping up in his/her responsibility. The pilot switches frequency and makes the next contact to the next controller (don't worry about the details they talk about - it comes later in the tutorial. Look, if you find the syntax):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Wien Radar, AUA251, SITNI4C, 4000ft climbing 5000ft&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_APP: AUA251, Wien Radar, identified, climb flight level 125.&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Climbing flight level 125, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes at VATSIM, there is no controller online. Then the pilot is not handed over, but '''handed off''' - released in his/her own responsibility:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 LOWW_TWR: Austrian 251, radar service terminated, monitor UNICOM 122.8, bye!&lt;br /&gt;
 AUA251: Unicom 122.8, [thanks for the service], bye!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is pilots' responsibility to look out for ATC while they fly. Sometimes, they forget, and controllers send them a &amp;quot;contactme&amp;quot; message via Euroscope on private message (there is a command for this). In real life, this won't happen - pilots who forget to register, are fined!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reserved words ==&lt;br /&gt;
Some words are reserved and should only be used, if they are meant (and NOT, if they are not):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''mayday''' and '''Pan-pan''': Only use it, when you declare it.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''takeoff''' and '''landing''': Only use it, when you clear (or read back) for takeoff or to land. If you inform a pilot to wait &amp;quot;two minutes to t... no: you  tell him/her &amp;quot;two minutes to departure&amp;quot;. If you inform a pilot about &amp;quot;late l...&amp;quot;, no: You inform him about &amp;quot;late clearance&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Affirm(ative)''' means &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;. '''Negative''' means &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. '''Unable''' means that the pilot can't do what the ATC just instructed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What?? Who?? Aaahm?? ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Say again''' is the only message you can pass all the time - if you did not understand, or if you did not understand if it was for you or not (and you MUST say it if you missed something!) For ATC there are three variants: Did you miss, WHO? Did you miss WHAT? Did you miss BOTH?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 ATC: Last station, callsign? (WHO?)&lt;br /&gt;
 ATC: Austrian 251, say again? (WHAT?)&lt;br /&gt;
 ATC: Last station, say again? (WHO AND WHAT?)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
= Phraseology at different stations =&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(work in progress - stay tuned!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Phraseology is vast. To learn them step by step, the most frequently used phraseology is collected here, grouped to stations:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Study Guide:Radio Telephony:DEL]] is for delivery stations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Study Guide:Radio Telephony:GND]] is for Ground stations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Study Guide:Radio Telephony:TWR]] is for Tower stations&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:OBS&amp;diff=2606</id>
		<title>Study Guide:OBS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:OBS&amp;diff=2606"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:48:08Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* More Info */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Delivery]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This chapter of the [[Study Guide]] has been designed to give you all the information needed to start monitoring as Observer (OBS) with the intention to become a controller. It contains the fundamental basics so that you can understand, what happens. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Radio Communication - Basics  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because communication is crucially important for Air Traffic Control a fixed format and syntax is used, in order to minimize the risk of misunderstandings and to keep messages short. Worldwide English is the primary language in use, however in most countries you are also allowed to use the local language. In Austria VFR flights can choose their language whereas IFR flights are all conducted in English.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic Rules  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to achieve the goals set above the following rules important: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#''Listen before you talk'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:It's impossible for two radio stations to transmit on the same frequency at the same time. If this is done, the radio signal will be blocked and this will result in a nasty noise on the frequency. Therefore it's important that every station monitors the frequency for about 5 seconds before transmitting, to make sure there’s no ongoing radio traffic. If you hear an ongoing conversation, wait until the conversation is over before you begin to transmit. Don’t start your communication if there is a read-back expected on the last transmission even if there is a short pause. &lt;br /&gt;
#''Think before you talk'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:The radio traffic flow should be as smooth as possible. To achieve this it's vital to &amp;quot;think first&amp;quot; before transmitting so that a clear, concise and uninterrupted message can be sent. &lt;br /&gt;
#''As far as possible use standard phraseology and syntax'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:To prevent misunderstandings and to maintain the radio traffic as effective as possible, stick to standardized phraseology and skip slang and of course private messages. This might sound strange at the beginning, but the aim is simple: radio quality may be bad; controllers and pilots speak some hundred different languages; time to talk and listen may be scarce. Standard phraseology helps a great deal to shorten communication and prevent misunderstandings. In the course of this study guide and training documents, you will learn the relevant phrases. Stick to them - it's real life, and it's relevant on VATSIM, and you need to know it to pass your tests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Callsigns and Principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every participant on the network has his own Callsign. Controller Positions are identified by their location and their Function (e.g. Wien Radar, Graz Tower), Aircraft either by their Registration (e.g. OE-ALB) or an Airline Callsign followed by a combination of numbers and letters (e.g. AUA25LM, SWR387). The airline is called by its real name (i.e. &amp;quot;Austrian&amp;quot; for AUA). Numbers and letters are spelled using the  ICAO-Alphabet, found here in the [[Buchstabiertabelle]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radio communication is safety-relevant. If anything goes wrong, [[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iX--6ee7nsA this]] happens. Therefore, it follows four crucial principles:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 1) Syntax ====&lt;br /&gt;
A call has the following structure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Called station, calling station, Message&lt;br /&gt;
 Example: '''LHA123:''' Wien Radar, Leipzig Air 123, FL240.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 2) Readback ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a controller (or aircraft) transmits a message to a station it is very important that the receiving station acknowledge the message. But saying &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot; is only in movies - what are you &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot;ing? The called station understood something, but what? Therefore, the '''message content has to be read back in relevant parts'''. If the receiving station does not acknowledge, the transmitted message is considered as a lost transmission and the sender should resend the message or check if the receiving station got the message. For a controller, this is extremely important to remember, since if a pilot's readback is incorrect, the controller has to ask for confirmation, i.e a new readback. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Items that '''must always be read back''' in full are all clearances (including altitudes, headings, speeds, radials etc), runway in use, altimeter setting (QNH or QFE) and transition level, and all frequencies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*There are also items that '''should not be read''' back to reduce unnesessary radio transmissions. In short, this includes everything not mentioned above, but a few examples are: wind, temperature and other weather information (except altimeter settings) and traffic information in detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_APP:''' AUA251, turn left heading 290, descend Altitude 5000 feet, QNH 1019.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Turn left heading 290, descending altitude 5000 feet QNH 1019, AUA251 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_TWR:''' AUA251, traffic information: Cessna on rwy 16 downwind, report in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Traffic in sight, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_GND:''' OE-DLT, taxi to Holding Point Runway 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, QNH 1019, give way&lt;br /&gt;
 to Speedbird Airbus A320 crossing right to left on M.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''OE-DLT:''' Taxiing to H/P Rwy 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, giving way on M, QNH 1019, OE-DLT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 3) Contact - messages - handoff ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All conversation follows the following pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
#Initial call&lt;br /&gt;
# ... messages (there may be pauses, and other messages to other stations)&lt;br /&gt;
# handoff/handover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Initial Call:''' An aircraft arrives in an airspace and needs to tell &amp;quot;Hi, I'm here!&amp;quot;. To initiate the contact between two stations an initial call has to be made. Example - Austrian 251 is calling Wien Tower:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Wien Delivery, Austrian 251, Radiocheck.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL:''' Austrian 251, Wien Delivery, read you 5 by 5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Messages:''' Once contact is established, you stay in contact, even if you don't talk to each other. This means: You know that the other station knows of you and counts on you to pick up conversation any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ongoing conversation, two rules apply:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* when giving an instruction the callsign is first (the called station needs to know that it is for him/for her.)&lt;br /&gt;
* when reading back the callsign is at the end (although you are allowed to do it at the beginning too - the instructing station needs to know if the message has reached the right recipient).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually, ATC gives instructions and pilots read back, so in normal operations this means: ATC omits his own station (but says the called station), and pilots omit the calling station and report their callsign at the end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now one Example for a normal Clearence. You will learn in detail in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Situation:''' Austrian 251 is requesting IFR clearance to München at Gate C34,Type of aircraft is a Fokker 70, Information C is the latest weather recieved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Wien Delivery, Austrian 251, Information C, Gate C34, request IFR clearence to München.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL''' Austrian 251, cleared to München via SITNI4C departure, initial climb 5000 feet, Squawk 4612, QNH 1012.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Cleared to München via SITNI4C departure, initial climb 5000 feet, Squawk 4612, QNH 1012, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Handover/Handoff''': At some point, it's time to say good bye - that is a handoff or handover. It is vital that no aircraft disappears from the radio. Handover is a transfer to another station. Handoff is dropping contact into uncontrolled airspace (like UNICOM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL''' Austrian 251, readback correct, for push and start contact Wien Ground on 121.600.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251''': Contacting Wien Ground on 121.600, Austrian 251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 4) Reserved words ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some words are reserved and should only be used, if they are meant:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''mayday''' and '''Pan-pan''': Only use it, when you declare it.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''takeoff''' and '''landing''': Only use it, when you clear (or read back) for takeoff or to land. If you report ready for t... no: you report ready for departure.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Affirm(ative)''' means &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;. '''Negative''' means &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. '''Unable''' means that the pilot can't do what the ATC just instructed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== METAR and TAF  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a controller, METAR and TAF are the base for clearances: They determine procedures, active runways and even airport closures. When you become a controller, you should be able to understand METAR and TAF. Startign with [[Study Guide:TWR]], you will learn what it means for your decisions as controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
References for detailed information: [[METAR]], [[TAF]]&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is an Aerodrome organized  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As airports grew bigger over time also the workload for the Air Traffic Controller handling the traffic got bigger. Soon it was necessary to distribute this workload onto more than one controller in order to be able to cope with the traffic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the Tower Position got divided into thre basic types with different areas of responsibility. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Clearance delivery (DEL), responsible for checking flightplans and issuing IFR clearances to departing aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
#Ground (GND), responsible for all traffic on the apron and the taxiways. &lt;br /&gt;
#Tower (TWR), responsible for movements on the runway and within its associated Control Zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because Tower and Ground controllers rely very strongly on what they see out of their window, these are the positions which are situated within the airports control tower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from that there are the controllers who manage the traffic once it has left the control zone. They are again divided into: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#APP Positions, managing the traffic within the airports vicinity (the so called TMA, Terminal Area). In Austria they are situated directly at the airports. &lt;br /&gt;
#ACC (Area Control Center, on VATSIM the abbreviation CTR is used) positions, which are responsible for enroute traffic. They reside in Vienna.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the air is too crowded, APP and CTR can be divided horizontally (lower and higher APP), vertically (north APP and south APP), or a director responsible for approach spacing - but we won't want to make it too complicated for now. Local procedures and agreements regulate it, how this is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Since they all use their radar to control air traffic, they are also called Radar positions.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
=Login as OBS=&lt;br /&gt;
With this preparation, you are fit to login as Observer. You can listen and understand what happens and learn from others doing. Important info and the Euroscope software can be found [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=SOFTWARE_ATC here]]. (You must be accepted as controller to access the page. If you are not yet, contact your mentor).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please abide to the following rules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Logged on as Observer, your callsign should be a letter code (best are your initials) and &amp;quot;_OBS&amp;quot;, like &amp;quot;CF_OBS&amp;quot;. In the &amp;quot;connect&amp;quot; dialogue, set the visual range to 100 - the maximum allowed range for observers. If you exceed, you will get a nasty whack from a VATSIM supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can log onto the VACC Austria Teamspeak server. Software and access instructions are [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=SOFTWARE_PILOTS here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Teamspek is recommended - vital ATC coordination happens there. If you want to listen to controller coordination then switch channel to where those controllers are who you monitor. Say hello, say that you observe and learn, and then shup up. Don't even ask if intense coordination is going on - wait for a pause in traffic and conversation. Do not change into a channel where an exam is going on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you ask a question, then wait for a pause and ask first, if you can ask a question. You can do so by PM in Euroscope or via Teamspeak. Do not ask if traffic is intense, if a training or an exam is going on (in trainings, you might want to ask the trainer in a PM first). Controllers are happy to explain, but ATC is first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Information=&lt;br /&gt;
*from the [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/VACC_AUT_BasicLesson.pdf VACC Austria Basic lesson]&lt;br /&gt;
*on definitions from [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/vacc-sag-definitions.pdf VACC SAG]&lt;br /&gt;
*on METAR from [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/metar-vacc-sag.pdf VACC SAG]&lt;br /&gt;
* METAR definition [http://www.skybrary.aero/index.php/METAR SKY BRARY] &lt;br /&gt;
*on a lot more brilliant documents from [http://forum.vacc-sag.org/?PAGE=training_pilot VACC SAG]. (with which we share important training documents)&lt;br /&gt;
To download them, register yourself as user with VACC-SAG, it's free.&lt;br /&gt;
*a very explained in detail documentation is the Pilots Guide check here also the METAR section [http://vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=PTM Meteorologie]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== More information on Radiotelephony ====&lt;br /&gt;
... are not really an option at VATSIM. We take the real thing as reference, and this reference is '''really''' thick. Some links for further reading:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [[http://www.caa.co.uk/docs/33/CAP413.PDF British CAA Radiotelephony Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The [[http://ivaosy-data.com/Radiotelephony_Manual-Doc_9432.pdf ICAO Document 9432 on Radiotelephony]]&lt;br /&gt;
* As work in progress: there is a Wiki Page: [[Study Guide:Radio Telephony]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'' Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Delivery]]''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:OBS&amp;diff=2605</id>
		<title>Study Guide:OBS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:OBS&amp;diff=2605"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:47:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* 3) Contact - messages - handoff */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Delivery]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This chapter of the [[Study Guide]] has been designed to give you all the information needed to start monitoring as Observer (OBS) with the intention to become a controller. It contains the fundamental basics so that you can understand, what happens. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Radio Communication - Basics  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because communication is crucially important for Air Traffic Control a fixed format and syntax is used, in order to minimize the risk of misunderstandings and to keep messages short. Worldwide English is the primary language in use, however in most countries you are also allowed to use the local language. In Austria VFR flights can choose their language whereas IFR flights are all conducted in English.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic Rules  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to achieve the goals set above the following rules important: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#''Listen before you talk'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:It's impossible for two radio stations to transmit on the same frequency at the same time. If this is done, the radio signal will be blocked and this will result in a nasty noise on the frequency. Therefore it's important that every station monitors the frequency for about 5 seconds before transmitting, to make sure there’s no ongoing radio traffic. If you hear an ongoing conversation, wait until the conversation is over before you begin to transmit. Don’t start your communication if there is a read-back expected on the last transmission even if there is a short pause. &lt;br /&gt;
#''Think before you talk'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:The radio traffic flow should be as smooth as possible. To achieve this it's vital to &amp;quot;think first&amp;quot; before transmitting so that a clear, concise and uninterrupted message can be sent. &lt;br /&gt;
#''As far as possible use standard phraseology and syntax'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:To prevent misunderstandings and to maintain the radio traffic as effective as possible, stick to standardized phraseology and skip slang and of course private messages. This might sound strange at the beginning, but the aim is simple: radio quality may be bad; controllers and pilots speak some hundred different languages; time to talk and listen may be scarce. Standard phraseology helps a great deal to shorten communication and prevent misunderstandings. In the course of this study guide and training documents, you will learn the relevant phrases. Stick to them - it's real life, and it's relevant on VATSIM, and you need to know it to pass your tests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Callsigns and Principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every participant on the network has his own Callsign. Controller Positions are identified by their location and their Function (e.g. Wien Radar, Graz Tower), Aircraft either by their Registration (e.g. OE-ALB) or an Airline Callsign followed by a combination of numbers and letters (e.g. AUA25LM, SWR387). The airline is called by its real name (i.e. &amp;quot;Austrian&amp;quot; for AUA). Numbers and letters are spelled using the  ICAO-Alphabet, found here in the [[Buchstabiertabelle]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radio communication is safety-relevant. If anything goes wrong, [[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iX--6ee7nsA this]] happens. Therefore, it follows four crucial principles:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 1) Syntax ====&lt;br /&gt;
A call has the following structure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Called station, calling station, Message&lt;br /&gt;
 Example: '''LHA123:''' Wien Radar, Leipzig Air 123, FL240.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 2) Readback ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a controller (or aircraft) transmits a message to a station it is very important that the receiving station acknowledge the message. But saying &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot; is only in movies - what are you &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot;ing? The called station understood something, but what? Therefore, the '''message content has to be read back in relevant parts'''. If the receiving station does not acknowledge, the transmitted message is considered as a lost transmission and the sender should resend the message or check if the receiving station got the message. For a controller, this is extremely important to remember, since if a pilot's readback is incorrect, the controller has to ask for confirmation, i.e a new readback. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Items that '''must always be read back''' in full are all clearances (including altitudes, headings, speeds, radials etc), runway in use, altimeter setting (QNH or QFE) and transition level, and all frequencies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*There are also items that '''should not be read''' back to reduce unnesessary radio transmissions. In short, this includes everything not mentioned above, but a few examples are: wind, temperature and other weather information (except altimeter settings) and traffic information in detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_APP:''' AUA251, turn left heading 290, descend Altitude 5000 feet, QNH 1019.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Turn left heading 290, descending altitude 5000 feet QNH 1019, AUA251 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_TWR:''' AUA251, traffic information: Cessna on rwy 16 downwind, report in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Traffic in sight, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_GND:''' OE-DLT, taxi to Holding Point Runway 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, QNH 1019, give way&lt;br /&gt;
 to Speedbird Airbus A320 crossing right to left on M.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''OE-DLT:''' Taxiing to H/P Rwy 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, giving way on M, QNH 1019, OE-DLT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 3) Contact - messages - handoff ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All conversation follows the following pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
#Initial call&lt;br /&gt;
# ... messages (there may be pauses, and other messages to other stations)&lt;br /&gt;
# handoff/handover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Initial Call:''' An aircraft arrives in an airspace and needs to tell &amp;quot;Hi, I'm here!&amp;quot;. To initiate the contact between two stations an initial call has to be made. Example - Austrian 251 is calling Wien Tower:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Wien Delivery, Austrian 251, Radiocheck.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL:''' Austrian 251, Wien Delivery, read you 5 by 5.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Messages:''' Once contact is established, you stay in contact, even if you don't talk to each other. This means: You know that the other station knows of you and counts on you to pick up conversation any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ongoing conversation, two rules apply:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* when giving an instruction the callsign is first (the called station needs to know that it is for him/for her.)&lt;br /&gt;
* when reading back the callsign is at the end (although you are allowed to do it at the beginning too - the instructing station needs to know if the message has reached the right recipient).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually, ATC gives instructions and pilots read back, so in normal operations this means: ATC omits his own station (but says the called station), and pilots omit the calling station and report their callsign at the end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now one Example for a normal Clearence. You will learn in detail in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Situation:''' Austrian 251 is requesting IFR clearance to München at Gate C34,Type of aircraft is a Fokker 70, Information C is the latest weather recieved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Wien Delivery, Austrian 251, Information C, Gate C34, request IFR clearence to München.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL''' Austrian 251, cleared to München via SITNI4C departure, initial climb 5000 feet, Squawk 4612, QNH 1012.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Cleared to München via SITNI4C departure, initial climb 5000 feet, Squawk 4612, QNH 1012, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Handover/Handoff''': At some point, it's time to say good bye - that is a handoff or handover. It is vital that no aircraft disappears from the radio. Handover is a transfer to another station. Handoff is dropping contact into uncontrolled airspace (like UNICOM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL''' Austrian 251, readback correct, for push and start contact Wien Ground on 121.600.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251''': Contacting Wien Ground on 121.600, Austrian 251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 4) Reserved words ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some words are reserved and should only be used, if they are meant:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''mayday''' and '''Pan-pan''': Only use it, when you declare it.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''takeoff''' and '''landing''': Only use it, when you clear (or read back) for takeoff or to land. If you report ready for t... no: you report ready for departure.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Affirm(ative)''' means &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;. '''Negative''' means &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. '''Unable''' means that the pilot can't do what the ATC just instructed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== METAR and TAF  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a controller, METAR and TAF are the base for clearances: They determine procedures, active runways and even airport closures. When you become a controller, you should be able to understand METAR and TAF. Startign with [[Study Guide:TWR]], you will learn what it means for your decisions as controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
References for detailed information: [[METAR]], [[TAF]]&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is an Aerodrome organized  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As airports grew bigger over time also the workload for the Air Traffic Controller handling the traffic got bigger. Soon it was necessary to distribute this workload onto more than one controller in order to be able to cope with the traffic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the Tower Position got divided into thre basic types with different areas of responsibility. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Clearance delivery (DEL), responsible for checking flightplans and issuing IFR clearances to departing aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
#Ground (GND), responsible for all traffic on the apron and the taxiways. &lt;br /&gt;
#Tower (TWR), responsible for movements on the runway and within its associated Control Zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because Tower and Ground controllers rely very strongly on what they see out of their window, these are the positions which are situated within the airports control tower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from that there are the controllers who manage the traffic once it has left the control zone. They are again divided into: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#APP Positions, managing the traffic within the airports vicinity (the so called TMA, Terminal Area). In Austria they are situated directly at the airports. &lt;br /&gt;
#ACC (Area Control Center, on VATSIM the abbreviation CTR is used) positions, which are responsible for enroute traffic. They reside in Vienna.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the air is too crowded, APP and CTR can be divided horizontally (lower and higher APP), vertically (north APP and south APP), or a director responsible for approach spacing - but we won't want to make it too complicated for now. Local procedures and agreements regulate it, how this is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Since they all use their radar to control air traffic, they are also called Radar positions.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
=Login as OBS=&lt;br /&gt;
With this preparation, you are fit to login as Observer. You can listen and understand what happens and learn from others doing. Important info and the Euroscope software can be found [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=SOFTWARE_ATC here]]. (You must be accepted as controller to access the page. If you are not yet, contact your mentor).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please abide to the following rules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Logged on as Observer, your callsign should be a letter code (best are your initials) and &amp;quot;_OBS&amp;quot;, like &amp;quot;CF_OBS&amp;quot;. In the &amp;quot;connect&amp;quot; dialogue, set the visual range to 100 - the maximum allowed range for observers. If you exceed, you will get a nasty whack from a VATSIM supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can log onto the VACC Austria Teamspeak server. Software and access instructions are [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=SOFTWARE_PILOTS here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Teamspek is recommended - vital ATC coordination happens there. If you want to listen to controller coordination then switch channel to where those controllers are who you monitor. Say hello, say that you observe and learn, and then shup up. Don't even ask if intense coordination is going on - wait for a pause in traffic and conversation. Do not change into a channel where an exam is going on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you ask a question, then wait for a pause and ask first, if you can ask a question. You can do so by PM in Euroscope or via Teamspeak. Do not ask if traffic is intense, if a training or an exam is going on (in trainings, you might want to ask the trainer in a PM first). Controllers are happy to explain, but ATC is first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Info=&lt;br /&gt;
*from the [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/VACC_AUT_BasicLesson.pdf VACC Austria Basic lesson]&lt;br /&gt;
*on definitions from [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/vacc-sag-definitions.pdf VACC SAG]&lt;br /&gt;
*on METAR from [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/metar-vacc-sag.pdf VACC SAG]&lt;br /&gt;
* METAR definition [http://www.skybrary.aero/index.php/METAR SKY BRARY] &lt;br /&gt;
*on a lot more brilliant documents from [http://forum.vacc-sag.org/?PAGE=training_pilot VACC SAG]. (with which we share important training documents)&lt;br /&gt;
To download them, register yourself as user with VACC-SAG, it's free.&lt;br /&gt;
*a very explained in detail documentation is the Pilots Guide check here also the METAR section [http://vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=PTM Meteorologie]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== More information on Radiotelephony ====&lt;br /&gt;
... are not really an option at VATSIM. We take the real thing as reference, and this reference is '''really''' thick. Some links for further reading:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [[http://www.caa.co.uk/docs/33/CAP413.PDF British CAA Radiotelephony Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The [[http://ivaosy-data.com/Radiotelephony_Manual-Doc_9432.pdf ICAO Document 9432 on Radiotelephony]]&lt;br /&gt;
* As work in progress: there is a Wiki Page: [[Study Guide:Radio Telephony]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'' Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Delivery]]''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:OBS&amp;diff=2604</id>
		<title>Study Guide:OBS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:OBS&amp;diff=2604"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:40:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* 2) Readback */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Delivery]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This chapter of the [[Study Guide]] has been designed to give you all the information needed to start monitoring as Observer (OBS) with the intention to become a controller. It contains the fundamental basics so that you can understand, what happens. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Radio Communication - Basics  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because communication is crucially important for Air Traffic Control a fixed format and syntax is used, in order to minimize the risk of misunderstandings and to keep messages short. Worldwide English is the primary language in use, however in most countries you are also allowed to use the local language. In Austria VFR flights can choose their language whereas IFR flights are all conducted in English.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic Rules  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to achieve the goals set above the following rules important: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#''Listen before you talk'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:It's impossible for two radio stations to transmit on the same frequency at the same time. If this is done, the radio signal will be blocked and this will result in a nasty noise on the frequency. Therefore it's important that every station monitors the frequency for about 5 seconds before transmitting, to make sure there’s no ongoing radio traffic. If you hear an ongoing conversation, wait until the conversation is over before you begin to transmit. Don’t start your communication if there is a read-back expected on the last transmission even if there is a short pause. &lt;br /&gt;
#''Think before you talk'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:The radio traffic flow should be as smooth as possible. To achieve this it's vital to &amp;quot;think first&amp;quot; before transmitting so that a clear, concise and uninterrupted message can be sent. &lt;br /&gt;
#''As far as possible use standard phraseology and syntax'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:To prevent misunderstandings and to maintain the radio traffic as effective as possible, stick to standardized phraseology and skip slang and of course private messages. This might sound strange at the beginning, but the aim is simple: radio quality may be bad; controllers and pilots speak some hundred different languages; time to talk and listen may be scarce. Standard phraseology helps a great deal to shorten communication and prevent misunderstandings. In the course of this study guide and training documents, you will learn the relevant phrases. Stick to them - it's real life, and it's relevant on VATSIM, and you need to know it to pass your tests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Callsigns and Principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every participant on the network has his own Callsign. Controller Positions are identified by their location and their Function (e.g. Wien Radar, Graz Tower), Aircraft either by their Registration (e.g. OE-ALB) or an Airline Callsign followed by a combination of numbers and letters (e.g. AUA25LM, SWR387). The airline is called by its real name (i.e. &amp;quot;Austrian&amp;quot; for AUA). Numbers and letters are spelled using the  ICAO-Alphabet, found here in the [[Buchstabiertabelle]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radio communication is safety-relevant. If anything goes wrong, [[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iX--6ee7nsA this]] happens. Therefore, it follows four crucial principles:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 1) Syntax ====&lt;br /&gt;
A call has the following structure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Called station, calling station, Message&lt;br /&gt;
 Example: '''LHA123:''' Wien Radar, Leipzig Air 123, FL240.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 2) Readback ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a controller (or aircraft) transmits a message to a station it is very important that the receiving station acknowledge the message. But saying &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot; is only in movies - what are you &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot;ing? The called station understood something, but what? Therefore, the '''message content has to be read back in relevant parts'''. If the receiving station does not acknowledge, the transmitted message is considered as a lost transmission and the sender should resend the message or check if the receiving station got the message. For a controller, this is extremely important to remember, since if a pilot's readback is incorrect, the controller has to ask for confirmation, i.e a new readback. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Items that '''must always be read back''' in full are all clearances (including altitudes, headings, speeds, radials etc), runway in use, altimeter setting (QNH or QFE) and transition level, and all frequencies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*There are also items that '''should not be read''' back to reduce unnesessary radio transmissions. In short, this includes everything not mentioned above, but a few examples are: wind, temperature and other weather information (except altimeter settings) and traffic information in detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_APP:''' AUA251, turn left heading 290, descend Altitude 5000 feet, QNH 1019.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Turn left heading 290, descending altitude 5000 feet QNH 1019, AUA251 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_TWR:''' AUA251, traffic information: Cessna on rwy 16 downwind, report in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Traffic in sight, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_GND:''' OE-DLT, taxi to Holding Point Runway 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, QNH 1019, give way&lt;br /&gt;
 to Speedbird Airbus A320 crossing right to left on M.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''OE-DLT:''' Taxiing to H/P Rwy 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, giving way on M, QNH 1019, OE-DLT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 3) Contact - messages - handoff ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All conversation follows the following pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
#Initial call&lt;br /&gt;
# ... messages (there may be pauses, and other messages to other stations)&lt;br /&gt;
# handoff/handover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Initial Call:''' An aircraft arrives in an airspace and needs to tell &amp;quot;Hi, I'm here!&amp;quot;. To initiate the contact between two stations an initial call has to be made. Example - Austrian 251 is calling Wien Tower:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Wien Delivery, Austrian 251, [servus], Radiocheck &lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL:''' Austrian 251, Wien Delivery, [servus,] read you 5 by 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Messages:''' Once contact is established, you stay in contact, even if you don't talk to each other. This means: You know that the other station knows of you and counts on you to pick up conversation any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ongoing conversation, two rules apply:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* when giving an instruction the callsign is first (the called station needs to know that it is for him/for her.)&lt;br /&gt;
* when reading back the callsign is at the end (although you are allowed to do it at the beginning too - the instructing station needs to know if the message has reached the right recipient).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually, ATC give instructions and pilots read back, so in normal operations this means: ATC omits his own station (but says the called station), and pilots omit the calling station and report their callsign at the end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now one Example for normal Clearence. You will learn in detail in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Situation:''' Austrian 251 is Requesting clearance to München, Gate C34, Fokker 70, Info C on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Good Day Wien Delivery, Austrian 251 Info C on board, Gate C34, requesting clearence to München.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL''' Austrian 251, cleared to München via SITNI4C, initial climb 5000 ft, Squawk 4612, info C correct.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Cleared to München, Sitni4C, Squawk 4612, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Handover/Handoff''': At some point, it's time to say good bye - that is handoff or handover. It is vital that no aircraft disappears from the radio. Handover is transfer to another station. Handoff is dropping contact into uncontrolled airspace (like UNICOM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL''' Austrian 251, readback correct, for push and start contact Wien Ground (LOWW_GND) 119.4, Bye Bye.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251''': Contacting Ground 119,4, bye!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 4) Reserved words ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some words are reserved and should only be used, if they are meant:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''mayday''' and '''Pan-pan''': Only use it, when you declare it.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''takeoff''' and '''landing''': Only use it, when you clear (or read back) for takeoff or to land. If you report ready for t... no: you report ready for departure.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Affirm(ative)''' means &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;. '''Negative''' means &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. '''Unable''' means that the pilot can't do what the ATC just instructed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== METAR and TAF  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a controller, METAR and TAF are the base for clearances: They determine procedures, active runways and even airport closures. When you become a controller, you should be able to understand METAR and TAF. Startign with [[Study Guide:TWR]], you will learn what it means for your decisions as controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
References for detailed information: [[METAR]], [[TAF]]&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is an Aerodrome organized  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As airports grew bigger over time also the workload for the Air Traffic Controller handling the traffic got bigger. Soon it was necessary to distribute this workload onto more than one controller in order to be able to cope with the traffic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the Tower Position got divided into thre basic types with different areas of responsibility. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Clearance delivery (DEL), responsible for checking flightplans and issuing IFR clearances to departing aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
#Ground (GND), responsible for all traffic on the apron and the taxiways. &lt;br /&gt;
#Tower (TWR), responsible for movements on the runway and within its associated Control Zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because Tower and Ground controllers rely very strongly on what they see out of their window, these are the positions which are situated within the airports control tower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from that there are the controllers who manage the traffic once it has left the control zone. They are again divided into: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#APP Positions, managing the traffic within the airports vicinity (the so called TMA, Terminal Area). In Austria they are situated directly at the airports. &lt;br /&gt;
#ACC (Area Control Center, on VATSIM the abbreviation CTR is used) positions, which are responsible for enroute traffic. They reside in Vienna.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the air is too crowded, APP and CTR can be divided horizontally (lower and higher APP), vertically (north APP and south APP), or a director responsible for approach spacing - but we won't want to make it too complicated for now. Local procedures and agreements regulate it, how this is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Since they all use their radar to control air traffic, they are also called Radar positions.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
=Login as OBS=&lt;br /&gt;
With this preparation, you are fit to login as Observer. You can listen and understand what happens and learn from others doing. Important info and the Euroscope software can be found [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=SOFTWARE_ATC here]]. (You must be accepted as controller to access the page. If you are not yet, contact your mentor).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please abide to the following rules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Logged on as Observer, your callsign should be a letter code (best are your initials) and &amp;quot;_OBS&amp;quot;, like &amp;quot;CF_OBS&amp;quot;. In the &amp;quot;connect&amp;quot; dialogue, set the visual range to 100 - the maximum allowed range for observers. If you exceed, you will get a nasty whack from a VATSIM supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can log onto the VACC Austria Teamspeak server. Software and access instructions are [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=SOFTWARE_PILOTS here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Teamspek is recommended - vital ATC coordination happens there. If you want to listen to controller coordination then switch channel to where those controllers are who you monitor. Say hello, say that you observe and learn, and then shup up. Don't even ask if intense coordination is going on - wait for a pause in traffic and conversation. Do not change into a channel where an exam is going on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you ask a question, then wait for a pause and ask first, if you can ask a question. You can do so by PM in Euroscope or via Teamspeak. Do not ask if traffic is intense, if a training or an exam is going on (in trainings, you might want to ask the trainer in a PM first). Controllers are happy to explain, but ATC is first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Info=&lt;br /&gt;
*from the [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/VACC_AUT_BasicLesson.pdf VACC Austria Basic lesson]&lt;br /&gt;
*on definitions from [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/vacc-sag-definitions.pdf VACC SAG]&lt;br /&gt;
*on METAR from [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/metar-vacc-sag.pdf VACC SAG]&lt;br /&gt;
* METAR definition [http://www.skybrary.aero/index.php/METAR SKY BRARY] &lt;br /&gt;
*on a lot more brilliant documents from [http://forum.vacc-sag.org/?PAGE=training_pilot VACC SAG]. (with which we share important training documents)&lt;br /&gt;
To download them, register yourself as user with VACC-SAG, it's free.&lt;br /&gt;
*a very explained in detail documentation is the Pilots Guide check here also the METAR section [http://vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=PTM Meteorologie]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== More information on Radiotelephony ====&lt;br /&gt;
... are not really an option at VATSIM. We take the real thing as reference, and this reference is '''really''' thick. Some links for further reading:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [[http://www.caa.co.uk/docs/33/CAP413.PDF British CAA Radiotelephony Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The [[http://ivaosy-data.com/Radiotelephony_Manual-Doc_9432.pdf ICAO Document 9432 on Radiotelephony]]&lt;br /&gt;
* As work in progress: there is a Wiki Page: [[Study Guide:Radio Telephony]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'' Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Delivery]]''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:OBS&amp;diff=2603</id>
		<title>Study Guide:OBS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:OBS&amp;diff=2603"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:40:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* 1) Syntax */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Delivery]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This chapter of the [[Study Guide]] has been designed to give you all the information needed to start monitoring as Observer (OBS) with the intention to become a controller. It contains the fundamental basics so that you can understand, what happens. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Radio Communication - Basics  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because communication is crucially important for Air Traffic Control a fixed format and syntax is used, in order to minimize the risk of misunderstandings and to keep messages short. Worldwide English is the primary language in use, however in most countries you are also allowed to use the local language. In Austria VFR flights can choose their language whereas IFR flights are all conducted in English.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic Rules  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to achieve the goals set above the following rules important: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#''Listen before you talk'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:It's impossible for two radio stations to transmit on the same frequency at the same time. If this is done, the radio signal will be blocked and this will result in a nasty noise on the frequency. Therefore it's important that every station monitors the frequency for about 5 seconds before transmitting, to make sure there’s no ongoing radio traffic. If you hear an ongoing conversation, wait until the conversation is over before you begin to transmit. Don’t start your communication if there is a read-back expected on the last transmission even if there is a short pause. &lt;br /&gt;
#''Think before you talk'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:The radio traffic flow should be as smooth as possible. To achieve this it's vital to &amp;quot;think first&amp;quot; before transmitting so that a clear, concise and uninterrupted message can be sent. &lt;br /&gt;
#''As far as possible use standard phraseology and syntax'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:To prevent misunderstandings and to maintain the radio traffic as effective as possible, stick to standardized phraseology and skip slang and of course private messages. This might sound strange at the beginning, but the aim is simple: radio quality may be bad; controllers and pilots speak some hundred different languages; time to talk and listen may be scarce. Standard phraseology helps a great deal to shorten communication and prevent misunderstandings. In the course of this study guide and training documents, you will learn the relevant phrases. Stick to them - it's real life, and it's relevant on VATSIM, and you need to know it to pass your tests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Callsigns and Principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every participant on the network has his own Callsign. Controller Positions are identified by their location and their Function (e.g. Wien Radar, Graz Tower), Aircraft either by their Registration (e.g. OE-ALB) or an Airline Callsign followed by a combination of numbers and letters (e.g. AUA25LM, SWR387). The airline is called by its real name (i.e. &amp;quot;Austrian&amp;quot; for AUA). Numbers and letters are spelled using the  ICAO-Alphabet, found here in the [[Buchstabiertabelle]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radio communication is safety-relevant. If anything goes wrong, [[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iX--6ee7nsA this]] happens. Therefore, it follows four crucial principles:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 1) Syntax ====&lt;br /&gt;
A call has the following structure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Called station, calling station, Message&lt;br /&gt;
 Example: '''LHA123:''' Wien Radar, Leipzig Air 123, FL240.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 2) Readback ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a controller (or aircraft) transmits a message to a station it is very important that the receiving station acknowledge the message. But saying &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot; is only in movies - what are you &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot;ing? The called station understood something, but what? Therefore, the '''message content has to be read back in relevant parts'''. If the receiving station does not acknowledge, the transmitted message is considered as a lost transmission and the sender should resend the message or check if the receiving station got the message. For a controller, this is extremely important to remember, since if a pilot's readback is incorrect, the controller has to ask for confirmation, i.e a new readback. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Items that '''must always be read back''' in full are all clearances (including altitudes, headings, speeds, radials etc), runway in use, altimeter setting (QNH or QFE) and transition level, and all frequencies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*There are also items that '''should not be read''' back to reduce unnesessary radio transmissions. In short, this includes everything not mentioned above, but a few examples are: wind, temperature and other weather information (except altimeter settings) and traffic information in detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_APP:''' AUA251, turn left heading 290, descend Altitude 5000 feet, QNH 1019.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Turn left heading 290, descending altitude 5000 feet QNH 1019, AUA251 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_TWR:''' AUA251, traffic information: Cessna on rwy 16 downwind, report in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Traffic in sight, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_GND:''' OE-DLT, taxi to Holding Point Runway 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, QNH 1019, give way&lt;br /&gt;
 to Speedbird Airbus A320 crossing you right to left on M.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''OE-DLT:''' Taxiing to H/P Rwy 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, giving way on M, QNH 1019, OE-DLT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 3) Contact - messages - handoff ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All conversation follows the following pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
#Initial call&lt;br /&gt;
# ... messages (there may be pauses, and other messages to other stations)&lt;br /&gt;
# handoff/handover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Initial Call:''' An aircraft arrives in an airspace and needs to tell &amp;quot;Hi, I'm here!&amp;quot;. To initiate the contact between two stations an initial call has to be made. Example - Austrian 251 is calling Wien Tower:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Wien Delivery, Austrian 251, [servus], Radiocheck &lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL:''' Austrian 251, Wien Delivery, [servus,] read you 5 by 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Messages:''' Once contact is established, you stay in contact, even if you don't talk to each other. This means: You know that the other station knows of you and counts on you to pick up conversation any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ongoing conversation, two rules apply:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* when giving an instruction the callsign is first (the called station needs to know that it is for him/for her.)&lt;br /&gt;
* when reading back the callsign is at the end (although you are allowed to do it at the beginning too - the instructing station needs to know if the message has reached the right recipient).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually, ATC give instructions and pilots read back, so in normal operations this means: ATC omits his own station (but says the called station), and pilots omit the calling station and report their callsign at the end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now one Example for normal Clearence. You will learn in detail in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Situation:''' Austrian 251 is Requesting clearance to München, Gate C34, Fokker 70, Info C on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Good Day Wien Delivery, Austrian 251 Info C on board, Gate C34, requesting clearence to München.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL''' Austrian 251, cleared to München via SITNI4C, initial climb 5000 ft, Squawk 4612, info C correct.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Cleared to München, Sitni4C, Squawk 4612, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Handover/Handoff''': At some point, it's time to say good bye - that is handoff or handover. It is vital that no aircraft disappears from the radio. Handover is transfer to another station. Handoff is dropping contact into uncontrolled airspace (like UNICOM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL''' Austrian 251, readback correct, for push and start contact Wien Ground (LOWW_GND) 119.4, Bye Bye.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251''': Contacting Ground 119,4, bye!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 4) Reserved words ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some words are reserved and should only be used, if they are meant:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''mayday''' and '''Pan-pan''': Only use it, when you declare it.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''takeoff''' and '''landing''': Only use it, when you clear (or read back) for takeoff or to land. If you report ready for t... no: you report ready for departure.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Affirm(ative)''' means &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;. '''Negative''' means &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. '''Unable''' means that the pilot can't do what the ATC just instructed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== METAR and TAF  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a controller, METAR and TAF are the base for clearances: They determine procedures, active runways and even airport closures. When you become a controller, you should be able to understand METAR and TAF. Startign with [[Study Guide:TWR]], you will learn what it means for your decisions as controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
References for detailed information: [[METAR]], [[TAF]]&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is an Aerodrome organized  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As airports grew bigger over time also the workload for the Air Traffic Controller handling the traffic got bigger. Soon it was necessary to distribute this workload onto more than one controller in order to be able to cope with the traffic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the Tower Position got divided into thre basic types with different areas of responsibility. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Clearance delivery (DEL), responsible for checking flightplans and issuing IFR clearances to departing aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
#Ground (GND), responsible for all traffic on the apron and the taxiways. &lt;br /&gt;
#Tower (TWR), responsible for movements on the runway and within its associated Control Zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because Tower and Ground controllers rely very strongly on what they see out of their window, these are the positions which are situated within the airports control tower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from that there are the controllers who manage the traffic once it has left the control zone. They are again divided into: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#APP Positions, managing the traffic within the airports vicinity (the so called TMA, Terminal Area). In Austria they are situated directly at the airports. &lt;br /&gt;
#ACC (Area Control Center, on VATSIM the abbreviation CTR is used) positions, which are responsible for enroute traffic. They reside in Vienna.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the air is too crowded, APP and CTR can be divided horizontally (lower and higher APP), vertically (north APP and south APP), or a director responsible for approach spacing - but we won't want to make it too complicated for now. Local procedures and agreements regulate it, how this is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Since they all use their radar to control air traffic, they are also called Radar positions.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
=Login as OBS=&lt;br /&gt;
With this preparation, you are fit to login as Observer. You can listen and understand what happens and learn from others doing. Important info and the Euroscope software can be found [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=SOFTWARE_ATC here]]. (You must be accepted as controller to access the page. If you are not yet, contact your mentor).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please abide to the following rules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Logged on as Observer, your callsign should be a letter code (best are your initials) and &amp;quot;_OBS&amp;quot;, like &amp;quot;CF_OBS&amp;quot;. In the &amp;quot;connect&amp;quot; dialogue, set the visual range to 100 - the maximum allowed range for observers. If you exceed, you will get a nasty whack from a VATSIM supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can log onto the VACC Austria Teamspeak server. Software and access instructions are [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=SOFTWARE_PILOTS here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Teamspek is recommended - vital ATC coordination happens there. If you want to listen to controller coordination then switch channel to where those controllers are who you monitor. Say hello, say that you observe and learn, and then shup up. Don't even ask if intense coordination is going on - wait for a pause in traffic and conversation. Do not change into a channel where an exam is going on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you ask a question, then wait for a pause and ask first, if you can ask a question. You can do so by PM in Euroscope or via Teamspeak. Do not ask if traffic is intense, if a training or an exam is going on (in trainings, you might want to ask the trainer in a PM first). Controllers are happy to explain, but ATC is first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Info=&lt;br /&gt;
*from the [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/VACC_AUT_BasicLesson.pdf VACC Austria Basic lesson]&lt;br /&gt;
*on definitions from [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/vacc-sag-definitions.pdf VACC SAG]&lt;br /&gt;
*on METAR from [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/metar-vacc-sag.pdf VACC SAG]&lt;br /&gt;
* METAR definition [http://www.skybrary.aero/index.php/METAR SKY BRARY] &lt;br /&gt;
*on a lot more brilliant documents from [http://forum.vacc-sag.org/?PAGE=training_pilot VACC SAG]. (with which we share important training documents)&lt;br /&gt;
To download them, register yourself as user with VACC-SAG, it's free.&lt;br /&gt;
*a very explained in detail documentation is the Pilots Guide check here also the METAR section [http://vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=PTM Meteorologie]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== More information on Radiotelephony ====&lt;br /&gt;
... are not really an option at VATSIM. We take the real thing as reference, and this reference is '''really''' thick. Some links for further reading:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [[http://www.caa.co.uk/docs/33/CAP413.PDF British CAA Radiotelephony Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The [[http://ivaosy-data.com/Radiotelephony_Manual-Doc_9432.pdf ICAO Document 9432 on Radiotelephony]]&lt;br /&gt;
* As work in progress: there is a Wiki Page: [[Study Guide:Radio Telephony]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'' Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Delivery]]''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:OBS&amp;diff=2602</id>
		<title>Study Guide:OBS</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide:OBS&amp;diff=2602"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:39:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Basic Rules */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'' Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Delivery]]''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Introduction  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This chapter of the [[Study Guide]] has been designed to give you all the information needed to start monitoring as Observer (OBS) with the intention to become a controller. It contains the fundamental basics so that you can understand, what happens. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Radio Communication - Basics  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because communication is crucially important for Air Traffic Control a fixed format and syntax is used, in order to minimize the risk of misunderstandings and to keep messages short. Worldwide English is the primary language in use, however in most countries you are also allowed to use the local language. In Austria VFR flights can choose their language whereas IFR flights are all conducted in English.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Basic Rules  ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to achieve the goals set above the following rules important: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#''Listen before you talk'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:It's impossible for two radio stations to transmit on the same frequency at the same time. If this is done, the radio signal will be blocked and this will result in a nasty noise on the frequency. Therefore it's important that every station monitors the frequency for about 5 seconds before transmitting, to make sure there’s no ongoing radio traffic. If you hear an ongoing conversation, wait until the conversation is over before you begin to transmit. Don’t start your communication if there is a read-back expected on the last transmission even if there is a short pause. &lt;br /&gt;
#''Think before you talk'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:The radio traffic flow should be as smooth as possible. To achieve this it's vital to &amp;quot;think first&amp;quot; before transmitting so that a clear, concise and uninterrupted message can be sent. &lt;br /&gt;
#''As far as possible use standard phraseology and syntax'' &lt;br /&gt;
#:To prevent misunderstandings and to maintain the radio traffic as effective as possible, stick to standardized phraseology and skip slang and of course private messages. This might sound strange at the beginning, but the aim is simple: radio quality may be bad; controllers and pilots speak some hundred different languages; time to talk and listen may be scarce. Standard phraseology helps a great deal to shorten communication and prevent misunderstandings. In the course of this study guide and training documents, you will learn the relevant phrases. Stick to them - it's real life, and it's relevant on VATSIM, and you need to know it to pass your tests.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Callsigns and Principles ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every participant on the network has his own Callsign. Controller Positions are identified by their location and their Function (e.g. Wien Radar, Graz Tower), Aircraft either by their Registration (e.g. OE-ALB) or an Airline Callsign followed by a combination of numbers and letters (e.g. AUA25LM, SWR387). The airline is called by its real name (i.e. &amp;quot;Austrian&amp;quot; for AUA). Numbers and letters are spelled using the  ICAO-Alphabet, found here in the [[Buchstabiertabelle]]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Radio communication is safety-relevant. If anything goes wrong, [[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iX--6ee7nsA this]] happens. Therefore, it follows four crucial principles:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 1) Syntax ====&lt;br /&gt;
A call has the following structure: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Called station, calling station, Message&lt;br /&gt;
 Example: '''LHA123:''' Wien Radar, Leipzig Air 123 with you, FL240&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 2) Readback ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a controller (or aircraft) transmits a message to a station it is very important that the receiving station acknowledge the message. But saying &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot; is only in movies - what are you &amp;quot;roger&amp;quot;ing? The called station understood something, but what? Therefore, the '''message content has to be read back in relevant parts'''. If the receiving station does not acknowledge, the transmitted message is considered as a lost transmission and the sender should resend the message or check if the receiving station got the message. For a controller, this is extremely important to remember, since if a pilot's readback is incorrect, the controller has to ask for confirmation, i.e a new readback. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Items that '''must always be read back''' in full are all clearances (including altitudes, headings, speeds, radials etc), runway in use, altimeter setting (QNH or QFE) and transition level, and all frequencies. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*There are also items that '''should not be read''' back to reduce unnesessary radio transmissions. In short, this includes everything not mentioned above, but a few examples are: wind, temperature and other weather information (except altimeter settings) and traffic information in detail.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_APP:''' AUA251, turn left heading 290, descend Altitude 5000 feet, QNH 1019.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Turn left heading 290, descending altitude 5000 feet QNH 1019, AUA251 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_TWR:''' AUA251, traffic information: Cessna on rwy 16 downwind, report in sight.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Traffic in sight, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_GND:''' OE-DLT, taxi to Holding Point Runway 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, QNH 1019, give way&lt;br /&gt;
 to Speedbird Airbus A320 crossing you right to left on M.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''OE-DLT:''' Taxiing to H/P Rwy 29 via Exit 12, M and A1, giving way on M, QNH 1019, OE-DLT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 3) Contact - messages - handoff ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All conversation follows the following pattern:&lt;br /&gt;
#Initial call&lt;br /&gt;
# ... messages (there may be pauses, and other messages to other stations)&lt;br /&gt;
# handoff/handover.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Initial Call:''' An aircraft arrives in an airspace and needs to tell &amp;quot;Hi, I'm here!&amp;quot;. To initiate the contact between two stations an initial call has to be made. Example - Austrian 251 is calling Wien Tower:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Wien Delivery, Austrian 251, [servus], Radiocheck &lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL:''' Austrian 251, Wien Delivery, [servus,] read you 5 by 5&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Messages:''' Once contact is established, you stay in contact, even if you don't talk to each other. This means: You know that the other station knows of you and counts on you to pick up conversation any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In ongoing conversation, two rules apply:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* when giving an instruction the callsign is first (the called station needs to know that it is for him/for her.)&lt;br /&gt;
* when reading back the callsign is at the end (although you are allowed to do it at the beginning too - the instructing station needs to know if the message has reached the right recipient).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Usually, ATC give instructions and pilots read back, so in normal operations this means: ATC omits his own station (but says the called station), and pilots omit the calling station and report their callsign at the end.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now one Example for normal Clearence. You will learn in detail in the next section.&lt;br /&gt;
'''Situation:''' Austrian 251 is Requesting clearance to München, Gate C34, Fokker 70, Info C on board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Good Day Wien Delivery, Austrian 251 Info C on board, Gate C34, requesting clearence to München.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL''' Austrian 251, cleared to München via SITNI4C, initial climb 5000 ft, Squawk 4612, info C correct.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251:''' Cleared to München, Sitni4C, Squawk 4612, AUA251.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Handover/Handoff''': At some point, it's time to say good bye - that is handoff or handover. It is vital that no aircraft disappears from the radio. Handover is transfer to another station. Handoff is dropping contact into uncontrolled airspace (like UNICOM).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 '''LOWW_DEL''' Austrian 251, readback correct, for push and start contact Wien Ground (LOWW_GND) 119.4, Bye Bye.&lt;br /&gt;
 '''AUA251''': Contacting Ground 119,4, bye!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== 4) Reserved words ====&lt;br /&gt;
Some words are reserved and should only be used, if they are meant:&lt;br /&gt;
* '''mayday''' and '''Pan-pan''': Only use it, when you declare it.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''takeoff''' and '''landing''': Only use it, when you clear (or read back) for takeoff or to land. If you report ready for t... no: you report ready for departure.&lt;br /&gt;
* '''Affirm(ative)''' means &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;. '''Negative''' means &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. '''Unable''' means that the pilot can't do what the ATC just instructed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== METAR and TAF  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As a controller, METAR and TAF are the base for clearances: They determine procedures, active runways and even airport closures. When you become a controller, you should be able to understand METAR and TAF. Startign with [[Study Guide:TWR]], you will learn what it means for your decisions as controller.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
References for detailed information: [[METAR]], [[TAF]]&amp;amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How is an Aerodrome organized  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As airports grew bigger over time also the workload for the Air Traffic Controller handling the traffic got bigger. Soon it was necessary to distribute this workload onto more than one controller in order to be able to cope with the traffic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
So the Tower Position got divided into thre basic types with different areas of responsibility. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Clearance delivery (DEL), responsible for checking flightplans and issuing IFR clearances to departing aircraft. &lt;br /&gt;
#Ground (GND), responsible for all traffic on the apron and the taxiways. &lt;br /&gt;
#Tower (TWR), responsible for movements on the runway and within its associated Control Zone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Because Tower and Ground controllers rely very strongly on what they see out of their window, these are the positions which are situated within the airports control tower. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Apart from that there are the controllers who manage the traffic once it has left the control zone. They are again divided into: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#APP Positions, managing the traffic within the airports vicinity (the so called TMA, Terminal Area). In Austria they are situated directly at the airports. &lt;br /&gt;
#ACC (Area Control Center, on VATSIM the abbreviation CTR is used) positions, which are responsible for enroute traffic. They reside in Vienna.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the air is too crowded, APP and CTR can be divided horizontally (lower and higher APP), vertically (north APP and south APP), or a director responsible for approach spacing - but we won't want to make it too complicated for now. Local procedures and agreements regulate it, how this is done.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Since they all use their radar to control air traffic, they are also called Radar positions.&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
=Login as OBS=&lt;br /&gt;
With this preparation, you are fit to login as Observer. You can listen and understand what happens and learn from others doing. Important info and the Euroscope software can be found [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=SOFTWARE_ATC here]]. (You must be accepted as controller to access the page. If you are not yet, contact your mentor).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please abide to the following rules:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Logged on as Observer, your callsign should be a letter code (best are your initials) and &amp;quot;_OBS&amp;quot;, like &amp;quot;CF_OBS&amp;quot;. In the &amp;quot;connect&amp;quot; dialogue, set the visual range to 100 - the maximum allowed range for observers. If you exceed, you will get a nasty whack from a VATSIM supervisor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can log onto the VACC Austria Teamspeak server. Software and access instructions are [[http://www.vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=SOFTWARE_PILOTS here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Teamspek is recommended - vital ATC coordination happens there. If you want to listen to controller coordination then switch channel to where those controllers are who you monitor. Say hello, say that you observe and learn, and then shup up. Don't even ask if intense coordination is going on - wait for a pause in traffic and conversation. Do not change into a channel where an exam is going on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you ask a question, then wait for a pause and ask first, if you can ask a question. You can do so by PM in Euroscope or via Teamspeak. Do not ask if traffic is intense, if a training or an exam is going on (in trainings, you might want to ask the trainer in a PM first). Controllers are happy to explain, but ATC is first.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=More Info=&lt;br /&gt;
*from the [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/VACC_AUT_BasicLesson.pdf VACC Austria Basic lesson]&lt;br /&gt;
*on definitions from [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/vacc-sag-definitions.pdf VACC SAG]&lt;br /&gt;
*on METAR from [http://dl.dropbox.com/u/8371094/somewherepublic/metar-vacc-sag.pdf VACC SAG]&lt;br /&gt;
* METAR definition [http://www.skybrary.aero/index.php/METAR SKY BRARY] &lt;br /&gt;
*on a lot more brilliant documents from [http://forum.vacc-sag.org/?PAGE=training_pilot VACC SAG]. (with which we share important training documents)&lt;br /&gt;
To download them, register yourself as user with VACC-SAG, it's free.&lt;br /&gt;
*a very explained in detail documentation is the Pilots Guide check here also the METAR section [http://vacc-austria.org/?page=content/static&amp;amp;id=PTM Meteorologie]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== More information on Radiotelephony ====&lt;br /&gt;
... are not really an option at VATSIM. We take the real thing as reference, and this reference is '''really''' thick. Some links for further reading:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The [[http://www.caa.co.uk/docs/33/CAP413.PDF British CAA Radiotelephony Manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
* The [[http://ivaosy-data.com/Radiotelephony_Manual-Doc_9432.pdf ICAO Document 9432 on Radiotelephony]]&lt;br /&gt;
* As work in progress: there is a Wiki Page: [[Study Guide:Radio Telephony]]&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
'' Overview: [[Study Guide]] - Next: [[Study Guide:Delivery]]''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide&amp;diff=2601</id>
		<title>Study Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide&amp;diff=2601"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:38:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Currently we provide following training documents: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==== Currently we provide following training documents:  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:OBS]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Delivery]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Ground]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Tower]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Approach]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Radar]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Airport Details]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Low Visibility Procedures]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide:Special Procedures]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide&amp;diff=2600</id>
		<title>Study Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://wiki.vacc-austria.org/index.php?title=Study_Guide&amp;diff=2600"/>
		<updated>2012-09-25T08:38:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Michael Woehry: /* Currently we provide following training documents: */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==== Currently we provide following training documents:  ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide: OBS]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide: Delivery]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide: Ground]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide: Tower]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide: Approach]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide: Radar]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide: Airport Details]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide: Low Visibility Procedures]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Study Guide: Special Procedures]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Michael Woehry</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>